+ ++] option, a window is displayed which reports the distance to axis, height, and code for each point. By default the selected soil uses the codes -100 and 100 that define the whole platform. In the basic library (c:\ispol\lib) there is a file named Leelinel.txt that picks up the codes forecast in the program in detail. In the case of CODI ext=100 (platform cut with subgrade) the selected soil is not discontinued below this point but is extended up to cutting the slope of the embankment or the slope of the ditch in the case of the levelled area; in this latter case, if the selected soil is deeper than the ditch, it is stopped at the vertical of the bottom of the ditch. Practical example: A dual carriageway with three layers, each one of 30cm., of selected soil under the roadways, which, from the edge of the inner verge, end with a 1/1 slope towards the central reservation. In the central reservation area these 90cm are filled with a different material. Definition: • Layer 4 (upper) Central reservation fill: Thickness: 0.9 Exterior code: -11 (edge of inner verge). Outer slope: 1.0 From Above. • Layer 1 (The highest under the roadways) Thickness: -0.6 (depth= 0.9 - 0.6= 0.3) • Layer 2 Thickness: 0.3 (depth = 0.9 - 0.6 + 0.3= 0.6) • Layer 3 Thickness: 0.3 (depth = 0,9 -0.6 + 0.3 + 0.3= 0.9)
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 43 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The last valid point for the reframing of the subgrade (cut with the slope of the embankment, point on the vertical of the bottom of the ditch or on the vertical of the exterior code). The outer closure of the over-excavation of levelled area can also be done from behind the ditch, inserting an appropriate exterior code (pe 1103). In some of the selected soil layers of lexcavation, the extension can be made to match with the one of the previous layer, activating the scar. box (scarification).
Tab. Reinforcement If the box is activated, then the program will read the information defined in the [REINFORCEMENT TABLES] menu, instead of the information for selected soil of this table. On defining soil selected using [REINFORCEMENT TABLES] and the Normalisation or Widening modes, layers parallel to this may be defined from the Selected Soil menu on the layers 3,4 and 5. The thicknesses of these parallel layers can be given in any of the three columns (RSG, CSG, FSG). In previous cases determination of the superelevation of the existing roadway is optimised. In the mode [REINFORCEMENT TABLES]ÆNormalization, if we insert a value for the gradient, different to zero, this value will be used, instead of the superelevation value of the existing roadway. If the subgrade is lower than the surface of the existing roadway, (that is, if the normalization layer is not necessary), for the rest of the defined layers for selected soil, their depth is measured from the subgrade on the edge of the existing roadway (in this way its thicknesses are kept).
Median This option allows the selected soil to be made parallel to the peak of the central reservation, in the area where the reservation cuts the subgrade. [0.00] Min.Grd% With this option, whenever inserting a value different to zero, if the superelevation is equal to or inferior to this value a dual selected soil is constructed with the minimum gradient (forming an automatic ridge). If the superelevation is higher than this value, the selected soil is used as up to now, parallel to the subgrade. For dual carriageways, if the superelevations are less than the defined value with Min.Grd%, an automatic ridge is constructed on both sides for the selected soil. Under the central reservation the gradients will look for the lowest point of the two (see diagram).
For dual carriageways of a single lane, if the superelevations are less than the value defined as Min.Grd.%, an automatic ridge is constructed for the selected soil although the grade line is subparallel.
PAGE: 44 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[0.00] Sup.% (LimÆRB). Superelevation for taking the ridge under the edge of the roadway. This option works whenever options Min.Grd.(%)and Sup.% (LimÆRB) have a different value to 0. When a value is given to Min.Grd.(%) the program optimises the position of the ridge of the selected soil and, whenever the superelevation is equivalent to this minium gradient, the ridge is situated under the edge of the roadway. If a different value to 0 is given to the field Sup%(LimÆRB) the ridge is taken under the edge of the roadway, when the superelevation reaches the given value. For example, if we have a road that goes from a camber of (-2 // +2) to superelevation of (2%) and we have a selected soil with minimum gradient of 4% and Sup.% (LimÆRB)=2, then the ridge of the selected soil will go to below the axis in the camber area to be under the left hand edge of the roadway in the area of superelevation 2.
SubParal. (subparallel) In this case the superelevation of the main roadways are taken with the ridge in the centre and is extended underneath the verges, etc... as in the case of the minimum gradient ([0.00] Min.Grd.(%)). [MORE DATA>>] An extension appears on the information screen that allows insertion of the SLOPE ext and SLOPE int. values. For application of the exterior slope, three possibilities of the From option exist. • • •
[Down]. The slope is drawn from below upwards and towards the outside, starting in the vertical of the exterior code plus the distance. [Up]. The slope is drawn from above downwards and towards the inside, starting in the vertical of the exterior code plus the distance. [Previous]. The slope is drawn in extension of the previous layer (the one which is just above).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 45 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
With the option [MORE DATA>>]ÆC/F Ref. the ground reference may be selected for applying the thicknesses of the levelled area or embankment, there are two possiblilities: • •
[Adequat.G.]. Adequate Ground (by default) [Inadequat.G.]. Inadequate Ground
Depth. [0.00] If we define a selected soil only for the embankment, then instead of stopping on the ground reference, it will continue on until replacing the indicated depth under the ground reference shown. (suitable or inadequate). The depth value may be equal to the depth of the scaling, the height of the scaling steps or the sum of both.
The table for defining Selected Soil is saved in the *.vol file, but it may also be saved and recovered in archives with extension *.ssl. RSG1 from
Ground In levelled areas the depth of the base of the first layer of selected soil can be defined from the ground. For this to happen in the menu OVER-EXCAVATION AND SELECTED SOILÆ[MORE INFO>>] the option
RSG1 from Ground. The option can be used for sections. Line 107 is recoded (base of selected soil) in the following way: The points particular to the central reservation, which have the codes -100, -99, o -75 in the subgrade, keep these codes. The points that are supported on an upper layer keep codes 1800,..., 2000,... The remaining points carry codes 20, 21, 22,... On the levelled area the overexcavation can be extended further from the vertex of the roadway until cutting, for example, the extension downwards from the slope of the levelled area. For this to happen we will set: • • •
Exterior code: 1103 (this is the last point on the roadway, another one can be set) Slope_Exterior==Slope_levelled area (another can be set) From: [Up] (Is the only case in which exceeding the vertex of the roadway is allowed)
On the levelled area the interior slopes can be made parallel to the slope of the levelled area. When an inner slope is defined, indicated on a code plus distance, the slope, or its extension is made to pass through a point of the subgrade whose distance to the code is conserved. With variation of the superelevation of the grade line, the true distance from this slope to the embankment slope is changed.
PAGE: 46 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Now, if we choose the interior code to be 100, and a negative distance of, for example, -3 metres, the interior slope will be at 3 metres from the embankment slope, and the negative value of the interior slope may be set. The program will interpret the absolute value of the slope and the negative symbol will be used as an agreement so that the program in this case will make the interior slope or its extension pass through the space to the requested distance from the code on the horizontal, in this way the distance of this slope to the embankment will remain constant. Also, on the embankment, if a slope closure is defined from above (or previous) and on a profile on a embankment, he line of selected soil is underneath the ground, the defined slope is employed from the foot of the embankment to cutting of the selected soil (See following image).
It is possible to join the two points using a right-hand segment, which specify the selected soil for the interiori (Interior Code + Distance), including when the subgrade cuts the central reservation. For this to happen in the Overexcavation and Selected GroundÆ [MORE DATA>>] window, a SLOPE int of [-1000] is used. Let's remember the importance of using other negative values of the SLOPE int: • • •
•
The slope is always taken in absolute value. If a negative value is given there is only a difference when a distance other than zero is defined to the interior code and, when the subgrade, is not horizontal in that area. When the slope is defined with a positive value, the start up point of the subgrade is at the horizontal distance defined from the point with the code, and this implies that the point where the slope finishes at the bottom of the selected soil can be moved laterally with respect to the superelevation. When the slope is defined with a negative value, it is made to pass through a point at the horizontal distance defined and at the same height as the point with the code. In this way the start point of the slope on the subgrade can vary laterally with the superelevation, but the point where the slope finishes on the bottom of the selected soil remains constant. Simulation of fill coating
SELECT GROUND LAYER WITH: • INTERIOR start up code (p.e. 100) • Distance to the negative interior code. (p.e. -3) • Inner slope closure. (p.e. same value as the embankment slope) If on a profile, the distance is added to the point of the subgradeline with the interior code, the point of reference remains on the other side of the axis, marked with a reference point at the distance required and with the following height: • •
If, at the slope a positive value is given, the height of the subgrade is put on the profile axis. If a negative sign is given to the slope (agreement for respecting the horizontal distance to the code), the same height is put as the point with the code.
• From that point a line is drawn with the slope required until searching its cut with the selected soil layer, and the part that remains on the other side of the axis is deleted.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 47 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
In the graphic display the following selected soil layers appear: • • • •
A first layer of 0.5 m for filling under the central reservation up to 0.75m from the edge of the inner verge (cod.ext= -11) with an outer slope of 1/1. A second layer with the same thickness as the first one and an extension of it (SST=SSD=0. SSR=0.001) until the end and with a slope of closure for levelled area of 2.8/1. A third layer of 0.5m only for levelled area with vertical slope of closure from the previous layer (From=Previous). A fourth layer that is a scarification of the overexcavation of the levelled area of thickness SSD=0.6
4.2.6- Fill Drainings This option allows designing and calculation of fill scalings for emplacement of fill according to three main types, with their variants, covering the possible solutions to this question. On entering the menu FILL DRAININGS a data table appears with information to which the definition lines for each section can be added. This definition will be saved in the *.vol file and calculated with the order [Calcu.] of ELEV. Also, it can be saved in files with extension *.spt.
In the upper left area, on adding data, we have the option Type [0 / 1 / 2] that allows us to select a type of scaling. At par value, the program for each selected type only displays the necessary boxes, hiding the rest. Codes Lt/Rt Allows definition of codes of the surface of the embankment, in order to delimit the scaling. Different types of scaling can be applied to the same KP, defining the different areas in accordance with codes of the surface of the embankment. In the scaling menu the different areas that are applied to the same section of KPs must be defined from left to right of the profile. Example: We have a piece of land on which an existing road is recognised on the section of the embankment. A road-widening project is carried out from the existing road and a type 1 scaling, with some properties
PAGE: 48 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
determined in the original land areas, and a type 2 scaling with another different geometry in the area of the existing embankment. The first step would be, by means of the profile editor, to encode the feet of the existing embankment on the land profile. For example, we set: Foot of existing left embankment code 15 Foot of right existing embankment code 5 I n the scaling ground menu they will be defined with the same section of KP's of three lines of data as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Scaling Type 1. Code_Lt=0 Code_Rt=15 Scaling Type 2. Code_Lt=15 Code_Rt=5 Scaling Type 3. Code_Lt=5 Code_Rt=0
(If on one side the code 0 is set, it is understood to be up to the end of the section for this side) If the left code of an area does not match with the previous right, that is, if they are not contiguous, in the hole a horizontal scaling will be carried out with the lowest height of the two extremes. There are three main types (of those derived from all the other configurations) and they can be seen by pressing the option [See Model] on the fixed menu on the right or from the keyboard [Model] in the pop up window.
Scaling with draining layer (type 0) The required data, as well as the initial KPs and end of the section, are the minimum height of the embankment H that determines the execution of the scaling (in descending direction). It is measured from the crowning of the embankment and the base line of the same, situated on the suitable terrain (type of line 66) and underneath it, same scaling is not carried out.
The steps start to be constructed on a reference line, at a depth P from the suitable ground. From the start point that the H, ISTRAM® line marks, only the steps with a given slope T and a width A. The layered will come up to the point of the foot of the embankment, attempting to take it to the surface (drainage).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 49 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The closure can alsow be executed like those that are defined for types 1 and 2. For this, we should use the data C (Slope of the closure) and Type (Type of closure [0 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4]). Previously, the layer of draining material of thickness D is added, following the line of excavation of the resulting layerings. In the volume determination, according to the ISPOL3.dar it is measured in the following way The excavation necessary for the scaling of the embankment, that is, the volume between the base lines 66 and that of layered scaling 87. The layer of draining material, between the lines of layer 89 and scaling layer 87. The scaling, up to the ceiling of the draining layer. Two particular cases can be given within type 0. In the first of them, layering (A = 0) does not exist and the line of reference would be the same line of suitable terrain 66 of base of the embankment (P = 0). In this case, the thickness of the draining layer D could be greater than that of inadequate ground or vegetation Also, the circumstance can arise in which there is no layering (A = 0) and the depth of the reference line matches the thickness (P = D) of the draining layer. In this case, the drainant layer is supported on the reference line and its ceiling will be line 66 of suitable terrain. The depth values P and the thickness of the draining layer D can vary between the initial KP and the final one of the section. Embankment scaling where the height of the embankment is less than the particular value Type=0 scaling can be defined with width of step A=0, noting in the H box the maximum height of the embankment from which scaling is not carried out, But annotating this value with a negative symbol –H the foot of the embankment is then scaled until the height is H or the whole width of the embankment is less than H. Scaling using layers of equal thickness (type 1) The choice of machinery has various parameters. The parameter of the minimum width Amin comes conditioned for the width of the excavation machinery, so that layer thicknesses are for the spreader machinery. There exists a value M of the global gradient of the ground in the profile band that determines
PAGE: 50 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
execution of the stepped layers. If the gradient exceeds this value limit M, the excavation of the stepped layers will be carried out.
This excavation starts from the foot of the embankment, with a slope C given until cutting line 66 of the suitable ground (base of levelled area).
In accordance with thickness E of the layers, a certain number of them will be able to be extended in order to construct the step. In the figure, the corresponding thickness to the layers exceeds base line 66.
1. 2.
The first layer will be extended and will arrive at the cut of the base line of the fill with the second. Checking that the resulting width A is greater than the minimum tolerable width Amín . On the other hand, the minium width is excavated and executed according to the procedure mentioned previously.
The closure with the foot of the embankment can also be configured so that it operates like types 0 or 2.
Scaling using maximum and minimum steps (tipo 2)
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 51 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Again, Amin is the minimum width per step. Besides, we have a maximum Emax step in this case and a minimum step Emin. A draining layer may also be included on the embankment scaling type 2. M (%)
(gradient of the terrain). It is a limiting factor for which reason the stepping is carried out from the moment in which the gradient of the terrain exceeds that particular value M (%), as the stepping is not carried out in areas that the gradient is underneath. The gradient is analysed only at the beginning of an ascending or descending section of the land profile. On the other hand, the line of reference for the layered is positioned at depth P. M (%) ; If the verification box is checked, the program prevents stepping in areas with less gradient to that indicated even if these areas are placed on an ascending or descending section of the land profile. For the first step a different width can be defined with value A1.
The design of this type of step starts with a minimum width Amín or A1, having a slope T until cutting the reference line. The height reached is compared to the dimensions of the minimum step Emin and the maximum step Emax. Closure of the excavation finally made on the vertical of the foot of the embankment, with a C slope, but can also be configured like types 0 or 1. If this height is less than the minimum step Emin, the minimum width will be exceeded until managing to execute the minimum step.
PAGE: 52 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
If its value is found between the minimum steps Emin and maximum Emax it is executed in accordance with the height reached.
Finally, if the resultant height is greater than the maximum step Emax, we execute the minimum width Amin and we build a preliminary step with the value Emax, continuing then with a new minimum height
Scaling with references to TC, TI or TCp The References [TC] / [TI] / [TCp] are applicable to scaling types 0 and 2:
[TC]. (suitable terrain) Is the default option. [TI]. (inadequate terrain) The land ceiling is taken as a reference of the inadequate terrain for generating the scaling. Underneath this scaling inadequate terrain does not need lifting. In the measurements of the table ISPOL3.dar: • •
Inadequate terrain is not considered inadequate if it remains below the line of scaling. The measurement of excavation of scaling is still only considered underneath suitable terrain, as is the scaling embankment. Above suitable terrain the excavation will be measured with the INADEQUATE and the fill with the EMBANKMENT.
When a embankment scaling with reference is defined on the surface of inadequate ground, the performance in levelled areas is modified. The line of scaling is completed (87) for the line of overexcavation (107) or subgrade (68), or for that of inadequate ground (105) where it is lower than those ones. So, underneath the platform the inadequate terrain of line 87 is not lifted.
[TCp]. (suitable ground plus a depth) Measures the depth of scaling, as well as the TC, from the suitable ground, but with the following difference: • •
With TC: It is scaled when the subgrade or overexcavation is underneath the suitable ground line. With TCp: It is scaled when the subgrade or overexcavation is underneath suitable ground and up to depth p. (It is considered as a embankment while the subgrade is above the depth p, that is, areas with levelled areas of depth less than p). In the event that there are Roadwidening and Improvement projects the reference TCp must NOT be used on defining the embankment scaling and type 2 is recommended to be used.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 53 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Scaling of embankment and vector levelled area on inadequate ground The levelled area on inadequate terrain is compatible with the embankment scaling. Serves for any type of scaling (0,1,2) but a CLOSURE TYPE 1 can be used. Then, the embankment slope goes down to the line of suitable terrain (L66) and from that point 2 lines will be born: • •
The first one towards the exterior is the levelled area vector on inadequate ground that goes up to cut the surface of the terrain (L104). The second one towards the interior is the line of excavation of scaling (L8). Closures of scaling type 3 and 4
They are similar to type 2, but instead of taking the starting point as the vertical to the foot of the embankment to the depth of the scaling; the starting point for scaling is found on the extension of the foot of the embankment, following its slope up to the scaling horizon. The closure of type 4 is similar to type 3, except for the Fill line (86), which instead of going from the foot of the embankment through the surface of the ground towards the end of the scaling; keeps going down with the embankment slope until cutting the bottom of the scaling and then accompanying this line until the end. The Measuring of the Embankment then does not include the part that would fill the planting ground up to the surface, that is, measure from the suitable ground upwards within the embankment slope. The measuring of Embankment_of_scaling measures all the scaling excavation (underneath the suitable ground) and the quantity that remains outside the extension of the embankment slope. This part is measured separately in case it is filled with different material up to the surface and outside of the embankment slope. In the table ISPOL3.dar it is modified for the SCALINGS with CLOSURE TYPE 4: • •
The EMBANKMENT_OF_SCALING is measured up to the extension of the Embankment slope. A EXTERIOR_SANEO measurement is added: FILL: Fills the hole of excavation of scaling outside of the embankment slope and up to natural terrain. Borders and scaling of two types in the same profile
[BORDER] In the EMBANKMENT SCALING menu, a border line on the ground plan can be selected. The scalings can be carried out only on one side of the line or on both sides:
[BOTH/LEFT/RIGHT] Two scalings in the same KP can coexist (equal or concealed sections) one of them on the left of the line and the other on the right. For example, in the event that the road is split, a embankment appears supported partially on another existing one, the supported part on the terrain with a type of scaling and the part supported on the existing embankment with another type may be scaled, selecting the foot of the existing embankment as the border line. If scaling is defined for one side of a border, a distance to the line of the border can also be indicated. If two scalings are defined in a same area p.e: • •
Right side of the border + 2. metres Left side of the border - 2. metres
The remaining area through the middle is scaled with a single horizontal section to the lowest height of the two lateral scalings.
PAGE: 54 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Scalings and areas of occupancy and expropriation When a EMBANKMENT SCALING exists with Type 2 closure (it is started further from the foot of the embankment). The following lists and drawings are modified in order to examine the true areas of occupancy: 1.
Generated from the Diagram of Masses option: 1) List dmas.res: right width and left width. 2) List desbr.res: longitude and areas embankment clearing.
2.
Generated from the ground plan drawing that includes the edge marking (*B*.lil): 1) List areas.res: Coordinates of the edges of the areas reached. 2) IS#zonas.rep: For reframing of the edges. 3) Drawing of the edge marking of occupancy.
3.
From the ground plan drawing which includes transversal lines (*T*.lil): 1) The transversal line of the section is extended now through the fill line.
When a EMBANKMENT SCALING exists with a Type 2, 3 or 4 closure (it is started further from the foot of the embankment), the margin of expropriation is measured from this new point.
4.2.7- Pavement Composition This menu allows definition of roadbeds and their application to a wholly calculated axis.
Each section allows a maximum of thirty components whose geometry is defined from a series of parameters that we will analyse later. Furthermore, the maximum number of different sections of road surfaces is increased to 200. In order to generate the roadbed of an axis, the geometry of the platform and subgrade is used which is collected for this axis in the ISPOLn.per file resulting from the axis calculation in the SECTION menu, (the capping layer, selected soil or overexcavation, that in all these cases are named apart). The elevation and platform axis and calculations must therefore be completely defined, before generated the roadbed. The start and finish KP of the subsection of roadsurfaces must reach the required area (not extrapolated) so that generation of the road beds works properly.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 55 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
This breaking down of the road surface results in a list (firmen.res) of measurements broken down and a file of profiles ISFIRn.per with the geometry broken down of the roadbeds fro each axis. This file is independent of the corresponding ISPOLn.per file, if one can be joined to the other in a subsequent operation of profile editing [Mixing]. If it is for road widening and improvements, the generation of the roadbeds must be done before the improvement operation, because because the latter modifies the subgrade in order to adapt it to the existing road surface and the subgrade, modified in this way, would generate deformed roadbeds. The operations of joining and truncation of platforms that alter the technical theoretic content of the ISPOLn.per have similar consideration. The adaptation of the road surface to these platform modifications is made in a single operation with recalculation of the roadbed, present in that menu and in that of SECTION. On pressing on the option [Sect.] of the vertical menu the surface 67 is also drawn (grade line) so that it can be visually seen if the FILLS are going to exist.
For any road surface section, visualisation with any section type and on any KP can be chosen with the vertical menu options. On change of section of road surfaces or modification of the initial KP of the current section in the display window of the section, the section of road surface on the initial KP of application of this secion will be shown, with the section type that corresponds to it according to the data of the Areas of Calculation. When the option [PAVEMENT COMPOSIT.] is pressed, the application offers a dialog box where we may define the geometry for the different roadbeds and section by KP’s where each one of them is applied.
Let’s take a look in detail at each one ofthe areas of the menu: The lower area of the menu allows insertion of the values that define the thicknesses of each layer and their use with respect to the subgrade. Parameters to define for the road surfaces
DATA
1 / ; 1 Allows application, or not, of a certain component of the current piece of information. The number accompanying the verification box shows the number of the layer. When, along an axis, there are several sections of road surface to apply, and some of them have less components, these must be left in the same order, declaring with
those that are not applied.
PAGE: 56 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
The scaler accumulates totals in accordance with its sequential number, not its name; so if a section has Natural Ballast (1), Intermediate Layer (2) and surface layer (3) and on the other section (engineering structure) ballast is not applied nor is intermediate layer, these places 1 and 2 must be left with
keeping the surface layer 3 in place so they can all be totalled correctly.
DATA 1 2 3
SECTIÓN 1 ; Natural Ballast ; Intermed. Layer ; Surface layer
SECTIÓN 2
Natural Ballast
Intermed. Layer ; Surface layer
LAYER [C1] Allows a name to be assigned for identification of the component from the list of measurements. By way of example some possible names are given on the model which is shown on the gaphic display on entering this menu: R, I, BB, RA, ZN, ZA, SC, GC,... etc. It is a single word without spaces that does not have more than 10 characters. TYPE This option controls how the layer is prepared with respect to the gradient or subgrade. Five types of provision exist: • [XT_SRF..]. Extension surface: Parallel to the grade line. Default option. Gradient equal to the grade line, which is extended under the verges. •
[XT_INT.].Extension intermediate: Intermediate gradient between the grade line and subgrade, which is extended under the verges. This can only be employed for subparallel ridges.
•
[XT_SUB..].Extension subgrade: Parallel to the subgrade. Gradient equal to that of the subgrade, which is extended under the verges.
•
[BK_SRF..].Break surface: Parallel to the grade line, accompanying the possible breakdown of the verges.
•
[BK_SUB.].Break subgrade: Parallel to the subgrade, accompanying any possible abrupt changes of the verges.
LEFT Z [0.000] RIGHT Z [0.000] Minimum vertical distance from the subgrade, to the surface of the layer. If it is a section of double roadway, it will differ to that of the left and right side so that they can be made different. DENSI. [0.000] (density) Allows a density to be defined for each layer of road surface. On the header of the menu the option List Tonnes appear. If this option is activated in the summary of measurements, the TONNES appears with this value, (the densities are taken on the first section of the road surfaces). LEFT In this area the widths and the slope of closure on the left of the axis are defined for each layer of widths. Ext. S [0.000] (exterior slope) Lateral slope of closure from the layer through the outer side. Ext. W [0.000] (exterior width) Excess width of the layer measured from the outer edge of the main roadway and with positive values outwards. It can also be measured with respect to the outer edge of some of the shoulders, adding 1000 x the number of the verge to the distance.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 57 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
So, for example, if we want to extend a layer by up to 15cm after the edge of the first outer verge we put Ext. W [1000.15], or, if we want to reach 20cm after the edge of the second outer verge we put A.ext [2000.2], etc... This outer width can also be given from the code 1, putting 9000+width_outer. References of the following type are also admitted: Ext W [-1000.25]. Indicates 0.25m inwards from the edge of the first verge (code 11). Ext W [-2000.20]. Indicates 0.20m inwards from the edge of the second verge (code 12). Ext.W [-3000.15]. Indicates 0.15m inwards from the edge of the third code 13). Int W [-1000.25]. Indicates 0.25m towards the main road from the edge of the inner verge (code -11). If the verge which is referenced does not exist, go to the previous verge. A transition can be made between two sections of road surface, on those which a layer is referred to a verge and on the other section is referred to the edge of the roadway or to another verge. Int. S [0.000] (Interior slope) In the case of a single carriageway this does not have any significance for a centred layer. But on a layer that is extended over a verge with a falling slope, outwards and inwards, here the lateral slope of inward closure is introduced. In the case of a dual carriageway it is also the lateral slope of closure of the layer, on the side of the central reservation. Int. W [0.000] (Interior width) In the case of a single carriageway there can only be negative values for displacement of a layer completely outwards with inwardly falling slope. In the case of dual carriageway it is the excess width of the layer, measured from the white inner band and with positive values towards the central reservation and negative ones towards the outside. If the distance is required with respect to the edge of the inner verge we add 1000 to the distance asked for. In summary of all the casuistry possible in the references for excess widthsthe following table is attached: Interior edge of verge of the central reservation Interior edge of the main roadway Exterior edge of the main roadway
Code -11.
Aext 8000
1.
9000
+-
+-
11.
9000 +-
12.
+8000
+2000
Exterior edge of the third verge
+-0
2. 1000
Exterior edge of the second verge
+1000
+-0 Exterior edge of the first verge
Aint
+-
13.
+7000
+3000
+6000
RIGHT Ext. S [0.000] (Exterior slope) Ext. W [0.000] (Exterior width) Int. S [0.000] (Interior slope) Int S [0.000] (Interior slope) The same considerations as for the left side. When any layer of roadbed protrudes laterally through the geometry of the grade line it is truncated by it, otherwise areas remain which are measured as filled. The four width boxes and slopes are declared fro the right and left side independently.
PAGE: 58 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Other options of the pavement composition menu
Str.KP [0.0000] (Start KP) KP from which the current section of road surface is applied.
End KP [0.0000] (End KP) KP up to which the current section of road surface is applied.
End Sec.[0] (end section) Number of the end section. If a value different to 0 is given, on the section understood to be between the initial KP and the last KP, a transition is made between the current section of road surface and the one whose number we annotate in this box.
SECTION NAME: [
] (name of section)
Allows a name to be given to the current section that will appear on the lists.
[Model] Makes a redrawing of the help drawing.
[Generate P.C.] (generates pavement composition) Has the same importance as option [Generate P. C.] of the SECTION menu. Applies this definition, calculates and generates lists (firmen.res and Fin.res) and the profiles file (ISFIRn.per). The measurements are carried out using the ISFIR.dar table, if the component names defined here are respected. Each ISFIRn.per uses the corresponding ISPOLn.per file in its generation. [Recalculate P.C.] (recalculates pavement composition) Has the same importance as the option [Recal P. C] of the SECTION menu. Compares the file ISFIRn.per with ISPOLn.per, correcting the geometry of the first one if it finds modifications of the subgrade or truncation on the edges of the secion, recalculates and generates the aforementioned lists.
; List Filling Allows activation or deactivation of the appearance on lists and profiles of the aforementioned fill componente. For calculation of the fills it is not necessary for a measurement named ROADSURFACE to exist in the ISPOLn.per, the program recalculates the total value, measuring the area between surfaces 67 and 68.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 59 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
From the whole possible surface road surfaces, the program considers filling the areas between lines 68 and 67 that have not been defined.
List Tonnes. If this option is activated on the measurements summary the TONNES column appears with this value. (Defined densities are taken on the first section of road surfaces). As the list of tonnes is active, the measurements are not printed or accumulated for those layers with density of 0 or volume of 0. On the firmetot.res list, also printed are the tonnes on the adjoined summary of volumes. List Irrigations. This option can be activated for each axis. If the lists firmeN.res is activated, they contain the total spraying for each layer of road surface. In the list firmetot.res the total spraying for each layer of the whole project appears, although the option has not been activated on any of its axes.
[Save Model] [Load Model] These options have a similar meaning to [Save M] [Load M] that appears in the SECTION menu, but instead of saving the ISPOLn.per files in this case the ISFIRn.per are saved which contain the road surface layers, copying them onto another series of files named NNn.per in order to protect them from rewriting by other previous calculations. NN is the base name that we give and n is the axis number, as always. Likewise the file where the names of the saved roadbed files are saved is called NN.mpf. Careful on making this save, as the name is different for the series of ISPOLn.per files than for these ISFIRn.per files. [Save1] [Load1] Allows saving and loading of the current roadsurface section in the independent file of extension *.1pf, which makes it possible to generate road surface libraries that can be re-used.
[Save] [Load] Allows saving and recovering of the collection of defined sections into a single file named *.pfm, along with the sections of the application. When loading, the current definition of roadbeds and their sectioning is substituted by the reading.
[1-10...] [11-20...] [21-30...] (number of layers) Allows insertion of information for the new layers. On roads with a single lane of zero width the theoretic superelevation is extracted from that side, that is, fromt he value in the table.
PAGE: 60 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Scheme for generation of geometry of the roadbeds • • • • • • • • • • •
Each component of the roadbeds is calculated using the previous ones as they are constructed. The height is taken in order to give the elevation that the ridge has or the minimum point of thickness of the roadbed. A line is drawn (parallel to the grade line, at the subgrade half way between the two) that passes throught calculated point. Its A ext is added to the width of the main roadway (white exterior line) and from that point a straight grade line is drawn T until it cuts the subgrade. The widths can be negative and then it is narrower than the roadway. The analogue process on the side of the central reservation is done if this is the case. The same thing is done on the left side. A theoretic element is designed here that comes up as far as the subgrade. The geometry is discounted (the space occupied already in the section) for the previous objects (the 1 and 2 for element 3). In this way there is a new component that can stand out over the previous ones for the right edge, for the left edge or for the sides. Besides, it can either stand out over or not, from the previous elements. Let's imagine that they are cartons placed one behind the other in the order 1 to 10. What you see is what is designed and mearsured for each component. Pavement Compositions for road widening and reinforcement
In each section of road surface its area of use can be defined:
~ On the whole section { On road widening { On reinforcement This allows definition of roadwidening and improvement projects on the same section, on a different section of road surfaces in the area for Widening and in the area of Reinforcement. (two sections with the same KPs). If a same layer layer appears in the two sections (p.e. surface layer) can have a different thickness in the road widening area than in the reinforcement area. The materials for regulation will be included only on the section of reinforcement and will be deactivated on the corresponding box for the road widening section. If we want different sections of road surface in reinforcement and in road widening we should proceed in the following way: • •
Firstly we define the sections of the road surface on the whole section or on the different sections, ordered by KPs. Then we add the different sections ordered in KPs in reinforcement to the end. The sections in reinforcement do not have to cover all the KPs.
Example: If we want to carry out road widening and improvement using the following layers of road surface: • • • • •
Surface layer of 10 cm in Road widening and 15 cm. In Reinforcement. Intermediate of 10 cm. only on Road widening. Ballast of 30cm. only on Road widening. Regularization wedge on Reinforcement if necessary under the layer of the surface layer up to the existing road surface. Minimum thickness of the roadbed 50 cm (on the subgrade menu).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 61 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Then two sections will be defined: Section 1: Type ~ On Road widening. •
Layers: o o o
Layer 1: Ballast up to 30cm Layer 2: Intermediate up to 40cm (Thickness=10cm) Layer 9: Surface layer up to 50cm (Thickness=10cm)
Section 2: Type ~ In Reinforcement. •
Layers: o o o
Layer 3: Regularization wedge up to 35cm Layer 9: Surface layer up to 50cm (Thickness=15cm) (If the surface layer in reinforcement is required to be measured separately, we can assign it to layer 8 instead of 9)
The calculation process is as always: 1. 2.
3. 4.
Calculation of section ISPOLn.per. Generation of the roadbed ISFIRn.per: in this phase the program analyses the existing area of road surface that is going to be used and applies the secion in reinforcement in this area, and outside of it, the section in road widening. Provisionally, the regularization wedge goes down to the new subgrade. Road widening and Improvement of the Section ISPOLn.per Recalculation of the Roadbed ISFIRn.per. In the area being used, the existing road surface substitutes part of the regularization wedge).
[Reorder] This option orders the information of the road surfaces in the following way: 1. Places in front those defined for the whole section or for road widening. 2. Places those defined at the end for reinforcement. 3. Each one of the two groups reorders them by the initial KP This option also is run automatically on calculation of the roadbeds.
4.2.8- Footway
This menu allows definition of the verges placed on the platform in KP sequence, regardless of section type. The gradeline is defined with three segments D1H1, D2H2, D3H3, on relative coordinates.
PAGE: 62 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
The value of [D3...] also can be given as a distance to the geometric axis [D_eje...] The value of [H3...] can also be given: • [H3...] By increase of height from the previous point • [Height...] Absolute height. • [P%..] Superelevation from the previous point (positive flow outwards) On pressing on the two keys [D3...] [H3...] the application changes the way the inserted value is dealt with. The value [D_axis...] can be calculated from a Line 2d. [Dist_Axi By 2DLine] The option [D_axi × line 2D] keeps the state of the button [H3...] [Height...] [P%...] if this is H3 or P%. The pair (D_axi, Height) can be calculated from one 3d line. [Dist_Axi,Height By Line3D] When using a 2d or 3d line the rest of the information are copied from the first piece of information on the list. (At least one piece of information is needed). The options [Dist_Axi By 2D Line] and [Dist_Axi, Height By 3D Line] when previous data already exists, only those whose KPs are within the control of the line are deleted. When the final point is defined for distance to the axis, it is not inserted if a retreat is perceived in the KP with respect to the previous point. The subgrade is defined by two parameters:
D Distance that the subgrade is extended from the last auxiliary roadway underneath the footpath. E Thickness of the pavement. Before fixed Platform If the verification box is activated it allows construction of the parametric pavements before the fixed platform.
[LEFT. => RIGHT.] Allows copying of the data from one side to the other. If modifications exist for the section the option [Project .vol] of SECTION projects the KP’s of the pavements of the old axis to the modified axis.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 63 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.2.9- Expropriation margins
This menu allows definition of the terrain margin which will appear on the profiles ISPOLxx.per from the foot of the embankment or head of the levelled area. This last point of the terrain is the one which will be used later for drawing the edges of expropriation on the ground plan, with the files of type E.lil. If no value is inserted, the program takes DEFAULT EXPROPRIATION MARGIN that is declared in the [PARAMETERS] menu, the default margin is of 5 metres. The information of the margins of expropriation are saved in the files *.vol, but can also be saved int he files *.mge.
[By Line] The value of the margin of expropriation can be given as distance to the axis on the ground plan. It can also be defined using a line with the [By Line] option. In this case the values used in the table are taken as distance to the axis.
PAGE: 64 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
4.3-
LINEAR WORKS
Design of sections
The previous chapters describe the data table definition menus that configure the upper surface of the road. They are the grade line menus, central reservation and eccentricity, road widths, turning axes and superelevations. All these are tables with data for KP. Their aim is to define the "surface" of the works. What is a section The Sections attempt to define the geometry necessary for sustaining this; that is, the roadbed (as a whole) and the earth movements. There are some tables with more variable data. They are for definition of selected soil, crowning of the levelled area, berms, etc… The remainder enter into the concept of section in the strict sense of the term, or section for earth movements. Parts of the ground section are defined on it modularly, and they have in common the fact they are definitions for invariable geometric performance, and as such they are applied to complete sections between two KPs. They are the definition of SUBGRADE, EMBANKMENT, LEVELLED AREA (including roadways etc.) and VECTORS (fixed platform, central reservation ditch,…) and the SECTIONS OF CALCULATION on which each one of the sections is applied. We will see in the description of Calculation Areas, how the Section can also be variable with lineal transitions of the geometry between two sections, one defined at the start of a section and the other defined at the end of the section. Assigned to each section is a sequential number. The order for defining the sections is independent of the sections that will be used later on. In the menu SECTIONS and SUBGRADE, as many sections are defined as are going to be used for the axis in design and which is the geometry of the subgrade. When we add a new section, employing some of the options: [Add] or [Repeat]; we must define here the geometry of the subgrade. The definition of up to 500 sections per axis is allowed.
[Save1] [Load1] [Save1] Generates a file *.stp with the data that define the current section. The current section is the one which is found on the highest part of the dialog box and can be modified using the options [-] [Dato n/N] [+].The information is saved in a file with extension *.stp and contains information of: • • • •
Geometry of subgrade. Section of levelled area. Section on embankmenti. Fixed platform.
This allows creation of libraries of sections, so that they can be used in later projects.
[Load1] Loads the data from one of the sections available in the files *.stp over the current section.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 65 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.3.1- Geometry of the subgrade Defined in this section are the existing geometric links between the last road and the subgrade of the soil, as well as other elements such as the thickness of the roadbed or the selected soils that are closely connected to the data defined here.
[NAMES >>] To each section type a name can be assigned which is stored in the *.vol file. This name may appear on editing the ISPOLn.per file and if it is loaded the *.vol file.
To define the geometry of the subgrade the following data is used, whose meaning we will try to explain in the adjoined drawing (model).
PAGE: 66 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[MIN.L.THICK] [MIN.R.THICK] Minimum thickness of the roadbed for left and right platforms. The data must be consistent with the thicknesses that are given to the different roadbed layers. The maximum thickness of the roadbeds is 200 metres. This allows us to make channels on the roadbeds on which geometry is defined with the grade line and the geometry of the excavation with that of the subgrade.
HIP RAFTER Its geometric evolution follows that of the grade line according to six performance standards among those that may be chosen.
[AUTOMATIC] Places the ridge automatically in order to optimize the volume of the road surface. During the superelevation transitions, the ridge is gradually moved from edge to edge of the main carriageways. The minimum thickness is applied on that point, and from there, the "minimum gradient of the subgrade" or the superelevation of the corresponding carriageway if it is greater, in order to arrive at the line of the auxiliary roadway of the edge being dealt with.
[SUBPARALLEL] Places the ridge under the geometric axis (on single carriageway) or under the white interior strips (if it is a dual carriageway). The minimum thickness is applied equally on this point, and from it it arrives at the edge of the main carriageway with the superelevation gradient increased on the "increase of gradient" so that the road surface is swelled up to the outer side of the main carriageway, if the increase is positive.
[AUTOMA_EXT] (automatic extended ). The ridge is generated the same way as for automatic; however it does not stop on the edges of the main carriageway, but continues with the same gradient up to the width assumed by component number one of the roadbed. This component must be strictly defined in width and the road surface slope or the ditch must not truncate when applied in this case. Allows the excess widthsof the first layer to be defined with respect to the edge of the verges. If its measurement is not of interest, it can be given a thickness of zero.
[SUBPAR_EXT] (subparallel extended) Arrives at the component width number one of the road surface, with the geometry of the subparallel case. Allows the excess widthsof the first layer of road surface to be defined with respect to the edge of the verges.
[INDEPENDENT] The location of the ridge is carried out by the user regardless of the superelevation or the turning axis. In this case the definition of the geometry of the subgrade line is carried out from the menu [INDEPENDENT SUBGRADE LINE], to the design style of the platform.
[AUTOMATIC_SHOULD] This is the same as the [AUTOMATIC], but the ridge can pass underneath the outer verge as far as its edge. On dual carriageways, if this option is activated the automatic ridge can be moved from the inner edge of the interior verge (code -11) as far as the outer edge of the exterior verge (code 11).
MIN.GRAD % (minimum gradient of the subgrade line)
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 67 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
In the case of the automatic ridge, it defines the minimum gradient of the subgrade line under the main carriageway and under the verges. In the case of the subparallel it is used under the verges. The information is given in %.
GRAD INC. (increase of gradient of the subgrade line) In the case of the subparallel ridge, the subgrade line under the carriageway has the same gradient as this one, swelled towards the outer sides at an angle defined here.
SUBSHOULDER The gradient of the subgrade line under the verges is defined by the minimum gradient with a control for which the following possibilities exist:
[EXTEND] (extended) The subshoulder is placed in extension of the subgrade of the main carriageway. [BREAK] The minimum gradient of the subgrade line is applied for the subshoulder gradient. If the difference of superelevation with the main carriageway exceeds the maximum value allowed, it is placed with a difference equal to this maximum value. [PARALLEL] In the case of the subgrade line subparallel, this option constructs the subgrade line under the verge, with the superelevation of the verge, independent of the superelevation of the main carriageway. Beneath verges 3 and 4 the gradient of 2 extends. [PARALLELS] Takes the parallel subgrade to verges 2, 3 and 4. [EXT+BREAK] (extended plus sudden change) Works like the extended type underneath the verge and then suddenly changes under the hard shoulder etc. [TABULAR:] One of the tables from the library is used, with file extension *.sra.
PAGE: 68 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Tabulated subgrade file: ####################################################################### SUBGRADE: TABLE OF GRADIENTS (to use on subgrade TABULATED) ## Data for right carriageway, the left symmetrical. # # For SUBPARALLEL gradient of subgrade interpolated on the first # # column, the weight factor obtained is used for interpolation # # linearly on other columns the gradients to apply under the # # main carriageway the inner verge and central reservation (two # # carriageways)and the outer verges. # # For AUTOMATIC la GRADIENT MINIMUM used for carriageway and inner # # verge without noticing the columns Psubcarriageway and Psubverge 1 # # (advisable to define them using table with control SUBPARALLEL). # ###################################################################### # P-4i-Q7e.sra (parallel | 4% inter | quiebra 4% con limite 7 exter) # ###################################################################### # P rasan Psubroad Psubverge1 Psubverge 2 # # ------- ---------- --------- --------# PSB -100. -100. -100. -93. PSB -4. -4. -4. 3. PSB -3. -3. -4. 4. PSB 0. 0. -4. 4. PSB 4. 4. -4. 4. PSB 100. 100. -4. 100. ###################################################################### # fin # # --# FIN # ######################################################################
The table has its data organised into 4 columns. For definition of ridge [SUBPARALLEL], the known value is interpolated of the gradient of the subgrade between the data of the first column of table; the weight factor obtained is applied in order to linearly interpolate the gradients for application under the main carriageway, the auxiliary carriageway and central reservation (if it is a double carriageway) and the outer auxiliary carriageways. If the ridge is declared [AUTOMÁTIC] the data of the minimum gradient is used under the main carriageway and the inner auxiliary, without noticing the columns Psubcalzada and Psubarcen 1 of the table; however it is advisable to define tham for using the table with Subparallel control; the rest of the table is used for interpolation.
MAX. DIFF. (%) Maximum difference allowed between the transversal gradient of the subverge and the main carriageway. [RBÆHR] On subgrade lines of type [SUBPARALLEL] and [SUBPAR_ EXT] allow the ridge to be moved by a fixed amount with respect to its postion under the edge of the carriageway on dual carriageways or of the centre on roads.
[HRÆRSL] (Ridge according to Road surface Layer) Can be used for the [AUTOMATIC] and [AUTOMA_EXT]. Allows the top part of the ridge on the automatic subgrade line to be moved and automatic increase between the edge of the roadway and the edge of the verge [AUT_SHOULD]. This top point is defined by the position of the shoulder of a road surface layer. So the program uses the Sobre_Ancho_Exterior of that layer as the most external position for the ridge as long as it does not go above the edge of the outer verge. In the case of dual carriageways, the Sobre_Ancho_Interior is used for that layer as the most internal position for the ridge as long as it does not go over the edge of the interior verge. A deactivated road surface layer can be used [NO] from which we are only interested in the values A ext and A int for controlling the top position of the ridge. SUBMEDI. (subcentralreservation) Allows definintion of the performance of the central reservation from the inner edge of the interior verge inwards. It allows eight values.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 69 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[EXTENDED] They are extended, following the gradient until the central reservation is cut. If they do not cut it at the highest point the gradient will be given so that they join, forming a vertex with the lowest point on the geometric axis. [CONVERGENT]. The are extended towards the geometric axis and the gradient of the highest one is modified so that it joins, forming a vertex with the lowest. Later it will be determined if they cut the central reservation. [EXTEN_WPeak] (extended without peak) It is like the extended one but if it cuts the central reservation, the vertex of the central reservation is deleted and they are joined with a right section from the two points of the cut. [CONV_WPeak]. (convergent without peak). Is like the convergent but if they cut the central reservation, the vertex of the central reservation will be deleted and they will be joined with the right section from the two points of cut. [EXTEND_Step]. (extended with step) Similar to the extended, but if it does NOT cut any of the two sides of the central reservation and they have a different heights on the axis, a step will form here. [CROSSF%] [0.00]. (gradient percentage rate). The gradient is defined for the subgrade line on the central reservation, from the inner foot of the first layer of the road surface (the lowest one) or by default from the inner point of the SubVerge. (An extended subverge is recommended). In this case there exists the possiblility of intersection of the subgrade line with the central reservation. [PARALLEL] The subgrade line is generated in the area of the central reservation parallel to the grade line. [Super+ G%] [0.00]. (superelevation plus gradient. Gradient of the subcentral reservation) If the superelevation flows towards the central reservation superelevation plus gradient is applied. o If the superelevation flows towards the outside the gradient is applied. o If on the geometric axes of the section one of the two sides is lower, the other one will be made to converge towards it. In this mode the possibility of intersection of the subcentral reservation with the central reservation exists. o
[CONV+Depth:]. (convergent plus depth). In this case a convergent subcentral reservation is made, whose vertex is just underneath the vertex of the central reservation at the specified depth. This depth can match, for example, the thickness of the central reservation ditch. [STRAIGHT] This subcentral reservation is generated, joining a right section with the two points with code -11 (subgrade line on the inner edge of the interior verge).
PAGE: 70 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.3.2- Independent Subgrade line If, in the definition of the Section Type the type of RIDGE like [INDEPENDI.] has been selected (independent subgrade line) on the sections where this section is applied, the values deduced from the table that is defined in this menu are used.
On carriageways the Ridge can be [Single] or [Double], in this case there will be a ridge on each one of the two half profiles. In the case of the single ridge, its position is calculated from the geometric axis from the data Excen.D(m), (right eccentricity). If the ridge is on the left side a negative value will be inserted. In the case of the double ridge the Right and Left Eccentricity values are taken as absolute values. It is permitted that the ridge of the subgrade line is under the exterior verge as far as its external edge. THE THICKNESS CONTROL can be taken on the most favourable point bearing in mind the position of the ridge and the Left and Right Gradient, underneath the main roadways, activating the option:
~ Minimum Thickness under any point of the roadway. Or it can be taken as a fixed value, measured on the position of the ridge with option: { Fixed Thickness under ridge.
[Save] [Load] The files have extension *.cdf (share the format with the files of layer shape).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 71 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.3.3- Cut This menu allows the sections of the Levelled area to be defined. Using options [-] [dato n/N] [+], we can cover the different Sections, created in the menu SECTIONS so as to insert or modify the levelled area data associated to each one of them.
With the option of the fixed menu [Long M, YES/no] we can see all the data together (long) or ordered (short), that are visible plus graphic display. The option [Copy of] allows data to be brought from another section. [SYMMETRIC/ASYMMET RIC] The keyboard changes whenevener it is pressed. If the section is symmetrical, it is only necessary to define the information for the right side. The information of the left side is not used, whether defined or not defined. If an asymmetric section has been chosen we should define data on all elements of the section although some are symmetrical. The normal think is to define one side and copy it [Left Æ Rgt] or [Left Å Rgt], and modify what is different on the other side.
The [Model] describes the parameters that we can insert for describing the section, bearing in mind that we may require a different section on soil or on rock. All the abbreviations CA, CC, CD,... are identified in the main dialog box.
PAGE: 72 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
The advanced modes of levelled area or special modes like levelled area+wall, wall+L3D, also offer a model which explains their function to us. The information for one levelled area section has a development that is described in the following box, which offers us a general view of the possiblilites that we have for defining the way in which the section behaves in the case of levelled area. With the exception of the berms and the crowning that has its own sectioning of KP’s, the remainder of the elements are linked to the section type, so a good strategy is to study the project in depth in order to be able to identify an approximate number of section types and try to make sure they correspond to the advance in length of our work.
[Copy] The Copy option allows upload, on the current Levelled area and Embankment sections, of the information on any existing section in editing whose sequential number is requrested.
4.3.3.1- Control of the section and start of the ditch
The control of the section is the placement of the point whose position relative to the surface of the ground determines the use of the levelled area or embankment section. There are six modes:
[SHOULDER BOR. | BERM.BOR.] Control cut/fill on the edge of the shoulder border and start of the ditch on the edge of the hard shoulder. Checks if the final point of the verge is above or below the ground section. The platform is finished off with the hardshoulder and the embankment section; or the hard shoulder, ditch and slopes of levelled area respectively, applied from the starting point of the hard shoulder. This method suppresses the ditch as long as the edge of the verge is above the terrain. It is the most economical way for ditches.
[SUBGRADE | SUBGRADE] Control of cut/fill at the foot of the slope of the road surface and start of ditch at the foot of the slope of the road surface. From the start point of the hard shoulder, the hard shoulder of the levelled area and the slope of the road surface of levelled area verge are applied, until cutting the subgrade line. If this point is underneath the ground, then the ditch and slopes of levelled area are applied from it. If that point is above it is calculated again with the hard shoulder and slope of the road surface of levelled area. In the event of being above the slopes of levelled area are applied. If it passes below, ditch and slopes of levelled area are applied (the section is of levelled area, but because of its small height it has a ditch). [KERB BOTTOM | SHOULDER BOR.]
Control of levelled area/embankment at the bottom of the ditch and start from the ditch at the edge of the hard shoulder. From the start point of the hard shoulder the hard shoulder levelled area and the ditch are placed. If the bottom of the ditch is underneath the ground, the levelled area slopes are added. If the bottom of the ditch is above, the hard shoulder embankment, the slope of the road surface as far as the subgrade line and the slopes of the embankment are applied. [KERB BOTTOM| SUBGRADE] Control levelled area/embankment at the bottom of the ditch and start of the ditch at the foot of the slope of the road surface. From the end of the platform the slope of the road surface and hard shoulder levelled area are placed as far as cutting the subgrade line, where the ditch is located. If the bottom of the ditch is underneath the
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 73 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
slopes of levelled area are added. If it is above then the slope of the road surface and the slopes of the embankment and the hard shoulder are started again. This method means all possible ditches are placed.
[SUBGRADE | SHOULDER BOR.] Control levelled area/embankment at the foot of the slope of the road surface and start of the ditch on the edge of the hard shoulder. On applying this type, it is tested with the embankment section and if the point of control remains below the surface of the ground, then that of the levelled area is used (although the bottom of the ditch remains in the air). The complete ditch is constructed and although some or all of its points remain above ground, it is tested to see if the section geometry of the levelled area manages to cut the ground (although for this to happen it should be filled, embankment measuring appearing). If in any way the whole section remains above ground, then the section is constructed as it would be done for the type [KERB BOTTOM | SHOULDER BOR.].
[SHOULDER BOR.| SUBGRADE LINE.] Levelled area/embankment control on the Edge of the Verge and the start of the ditch from the Subgrade line. The section conducts itself on embankment as "Edge of Verge | Edge of hard shoulder" and of excavation of "Subgrade line | Subgrade line"
Defined in the same window as CONTROL/DITCH when the section is TUNNEL or CUT-AND-
COVER TUNNEL, which is explained further on when the Tunnel theme is explored.
4.3.3.2- Hard shoulder of road surface excavation The hard shoulder of which we are talking here, is the one defined in the roadbed, is applied after the roadway and verges and before the slope which is finished by the road surface. It is defined using the following parameters:
DB: [0.000] Width of the hard shoulder measured in metres. ZBD: [0.000] Level of the hard shoulder measured in metres. In this way, for example, a hard shoulder of ½ metre and 8%, will be defined as BD: [0.5] and ZBD: [0.04].
TYpe: [CONCAVE / NOT CONCAVE] If the slope of the hard shoulder is less than that of the contiguous roadway a hollow is formed at the start of the hard shoulder. It is controlled here if that hollow is permitted or is obligated to put the hard shoulder in extension of the last auxiliary roadway in this case.
TP: [0.000] (slope of closure of the roadbed) For cases when the ditch starts from the subgrade line. When the ditch starts from the hard shoulder, it is the ditch which finishes off the road surface, and if it is not sufficiently deep it is finished from its bottom with a vertical cut as far as the subgrade. Like all slopes, they are defined in metres for each vertical metre.
PAGE: 74 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Negative values can be used for the slope of closure for the road surface, TP. In this case it is the subgade which goes up with the indicated slope to search for the last point of the platform (edge of verge or of hard shoulder).
[Step] Unevenness of the hard shoulder due to not having a road surface layer or fill up to the level of the wearing course of the main roadway or of the verge. It is usually used with draining layers.
4.3.3.3- Gutter
Three ways exist for defining the ditch: parametrically, graphically and numerically.
Parametric definition of the ditch The definition is carried out using four values with which a ditch with or without flat bottom is constructed. This is the default method. The four values are the following:
ZC: [0.000] Depth of the ditch measured in metres. CC: [0.000] Width of the flat bottom of the ditch (0, for triangular ditches), measured in metres. CA: [0.000] Horizontal width of the face of the ditch next to the verge, measured in metres. CD: [0.000] Horizontal width of the face of the ditch next to the levelled area, measured in metres. Vectorial definition of the ditch. When the method of definition is in [VECTORIAL] we can enter to define data for the vector pressing [VECTOR n ptos]. When the variable n has a value not nil, that value matches with the number of points used on the vectorial definition of the ditch. The menu named VECTOR, is ® common to many ISTRAM options. From this menu a polyline can be defined, numerically or graphically, which describes, in this case, the cross section of the ditch.
Within the VECTOR menu and using options [Add] [Insert] [Repeat] [Delete] and [Start], we can prepare a list of pairs of data delta X, delta Y, which make up the segments that describe the cross section of the ditch. Using the [GRAPHIC] option the list of previously mentioned values are transformed onto a polyline at the same time of entering the line editing menu.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 75 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The graphic mode will not be able to be entered if there is not at least one piece of information present (add it if necessary, and then press GRAPHIC). From this menu or from others, across the drop down menus, we can graphically draw the cross section of the ditch, from the line that appears on screen. It is advisable to always use the piece of vector that appears on screen and extend it towards positive values of X, defining the right ditch. If a vector is defined to apply it as a left ditch, we will draw it also towards the right, assigning increasing values of X, points of the vector that are along the axis. this makes the vectors reusable for both sides. For example, calling the option [OPEN] from the drop down menu DRAW let’s obtain more space to draw with, or, using option [S < REJILLA > N] of the [TOOLS] menu that is in the dropdown MENUS, a grid appears on screen a measured grid which helps give whole data for the ditch dimensions. The anchor menus, including for the grid can be used. The blue grid helps to see dimensions of the drawing; but it is not anchorable (see [TOOLS] [Reji.Enganche]). We can assure ourselves that at the end of the editing process there will only be one polyline left, and that this will progress with “Point +” towards the right (start point at 0,0, start of the ditch). On exiting the [EDITOR] menu the polyline segments that have been graphically edited appear broken down sequentially for possible modification. The VECTOR menu allows us to save and restore files with extension *.vec using [Save] [Load]. On exiting VECTOR, in the corresponding box of the LEVELLED AREA the number of points appear that make up the vectorial definition of the ditch. If we then change to [PARAMETRIC] the window will appear stating the number vector points [Vector 0 ptos.]. If they have been defined previously, they can be recovered with the [Add] option of the Vector menu.
Ditch defined by its profile length
In the data window of the ditch a drop down menu appears which allows selection of how the ditch will be executed.
[Fix] (fixed ditch) Executes the ditch as it is defined parametrically or vectorially.
[By Longitudinal] (ditch defined by its longitudinal) In this case if the vertex of the fixed ditch is above the longitudinal that is defined for the ditch, the first segment is extended until it goes down to the height of the defined longitudinal for the ditch. Can be defined vectorially. In the GRADELINE menu we have the options: [Longitudinal of Roadways / Longitudinal of Ditches]. If [Longitudinal of Ditches] is selected two longitudinals are defined, one for the RIGHT ditch and the other for the LEFT ditch. These longitudinals are only used in areas where the ditch is defined by longitudinal and furthermore, the longitudinal is there underneath the point of the bottom of the ditch. As a help, it can be calculated previously with all the Fixed ditches. Drawing then the ground plan and running [Project Line] selecting the line from the bottom of the ditch. This option generates a file
PAGE: 76 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
*.lon which can be loaded in GRADELINES with the option [OTHER LONGITUDINAL]Æ[POLYLINE] with what we have on screen the profile longitudinal of the Fixed ditch which can serve as a guide for generating the longitudinal of the ditch. [By Long. To Height] (ditch defined by longitudinal to height). Can be defined vectorially and the 1000 key should be assigned to a point of the ditch vector. In this case the point with 1000 key recovers its relative height with the anchor point of the ditch (as the last point of the parametric ditch) and the previous points are not affected by the length. [By Long. =Width] In this type of ditch the point at the bottom (or both in the trapecials) go down to the height of the longitudinal, but the total width of the ditch is kept (the lateral slopes vary).
Closure of the subgrade line with the ditch SubGradeline [0] and Slope [0.000] options For Ditches placed on the edge of the verge or hard shoulder: • • • • •
By default when the subgrade line has to pass underneath the vertex of the ditch it is closed against the point of control of the ditch (Subgrade line [0]) and with vertical slope (Slope [0]). When the closure of the subgrade line is defined on a point of the ditch (0,1,2) with a slope and the short ditch on the ground before reaching the foreseen point, the subgrade line is closed towards the point of cut with the terrain and with the defined slope. It can be made to search for another previous point of the ditch (Subgrade line [1,2,...] and with any slope. The subgrade line can also be taken towards the point where the outer berm joins with the start of the levelled area. A negative value (p.e. -1 o -2) makes the subgrade line go up to search for the hard shoulder (code 50) or the verge (code 11), the point of cut holds code 100. In order to avoid disorder in the codes the points of the platform are re-coded (50,11,..) which remain after the cut of the subgrade line: (50Æ150, 11Æ111, etc...)
The slope must be such that the final bend of the subgrade line falls under the verge. The points of the ditch that now remain before the join of grade line-subgrade line are coded as 90, 91, ... (For example on a trapezial ditch CA=0.5 CC=0.5 CD=0.5 ZC=0.5 If we put SubGrade [1] Slope [1.000] the excavation for the subgrade is carried out, extending the slope of the outer face of the ditch until cutting the subgrade line. This can be competed as far as the selected soil making the exterior code 99, exterior slope=1, From Above). On slopes starting from the edge of the verge or hard shoulder and whose bottom is underneath the level of the subgrade line, a negative value is admissible now (-1,-2,...) in the SuBgrade [0] box of he menu DITCH with the same effect as for the reduced slopes.
Coating of the ditch Coat. [0.000] (coating measured in metres) The original measurement for the coating is picked up on the ispol3.dar table.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 77 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.3.3.4- Geometries of levelled areas on soil and on rock Excavation on soil PARAMETRIC MODE Successive heights are inserted whose stages are applied to the corresponding slopes. The definition of the slope is carried out using 9 parameters:
ZD1 [00.000] ZD2 [00.000] ZD3 [00.000] There are three growing heights on which we can divide the section for soil excavation for applying different slopes (las ZD are accumulative heights). The corresponding slopes are:
D1 [0.000], slope between 0 and ZD1. D2 [0.000], slope between ZD1 and ZD2. D3 [0.000], slope between ZD2 and ZD3. ABD [0.000], width of the berms (measured in metres). DBD [0.000], equidistance between berms (measured in metres). Pen [0.000] gradient of berms (measured in percentage rate). On the parametric soil excavation area the maximum number of berms can be fixed, by default 50. It must be remembered here that the slope is given in metres advanced on the horzontal in order to get an elevation of one metre in vertical, so that the slope 0 would be the one completely vertical and as the numbers increase it will be more flat. If we are only gong to use one slope, this should appear in ZD1, D1 and if there are two, they should be ZD1, D1 and ZD2, D2. The data not used can stay at zero. If in the calculation, the section of excavation on soil exceeds its height of ZD1, ZD2 or ZD3, instead of the slopes, ISTRAM® places a vertical wall after the ditch, or of the berms, if there are any, or after the uncovered rock, if it is rock. In this way, for example, if we have a surface horizon with soil of 2 metres, shiftable rock up to 6 metres in depth and the remainder suitable rock, an advisable application of slopes would set the fixed location on its head with intervals of 100, 102 and 106 for Z1, Z2 and Z3, in accordance with the figure
PAGE: 78 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
As well as parametric mode, on pressing the drop down MODE: other modes can be chosen for defining the section of levelled area.
On pressing on the drop down MODE: a help graphic is opened up on screen (a monkey) with the different possibilities for definition.
VECTORIAL MODE Instead of parametric definition we can carry out here definition for vectors (numeric or graphic), for sections of levelled areas on the soil in analogue or as explained on the ditch. When it is defined using a vector, if on applying it the intersection with the surface of the ground is not reached, then instead of a vector, a vertical wall will be placed.
The design on this vectorial shape allows the generation of levelled area slopes as elaborate as required In the vectorial mode the same graphic information is inserted, using a vector that can generate itself as graphically as it can parametrically using increments of X and Y
The LOCATION option allows switching between the usual mode [FIXED BY THE FOOT] and the [FIXED BY THE HEAD]. In the first case the soil excavation is applied from below to above, cutting the excess above.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 79 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
In the second case, the extreme upper is placed on the ground, and the remaining section is cut on the outer edge of the ditch or the rock, depending on each situation.
GROUND PLAN LINE
From a line on the ground plan, with coordinates X and Y, the program calculates the cut with the ground and joins this point of cut A with the last point of the ditch B.
If a wall of fixed height is defined, for the mode [GROUND PLAN LINE], first the wall is run and if this does not reach the ground, from the head of the wall, a slope is drawn up to the position of the 3D line or to the ground on the position of the ground plan line.
For the levelled area and embankment modes which use 2D or 3D lines the option [Volcar] is added which creates an edm line from the line stored in the .volfile. This allows the line to be edited without needing to load the edm file of the preceding one.
3D LINE
Similar to the previous method, but in this case we will get from the line the point A; which joined to the last point of the ditch B, will result in the corresponding slope of level area. This slope will be interrupted only on the line (point A).
If a wall of fixed height is defined, for the mode [3D LINE], first the wall is run and if this does not reach the ground, from the head of the wall, a slope is drawn up to the position of the 3D line or to the ground on the position of the ground plan line.
PAGE: 80 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
3D LINE + WALL
In this case the 3D line may represent the foot of a wall. Therefore, the last point of the ditch to the line is joined and the wall is continued vertically up to cutting the terrain. In the three previous cases in order to select the line we press the box [LINE 0 ptos] and then we select the line over the cartography. The selected line is presented on screen thicker and coloured cyan, likewise in the menu the number of points of the line will appear.
TABLE OF SLOPES.
Along with the option [TABLE _SLOPE] another key appears [T: n Slopes]. On pressing this key, a similar menu is deployed to the one for defining vectors, but with the two columns SLOPE and MAXIMUM HEIGHT. In the calculation, the program starts checking with the first slope of the table. If the ground is not reached with a height of less than the maximum anticipated, then the program starts to check with the next information on the table; if the ground is not reached with this with its maximum anticipated height, it jumps to the next piece of information and so on successively. If it is not possible to get to the ground with any of hte data in the table, then a wall is placed.
WALL+SLOPE+LÍNE 2D The 2D line is taken to the ground. From it a slope AMD/ZMD is drawn (using the crowning values of the wall) until it cuts the wall. However the wall is of variable height. The wall can either have slopes, width and depth, or none. If the line cuts the wall under the foot of the wall, the wall will be deleted, remaining a smooth slope.
If there is crowning of levelled area defined, the point of protection over the terrain of the 2D line is lowered a height A with the slope T for crowning of levelled area and from this new point the geometry of the Wall+Slope is executed.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 81 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
WALL PLACED D. WALL PLACED T. This type requires definition of a 3D line from which the height is taken on each KP. It is not controlled if the section is levelled area or embankment and the wall of levelled area is constructed up to the height of the line with the defined geometry for the levelled area wall (width, depth, slopes,….). The WALL PLACED D (levelled area type) hs the foot of the wall on the edge of the platform and the head of the resulting height of the 3d line. The wall can have an over elevation, a depth and other geometric properties that are defined in the wall of levelled area. The WALL PLACED T (embankment type) has the head of the wall on the edge of the platform and the foot at the resulting height of the 3d line. The wall can have an over elevation, a depth and other properties that are defined in the embankment wall. It is necessary to note that if the geometry of the walls are defined respectively in the submenus of levelled area and embankment, the walls placed in levelled areas and on embankments are both defined in the submenu soil/vault of levelled area. These types of wall are compatible with the option 5 Auto of the menus defined for walls, which search automatically for the wall of adequate height. VECTOR+WALL+L3D The vector is run from the edge of the platform. If the point defined by the 3d line on the profile is above the vector a levelled area wall is executed from the point until cutting the vector. If the point defined by the 3D line on the profile is beneath the vector, a wall of embankment goes up from the point until cutting the vector.
APPARENT SLOPE In this mode, the head of levelled area is calculated, using the slope D1, from the end of the ditch, but then the section with a wall of variable height is generated, closing to the previous calculated point, using the slope AMD/ZMD. The resultant heights of wall and slope are proportional. HIGH WALL BY 3D LINE In this case the height of the 3D line marks the height of the top of the wall, then it continues with the crowning of the wall and/or the section of levelled area on parametric soil that has been defined. If the 3D line takes the head of the wall above the ground, the section is closed against the terrain with the first defined slope in the embankment section. It is possible to activate the automatic selection of the wall from the table, in the case of HIGH WALL x L3D.
PAGE: 82 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
WALL + FLAGSTONE This mode allows a cut-and-cover tunnel from the walls, in which a crowning slab is placed and then it is filled. Two values are inserted: [H]: Free height from the height of the grade line up to the slab. [C]: Round off of slab. The walls are defined normally, giving their width, depth, geometry of base and of the excavation etc. Measurements: The total excavation is the value: Levelled area + Excavation_bases_wall. The total fill is the value: Fill_base_wall + Fill_slab. The measurement of the slab is also measured.
Alt TS [0] (alternative section type) If, in the event of applying the levelled area section the anticipated height is exceeded, and the number of the alternative section type is greater than zero, the program will try to construct the section of levelled area (levelled area on rock + levelled area on soil) with the data defined in the alternative section type. If with this section the maximum anticipated height is also exceeded, then the wall of the first section would be placed. Jumps to other sections are allowed as many times as there are existing sections. in this way, a series of sections of increasing heights can be defined, and the program selects the one it needs with respect to the height. The alternative sections can be independent for the levelled area, the embankment and for each of the sides.
[Æ I.L.] (inadequate ground) If this option is activated, the defined slope on the levelled area on soil is considered valid for the inadequate terrain and topsoil. In these circumstances the section of the line of the slope of levelled area that passes through the inadequate ground and topsoil will be changed to the type used on the levelled area on inadequate ground. Also the wedge of the embankment on the head of the levelled area is also considered unnecessary for sustaining the inadequate terrain and topsoil. If, in the section type the VECTOR OF CUT ON INADEQUATE GROUND has been defined, and simultaneously on the section of levelled area ground the option [ÆT.I.] is activated (the levelled area soil is valid for the inadequate ground) the program performs in the following way: • •
Fill: The slope goes down towards the suitable ground and then goes up with the cut vector on inadequate ground as far as the surface. Cut:. The geometry defined on the cut on the soil goes up to the surface but the section that passes through the inadequate ground changes the type to cut on inadequate ground (L69).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 83 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Cut on rock When on the Sections of Calculation on which a determined section type is used, a determined depth is declared for the roof of the rocks, which can be reached by the levelled areas, must anticipate a section to apply on the part of the section we are on which is on rock. This section of levelled area on rock is applied after the ditch and before the levelled area on the soil. Analogically to the others the levelled area on rock can be defined parametrically or vectorially. On the parametric definition two variables for each type of rock are employed:
CR [0.000] Is the slope for levelled area on rock.
RD [0.000] Is the horizontal difference of uncovered rock. From the intersection of the slopes on rock with the horizon of the rock, RD metres of width are left with the geometry of the roof of the rock before applying the cut on the next rock or soil. For a better understanding of the parameters, look at the standard that is shown on screen on entering the CUTmenu. The [Model] key refreshes the drawing standard. The parametric definitions are recommended as often as possible and for simplicity. Only when the complexity of some of the elements of the section exceed the possibilities of the aforementioned definition, will we be able to get to the vectorial definition that is more flexible. Use Cut on Earth Geometry On activating this option the geometry of the cut is executed as if only cut on soil existed, which allows the heights of the berms to be controlled from above or below regardless of terrain. The measurements study the different terrains.
PAGE: 84 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.3.3.5- Wall In some projects it is necessary to define a wall that carries out the functions of protection of the roadway against possible falls of different elements to the same (stones, trees,...) and also, in certain cases, obliged by the geology of the terrain. The dialog box offers us a complete list of parameters that allow us to define any type of geometry.
The application checks if the height required for reaching the ground exceeds that anticipated by the section and if so, substitutes the levelled area on soil with a vertical wall, from which its Depth: (depth) can be found, its Width:, the Slope: of the uncovered side and the slope of the extrados: for the purposes of its representation on the cross sectional profiles and the measurement of the implicated material.
Likewise, a mixed section of part Wall and part Slopes of Levelled area can be defined, defining the Height of the WALL. In this case if the section has less height than that defined for the wall, the whole section is WALL. The wall can project above the terrain of he height Hc.[0.000]. A base of thickness Hz can also be defined with mouldings of lenth Ai and Ae. Likewise, the mouldings can be defined Te and Ti for exterior and interior excavation of the wall. When the base of the wall interferes with the subgrade line, the subgrade line is made to pass over the base of the wall. Bi [0.000] (inner excess width of excavation of the base). Be [0.000] (exterior excess width of excavation of the base).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 85 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
With these controls, some interior and exterior excess widthsare permitted to be defined for the excavation of the bases of the walls. If the values Bi, Be, of the excess widthsfor excavation of the base of the walls are given negative values, the slope will start from the upper corner of the base, instead of the lower one. Likewise if the PlACEMENT of the levelled area on soil is [FIXED BY THE FOOT], the wall is placed from the ditch or the rock, and the slopes from the crowning of the wall up to the surface of the ground. On the other hand if the PLACEMENT is [FIXED BY THE HEAD], the wall is placed above the slopes. It is also permissable to define two values AMD: ZMD: so that the wall does not stop on the intersection with the terrain but at a distance AMD: and with a disparity ZMD:. These values also serve to define the slope AMD/ZMD in the levelled area option on soil according to [WALL+SLOPE+2D LINE]. The box [T] brings up the file from the library [ISPOL_D.tmu] (table of walls on levelled area) where a collection of parameters can be preconfigured for defining the wall. This table ISPOL_D.tmu allows addition of the five parameters that define the geometry of the bases. On selecting a wall from the table, its data is passed to the current section. A different table can be associated wth each section type and each side a different table. Auto. If it is activated the program searches in the ISPOL_D.tmu table (or the one declared for this section) the first such that its height-depth is greater to the height of the edge of the section to the soil. On the table they should be ordered by ascending height. Fixed height. Serves so that a wall of a given height keeps its height although its depth has to be greater to that specified. If the wall has a slope, a depth and a base the foot of the wall is extended, following the sope until arriving at the base. If a wall of fixed height is defined, for modes LINE ON GROUD PLAN and 3D LINE, the wall is executed first and if this does not reach the ground, then from the head of the wall a slope is drawn as far as the position of the 3D line or to the ground on the position of the line on the ground plan.
Wall on rip rap on section of levelled area A wall on rip rap may also be defined using the following parameters: Ai [0.000]. Width of the base of the rip rap. Prof. [0.000]. Depth from the last point of the ditch as far as the base. HZ [0.000]. Height of the header Ps % [0.000]. Gradient of the plinth in percent. The filter of the rip rap on the levelled area is defined in the menu COATING IN LEVELLED AREA. In the definition of walls of levelled area and in the case of rip raps, it can be forced that the trasdos of the base does not follow the slope of the trasdos of the wall but is vertical. ZTV
PAGE: 86 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Sections of cut for the tunnel and cut-and-cover tunnel Although this type of sections is defined in the independent epigraph, we will describe briefly here the properties of functioning of the application in these cases. When in CONTROL/DITCH and we declare TUNNEL the definitions for levelled area on rock, soil and walls disappear and a new window VAULT appears. In this window the number of the tunnel can be inserted (Num. Tunel:) corresponding to the geometry table that is defined in the [TUNNELS] menu. In the case of dual carriageways or railways of double track a different tunnel for each one of the two roadways or tracks can be defined with [ASYMMETRIC] section, or the two roadways or tracks can be included in a single vault that will be defined on the right side, in this case on the left side Num. Tunel: [0] should be placed. Also in the case of dual carriageways or railways of double track a tunnel for each one of the two roadways or tracks can be defined, and the other in open section (levelled area on soil). In this case it is necessary to define a section type for the area of the central reservation and declare central reservation open. The option [VECTOR n ptos] can be employed from this same window VAULT. It is recommended to use the option for definition of the analytic or vectorial vault from the Menu [TUNNELS] that will be explained in the later chapter. In the case of [CUT-AND-COVER TUNNEL] , as well as the number of the tunnel, the levelled area on soil can also be defined, in vectorial mode and the levelled area on rock. In the cross sectional profiles the the section of levelled area and the tunnel will be shown simultaneously, measuring also the levelled areas and the fill of the cut-and-cover tunnel, between the vault and the ground. In the case of dual carriageways or railways of double track with independent vaults or with mixed sections: Cut-and-cover tunnel or Open-Cut-and-cover Tunnel; it is necessary to define in this area the cenral reservation open with its corresponding section type.
4.3.4- Fill
In a similar way to the dialog box for the levelled area, the definition of the section in the case of the embankment is permitted, for the different section types created. In order to navigate. In order to navigate throught the different section types, we will employ the options [-] [data n/N] [+].
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 87 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The option [Copy from] allows the data to be brought from another section. The section of embankment is broken down into three subsections: hard shoulder, slope and wall, applying the latter one when the height of the embankment is not sufficient for finishing the section.
4.3.4.1- Berm on fill
The berm included in the roadbed (berm on fill), is defined analogically to that of the cut, using two parameters:
BT: [0.000] Width of the hard shoulder in metres.
ZBT: [0.000] Break down of the hard shoulder in metres. So, for example, a hard shoulder of ½ metre and an 8% cross sectional gradient is defined: BT: [0.5], ZBT: [0.04].
TYPE: [NOT HOLLOW / HOLLOW] Analogical meaning to the one explained on Levelled area.
TP: [0.000] Slope of closure of the roadbed for application when the embankment starts from the subgrade (when the ditch of the levelled area starts from the subgrade). When the ditch of levelled area starts from the hard shoulder and therefore also the slope of the embankment, if required, forces the slope of closure on the roadbed to the value TP we should also activate the window ; which is next to the parameter TP. Negative values can also be used for the slope of closure of the pavement, TP. In this case it is the subgrade which goes up with the indicated slope to look for the last point of the platform (edge of verge or hard shoulder).
Step [0.000] Analogue meaning to the one explained on levelled area. In the event of cut-and-cover tunnels a embankment slope using the parameters BT and ZBT is allowed to be defined. If the base of the cut-and-cover tunnel is in the air apply this slope and the embankment obtained is measured.
PAGE: 88 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.3.4.2- Fill slopes The geometry of the embankment slopes can be defined in a similar way to that of the levelled area, being able to be carried out parametrically [PARAMETRIC] or also vectorially [VECTORIAL]. Likewise it can be defined using: [GROUND PLAN LINE] (ground plan line) [3D LINE] [3D LIN+WALL] (3d line and wall) [2D LIN+SLOPE] (2d line plus slope) [SLOPE TABLE ] (table of slopes) [2DL+WALL+SLOPE] (2d line plus wall plus slope) [3DL+WALL+SLOPE] (3d line plus wall plus slope) On pressing on the drop down MODE: a help graphic is opened on screen (a monkey) with the different possibilities for definition.
PARAMETRIC DEFINITION Three values are used for increasing heights ZT1, ZT2, ZT3, measured from the foot of the embankment upwards on those that are applied three different slopes: T1 slope between 0 and ZT1 1. 2. T2 slope between ZT1 and ZT2. (Remember that the ZT are acummulateive heights 3. T3 slope between ZT2 and ZT3 If only one slope is required to be defined, the data should be written as (T1, ZT1) and if they are 2, as (T2, ZT2). (T3, ZT3) should only be used if there are three different slopes. Independently of the three defined slopes we can intercalculate hard shoulders of width ABT equidistant an uneven DBT and with gradient Pen (in
percentage rate). As maximum 50 berms are allowed. If in the process of calculation it turns out that the height of the embankment needed exceeds the larger of the values ZT1, ZT2 or ZT3, instead of the defined section, a vertical wall will be placed whose crowning will be distanced from the platform by a horizontal distance AMT and with a disparity ZMT. In the same way as the levelled area, all the elements of the section can be symmetrical to the left and right: option [SYMMETRIC], taking them then as valid data, those given for the right side, or it could be different: option [ASYMMETRIC]. If [SYMMETRIC] is declared, the data of the left side are ignored whether defined or not.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 89 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
VECTORIAL DEFINITION When the geometry required for the section cannot be defined using the previously mentioned parameters, recourse can be made to the [vectorial] definition, in which, numerically or graphically, the geometry can be created as already explained in the [CUT] menu in the section on vectorial definition of the ditch. The vector is defined graphically or numerically anchoring the point 0,0 for its foot with values of delta X positives or nil and delta Y positives increasing and negatives if any low point, that is, the embankment is defined from the left side, starting at its foot as is seen on the model drawing. In this case, if on applying the graphically defined section, the required height of the embankment is not reached, ISTRAM® places a vertical wall in the same conditions referred to previously.
Modes of application of the fill section At the time of applying the embankment section on a definite profile, regardless of the way in which it has been defined, ISTRAM® can act in two distinct ways:
PLACEMENT [FIXED BY THE FOOT] The extreme start of the definition that is moved over the profile of the ground, until a point of the section touches the platform; then the rest of the section that overhangs upwards is broken down.
PLACEMENT [FIXED BY THE HEAD] Fixes the extreme end of the polygonal to the edge of the platform. Then the intersection with the terrain is determined and the rest of the section that overhangs under the ground is broken down. In either of these two cases, if the height of the polygonal is insufficient for covering the required embankment, a vertical wall is placed instead of it at the distance AMT, and with a disparity on its crown of ZMT. The case for defect is the first one: [FIX BY THE FOOT].
PLACEMENT [SEMISTRUCTURE] Allows one of the two sides to be dealt with (left or right) as a structure and the other with the normal section of levelled area/embankment. If the sectionis symmetric or the two sides are defined as [SEMISTRUCTURE] the treatment is the same as that of a structure.
Alt TS [0] (alternative type section) If the anticipated height stops on the section type and the ground is not reached, before placing the wall, it is checked with the embankment of the Alternative Type Section. to C.L. If there is a thickness of topsoil cover and/or inadequate ground and the option ; Hasta T.C. is activated, the slope of the embankment goes down towards the suitable ground although the vector of levelled area on inadequate ground has not been defined. Equally, this option activated, the depth of the walls and the position of the 2d line for slopes defined by [L2D+WALL+SLO] (2d line plus wall plus slope), is considered to be on suitable ground. ; Fill foot In the case of having defined a vector for the levelled area on inadequate ground, this option allows filling of the triangle formed under the surface of the natural ground with the foot of the slope of the embankment between the natural ground and the suitable ground, and the slope of the levelled area on inadequate ground that goes back up from the suitable ground as far as the surface. Line L158 is created which represents this fill.
PAGE: 90 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Other ways of defining the embankment GROUND PLAN LINE
From a line given on the cartography, the program calculates the intersection with the terrain of the vertial that passes through the same, joining this point of cut A with the edge of the platform B. For the modes of cut and fill that use 2D or 3D lines, the option [Vault] is added that creates a line edm from the line stored in the .vol file. This allows the line to be edited without needing to load the file edm
3D LINE Given a 3D line, the edge of the platform B is joined with the line A, interrupting the resulting slope on said point.
3D LINE + WALL
Studies the case in which the 3D line has to represent, for example, the head of a wall. Taking this line as (point A) the slope is constructed of the embankment, joining with the edge of the platform B and a wall goes down until cutting the ground on
2D LINE + SLOPE
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 91 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Leaving from a ground plan line, from which point A of cut with the ground is calculated, a slope T is raised. A embankment is previously defined, fixed by the head and always parametric, that is applied from the edge B of the subgrade until cutting the aforementioned slope T. In the four previous cases for selecting the line we press the box [LINE 0 ptos] and then we select the line on the cartography. The selected line will be displayed on screen thicker and in cyan blue, likewise the number of points of the line will appear in the menu.
TABLE OF SLOPES.
Along with the option [TABLE SLOPE. d] another key appears [T: n Slopes]. On pressing this key, a menu drops down that is similar to the one for defining vectors, but with the two columns SLOPE and MAXIMUM HEIGHT. In the calculation, the program starts checking with the first slope of the table. If the ground is not reached with less height than the maximum anticipated, then the program checks with the following information of the table. If with this the ground is not reached with its maximum anticipated height, it jumps to the next information and so on successively. If it doesn´t manage to arrive on the ground with any of the data from the table, then a wall will be placed.
2D LÍNE+WALL+SLOPE The 2d line marks the foot of the wall (or foot of the embankment). The crowning slope stores the link AMT/ZMT defined for the wall crowning. The height of the wall will come marked for the intersection with the wall of the slope AMT/ZMT that goes down from the platform. The wall can have width, depth, slope and trasdos. If the slope cuts the terrain before the 2d line, the wall will not be placed and the slope will be taken to the 2D lne. This option is compatible with the automatic selection of the wall.
LINE 3D+WALL+SLOPE In this case the 3D line marks the head of the wall that is constructed from this point downwards (towards the ground) with the geometry that has been assigned. From the 3D line (head of wall) a line is drawn with slope AMT/ZMT (defined on walls). From the platform the slopes of the embankment defined parametrically are drawn until they cut the previous line.
PAGE: 92 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.3.4.3- Walls on Fill
If, on the application of the section of embankment (parametric or vectorial), it turns out that the height of the embankment required exceeds the anticipated value, instead of the section defined, a wall is placed whose crowning will be distanced from the platform of a horizontal distance AMT and with a disparity ZMT. This wall can likewise be defined with a depth Prof., a width Width, a slope for the uncovered face Slope and anoher for the Trasdos Extrados A mixed section can also be defined part on wall and part on slopes of embankment defining the Height of the wall. A wall on embankment remains defined in place of the height [Height], the value of a fixed height [Height] for the head of the wall. In this case if the section has less height than that defined for the wall, the whole section is wall.
___
The wall can overhang above by height Hc. In sections of bank more wal of fixed height and having activated the option [FIXED BY THE HEAD] the overheight of wall can be defined using this option. A base of thickness Hz can also be defined and wth bases of lenth Ai and Ae. Likewise the bases can be defined Te and Ti for the excavation and the fill of the seat of the wall.
When the base of the wall interferes with the subgrade, the subgrade is made to pass over the base of the wall. Bi [0.000] (excess width interior of excavation of the base). Be [0.000] (excess width exterior of the excavation of the base). With these controls, some interior and exterior excess widthscan be defined for excavating the bases of the walls controlled by the parameters Bi and Be. If the values Bi, Be, of the excess widthsfor excavating hte base of the walls are given negative values, the slope will start from the upper corner of the base, instead of the lower corner. With Ps% a gradient can be defined for the base of the wall. This value does not work if the wall has a base. Di [0.000] (distance to the trasdos) Walls of ground armed with the value Di can also be defined. If this value is greater than Ai the excavation and ground fill is carried out using this distance. It is permitted for the excavation to pass from the other side of the base until cutting the object outside the section that is used to define these walls of armed ground.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 93 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
A wall can be defined of armed ground on each side on the section of bank whose excavations are cut between each other. Likewise if the PLACEMENT of the Bank is [FIXED BY THE FOOT], the wall is placed from the ground, and the slopes from the crowning of the wall as far as the platform. ON the contrary if the PLACEMETNT is [FIXED BY THE HEAD], the wall is placed above the two slopes. WALLS TABLES.
[T] This box calls the file from the library [ISPOL_T.tmu] (walls table) where a collection of parameters can be configured for defining the walls. On selecting a wall from the table, its data go to the current section. Each section type and side can be selected from a different walls table. Auto If this is activated the program searches in the table [ISPOL_T.tmu] (or the one selected for this section) for the first one, such that its height-depth is higher than the height of the edge of the section to the floor The table can be ordered by increasing height. If in the walls table different values to zero are annotated. For AMT and ZMT the values of the walls table for the corresponding automatic wall are used. If the values of AMT and ZMT of the table are 0.0 then the fixed values inserted in the walls menu for the bank are used. Fixed height Serves so that a wall of a given height keeps its height alghough its depth may have to be greater to that specified. WALL IN RIP RAP A geometry for the area of rip rap may be defined, assigning values different to zero to the following parameters. • PS (%). Gradient of the heel of the base. • Prof. Height on the heel of the base. The height of the base of the rip rap can be at a determined depth and the filter of the wall (green line on the scheme) goes down toards the ceiling of the base.
___
• Ae. Width of the heel of the base. On the rip raps with heel of the trasdos nil or negative, an inner slope can be defined for excavation of the base.
A special rip rap from the foot of the bank can be defined that is constructed in the following way (see the model of wall on bank). • From the theoretic foot of the bank a depth is excavated Hz going down inwards with the slope Te. The bottom of the excavation has a width Ai and is closed by the interior towards the ground with a slope Ti. • From this point the rip rap is drawn, going up with a slope (trasdos) until cutting the slope of the bank and from here the horizontal until cutting a line that goes up from the theoretic foot of the bank with a slope that is inserted in the slope field. So that this rip rap is generated we must leave Height=Width=0 It is necessary to give a value to Hz that is greater than 0.
PAGE: 94 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
ARMED GROUND WALL
For walls of armed ground (Di < Ai), added into the table ISPOL3.dar is the measurement ARMED_GROUND. The line of excavation of the base goes up towards the subgrade or the slected soil. The part of armed ground above the suitable terrain is deducted from the bank. The part of armed ground under the suitable ground is deducted fromt the Fill_Base_Wall. DEFINITION OF GREEN WALL
In the definition of the wall of the bank three options exist for defining the height of the wall: • [Elevation] elevation of the wall. • [Height] fixed height of the wall. • [ZM.V.] green wall to fixed height On selection of the option green wall a new “monkey” appears that helps us in its definition. The geometry up to the hard shoulder is defined in this menu and the slopes above the hard shoulder, on the bank tab. It is necessary to define new parameters for confinguring this wall: E [0.000]. The height of the wall towards the bottom of the excavation has to be a whole multiple of this value. For this to happen the depth given is the minimum depth.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 95 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Hmin [0.000] If the height of the bank is less than this value, the green wall will not be placed. The material of the green wall is measured as Armed_Ground The width DI [0.000] of the fill of the green wall can be given as a fixed value in metres [m.] or as a percentage of total height from the base of the wall to the subgrade [% (H)]. A value dH [0.000] can be defined so that if the height of the green wall [ZM.V.] [0.000] remains under the ground, this height is increased in multiples of dH [0.000] until exceeding the height of the ground. It will be attempted to carry out the wall with this new height.
4.3.5- Vectors of fixed geometry We can apply 4 types of fixed vector, that is, they are applied independently so that the section is of levelled area or bank and it is not re-cut if they intersect the ground.
4.3.5.1- Fixed platform This menu allows the platform to be completed with fixed elements for each section type and independent of the law of superelevations. These elements can be small edges, pavements, lateral steps, dwarf walls etc. If elements exist for FIXED PLATAFORM, ISTRAM® places them behind the last auxiliary roadway before the hard shoulder (before taking the decision for levelled area/bank). The definition of the fixed part of the platform requires the vectorial design of that part of the section. The subgrade of the fixed platform, part of the end of the gradeline and the definition of hte subgrade line of the fixed platform (excavation) from the subgrade. On entering into [VECTORS] a menu is shown indicating for each section type and for each side (left/right) , the number of points of the fixed platform vector. Pressing on the required box enables entry for defining or modifying the corresponding vector. Once within the VECTOR menu the options [Add] [Insert] [Delete] [Repeat],and [Start] allow editing of a list of values delta X, dY, dY(sub), that have the following meaning:
delta X, dY: describe segments that make up the profile of the fixed plataform. The first piece of information is placed behind the grade line of the last auxiliary roadway.
delta X, dYsub: segments that make up the profile of the subgrade (excavation) under the fixed platform. The first one is placed behind the last auxiliary roadway, but the Y is measured from the subgrade. If the value dYsub is made sufficiently large so that the subgrade exceeds the grade line, on
applying it to the program it is held at the height of the grade line, deleting the thickness of the roadbed on that point.
PAGE: 96 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
If dYsub=-1000 is made, the subgrade is extended with the gradient which brings the subgrade under the last auxiliary roadway. The data of the profile of the fixed platform (delta X, dY) can also be edited graphically:
[Graphic] This option transforms the list (delta X, dY) on a polyline and enters in the menu EDITOR, allowing the user to modify it, using any of the options of this menu and others which are accessed throughout the drop down menus. On going back from the [END] of the menu EDITOR, ISTRAM® breaks up the polyline into the values (delta X, dY), which allows their numeric modification. If we wish to completely delete a fixed platform, we must delete all the lines of the list with the options [Delete] or [Start]. On exiting the VECTOR menu to the FIXED PLATFORM, in the corresponding box appears the number of points of the fixed platform vector associated with this side of that section type.
4.3.5.2- Fixed measurement and ditch of median In the event of a dual carriageway there exists the possibility for defining a part of the central reservation in a similar way, it is named FIXED CENTRAL MEDIAN, and in this case the vector is placed from the inner edge of the auxiliary roadway and before the hard shoulder on interior pavement for each one of hte roadways. The total width of the central reservation is kept, for which each one of the vector widths that define the fixed central reservation should have a value less than the semicentral reservation that has been defined in the menu [ECCENTRICITY AND MEDIAN]. After the last point of the vector, the central reservation is automatically completed with a segment up to the vertex of he central reservation. One of the fixed central reservations is also allowed to have a superior width to the one given in the semicentral reservation and to cross the geometric axis; in this case the ends of the two vectors are directly joined or the end of the vector that crosses with the hard shoulder on the opposite side. If there is no information for dY(Sub) (all at zero) the subgrade continues with its automatic performance. If the data are defined, these ones are applied from the end of the subgrade. Ditch of central reservation Analogically to the FIXED CENTRAL MEDIAN, the CENTRAL RESERVATION DITCH allows a fixed part of the central reservation to be defined, but in this case the vectors are placed from the vertex of the central reservation outwards. This vertex matches with the geometric axis in the central reservations defined by depth and the maximum and minimum centred slope, whereas for the ones defined by slope and maximum slope, the position of the vertex will depend on the defined slopes, on the geometry of the ditch of the central reservation and on the superelevation.
4.3.5.3- Cut on inadequate ground If a defined vector exists here, and on the section there exists topsoil cover and/or inadequate ground, ISTRAM® takes the geometry of the cut and fill up to the horizon of the complete terrain and from that point goes up towards the surface, employing the geometry defined here. In the event of levelled area, the profile continues towards the surface; in the event of bank, the slope of the bank goes down towards the base of the topsoil or inadequate ground and goes back to the surface with the geometry of this vector. Independent sectioning of the vectors Separate sectioning of the [VECTORS] is permitted (fixed platform, fixed central reservation, levelled area on inadequate ground and ditch of central reservation) similar to the subsectioning for ditches, levelled areas and banks [C] [D] [T]. To access this sectioning press on the key [V].
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 97 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
4.4-
ISPOL 9
Tunnel and cut-and-cover tunnel
This menu allows creation of a table of sections of tunnels that can be invoked later in different section types of the horizontal allignment of a Linear Work. For the application it is about one more section, generating itself however is a series of new surfaces so that their exclusive use will be possible on other sections of he program like the drawing of the crosssection, obtaining of measurements and the most important one, their specific use in the for follwing of tunnels. ISTRAM® allows definition of two types of geometry: analytical and vectorial. The first ones allow definition of the aspect of the vault, with little information, coating surfaces and total excavation. The same surfaces can however be defined with all kinds of vectorial complexity, as we will see later. Within the vectorial geometry the possiblility is offered for defining tunnels of “screen" type, the geometric calculation varying slightly for some of the elements and offering some parameters that are specific to this type of tunnel, as are the variable widths (which avoid definition of various types of tunnel) and specific control for the upper slab (when in existence).
Specific definition of elements The work environment has been improved so as not to confuse the user and to help the entry of data for each type of tunnel, the options remaining deactivated which are not used in each case. Each tunnel is constructed using some parameters with respect to the geometric centres of the section and to the various codes of the line of the platform, meaning convenience of positive and negative signs ( + y - ) that the construction of elements will be calculated towards the right ( + ) or the left ( - ). As in the rest of the areas for defining hte cross-section, on the lateral menu the possibility is offered for opening a window which shows the true section that would calculate the data, definition, in this way, being very easy.
4.4.1- Definition and application of the section type tunnel – cut-and-cover tunnel The first step for applying a section of tunnel consists on indicating to the application that a given section type is going to be a tunnel type. It is declared in the table of levelled area, in the section CONTROL/DITCH the option TUNNEL or CUT-AND-COVER TUNNEL and in the section GROUND/VAULT the number of he tunnel will be chosen.
Now, selecting the option [TUNNELS] from the elevation menu in which, as we shall see later, the geometry is defined of the different types of tunnel that are going to be applied on the current axis. The definition of tunnels can be stored in independent files, so that they can be immediately applied on other axes and even in other projects. The number of tunnel to apply is also possible, declaring it from the menu [TUNNELS] as will be explained later.
PAGE: 98 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Selection of one or two tunnels for each roadway In the case of double roadway (as is the case of a dual carriageway or railway with two independent tracks) a symmetrical section can be used when all the data are the same (geometry of vault and coutervault, bases and heels) or asymmetric in the opposite case. A number of tunnel must siimply be associated with each roadway (and of course, they must be defined in the corresponding section). In the event of needing a single tunnel, we should simply choose 0 for the left as section of tunnel (0 is none).
Definition of mixed sections and cut-and-cover tunnel It is also possible to define mixed sections, in which the section of the right part and of the left use totally different sections, as is the case with Open-Tunnel or Cut-and-cover tunnel.
In these cases it is necessary to define the section [ASYMMETRIC], performances in CONTROL/DITECH different and open central reservation for these areas (so that the geometric intersection can be calculated).
Transitions between tunnel type sections In areas of calculation transitions can be made between two tunnel type sections with different tunnel geometry. The tunnels should be of the same type (vectorials or analyticals).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 99 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.4.2- Definition of analytical and vectorial tunnels On opening the table [TUNNELS] from the elevation menu, the following box is deployed in which various differentiated areas can be observed: •
Upper part in which diverse load operations can be carried out, saving of information of the tunnel design, type of vault etc.
•
Origin of coordinates, centres and performance of the tunnel.
•
Geometric definition of the vault and counter vault
•
Definition of the bases.
•
Definition of the total excavation surfaces.
Now each of the options will be explained in detail: TUNNELS
With the Add] and [Delete] options we can incorporate new sections of tunnel or delete existing sections. The table of Tunnel Sections can be filed with the [Save] option or recovered from a file with [Load]. These files have extension *.tun. The [Save1] [Load1] options allow interchange of definition from one single tunnel. Nevertheless if an axis has at least one section of tunnel defined, the tunnels table will link to that axis and will save it within its file *.vol with the rest of the data that define the geometry of that axis. A horizontal slide allows navigation through the different sections of tunnel defined for each current axis. Each section of tunnel for an axis will be identified by its tunnel number. [APPLY TO T.S.] Allows the different section types to be seen on which will be applied the current vault, and also offers the possibility for applying the current vault to a definite section type. Important: on applying a vault from here to a section type, it is passed to be a tunnel type, in order to change to another type the [CUT] menu should be accessed. [Name] Possibility for inserting a name to each vault type.
PAGE: 100 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Drawing O1 With this option activated the symbol S313 is drawn on the position of 01 on the profilesISPOLn.per. With the mode of drawing CentroTun.lil the centres can be represented for the tunnels like a 3D line and, therefore, information can be extracted for that line, projecting it over the axis, generating a *.top, etc... The geometry of a section of tunnel is stored in two surfaces that represent the two exterior faces E and interior I or also called reinforcement and coating of concrete of the tunnel. A third surface T can also be created or complete excavation line. L9 Complete excavation L19 Reinforcement L12 Coating The data of that geometry are introduced using a series of parameters that we call [ANALYTICAL VAULT] that later the program applies to each definite KP with respect to the superelevation and the position of other points of control for the tunnel construction.
In the case of dual carriageway it is recommended to define a different section of tunnel for the right and left roadways, owing to the fact the data that define the geometry of the tunnel are positive towards the right and negative towards the left, So that although the tunnel may be symmetrical these data have a different sign.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 101 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.4.2.1- Analytical definition
ORIGIN OF COORDINATES, CENTRES AND PERFORMANCE
The application allows definition of a section of tunnel that uses three centres for defining the vault and a quarter that the couner vault applies. The [Model] option draws the following diagram, which helps us understand the meaning of the numerical parameters. The coordinates O1X, O1Y of the centre of the vault O1 are:
PAGE: 102 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
O1X: Distance to the turning axis (on motorways it is situated on the inner edge of the main roadway). O1Y: Differentiates elevation with the defined gradeline, bearing in mind the superelevation or rather, differentiates elevation with the roadway. The exact placement of this point can also use the following variants (using the drop down menu). [From the most unfavourable point] Uses the difference of height from the most unfavourable point (highest) of the two edges of the verges. [From auxiliary longitudinal] Allows reference to the elevation of the centre of the vault or the origin of reference of the vectorial vault from a longitudinal auxiliary. For example when the roof of the tunnel is a slab whose height depends on the level of the street, etc.. this auxiliary longitudinal must be defined in [GRADELINES]. [From the turning axis] Does not bear in mind the superelevation for the position of O1y and the height of the gradeline is used. The following selector allows choice of the way in which the vault is moved with the superelevation. O1 [Fijo] O1x horizontal measured and O1y vertical. [O1x,O1y Tilt with the superelevation] The value O1x is measured following the gradeline according to the superelevation and the value O1y is measured perpendicularly to the superelevation. [O2,O3,a1 Tilts with the superelevation] This option allows turning to the arc a1 with the superelevation so that the plane which joins the centres O2,O3 is maintained parallel to the elevation following the inclinations of the superelevation. The vault tilts rigidly. Also, O1X can be defined as a distance from the axis on the ground plan. In the case of railways O1X can be taken from the axis of the track and O1Y from the height of the rail. DEFINITION OF GEOMETRY OF VAULT AND COUNTERVAULT R1E and R1I are the exterior and interior radii of the vault respectively centred on the point O1 and cover an arc of a1 degrees sexagesimals. R2E and R2I are the exterior and interior radii of the right side of he tunnel. If R=0, this side will be right side R3E and R3I are the exterior and interior radii of the left side of the tunnel. If R=0, this side will be straight.. R4I and R4E are the interior and exterior radii of the counter vault, depending on the position of the centre and of the radii used we will obtain different results.
The program cheques that the radii inserted R1I,R1E,R1T have values increasing.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 103 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
In the event of activating the option Line of Total Excavation, the radii R1T, R2T, R3T and R4T, should also be defined, as well as the thickness et under the base and the gradient pt in order to apply in the case that the kerb is horizontal and the water is required to flow into a central drain. Each one of the previously defined arcs is separated in a number of section defined by the user. DEFINITION OF THE COUNTERVAULT R4I and R4E are the interior and exterior radii of the counter vault . Depending on the position of the centre and of the radii used we will obtain different results. The exterior and interior arcs of the counter vault may or may not be concentric: It is possible to define the interior radius better than the exterior one on the counter vault. A parameter can be defined e4 (minimum thickness of the counter vault). IF e4=R4e-R4iÆ The arcs are concentric, otherwise the centre of the interior radius is calculated so that it reaches the value e4. O4Y: Coordinate Y of the centre of the counter vault relative to the grade line bearing in mind the superelevation. Varous possibilities exist.
•
As O1Y. The vertical origin for the centre of the counter vault matches with that of O1Y. The centre O4 will be on the same vertical as O1.
PAGE: 104 / 134
•
C.B. Superelevated. The position of the centre is calculated so that the arc passes through the exterior corners of the bases. If this option is activated, the program does not use the value O4y and calculates the centre of the arc so that the exterior arc passes through interior and exterior corners of the lateral bases. O4 will still not be on the same vertical as O1.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
•
From Turning Axis. O4Y is measured from the turning axis. The arc of the countervault is obtained on the plane of the heel of the base or in its extension in the interior area.
•
As O1Y (V). is analogue to the option As O1Y, the only difference is that the arc of the counter vault continues up to cutting the inner vertical line of the base. This can be used for tunnels constructed with two vertical screens that are extended lower than the counter vault.
•
Primary reinforcement: Is analogue to the superelevated counter vault, but instead of searching for the corner the reinforcement line passes through the end of the primary reinforcement line.
•
Reinforcement secondary: Analogue to the previous but passing through the end of the secondary reinforcement.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
LINEAR WORKS
•
From Turning Axis (V). is analogue to the option from the Turning Axis, Being the difference in termination of the exterior arc of the counter vault. In this way, the arc continues until cutting the internal line of the base.
PAGE: 105 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
DEFINITION OF THE FOOTINGS T1X, T1Y are the coordinates of the point T1 and T2X, T2Y are the coordinates of the point T2 measured from the edges of the right and left verges respectively (or edge of ballast in case of FFCC, code 11). Also allows definition of a height and a slope for the interior part of the base of the tunnel and its intersection with the subgrade. zt2, zh2, zt1, zh1. The bases are controlled with Ty
PAGE: 106 / 134
•
Horizontal. From the code 11 the distance TY is drawn in vertical. From that point, it measures in horizontal the longitude TX. Lastly, it ends building the base, looking on vertical for the cut with the subgrade line and on horizontal with the surfaces of reinforcement and coating.
•
Superelevated. Is similar to the previous one but the base follows the gradient of the superelevation.
•
Independent (Independents of the superelevation). The heights T1Y and T2Y are both measured from the same origin as O1Y, therefore both bases will remain at the same height.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
•
Other roadway. Only serves for the double roadway and with double vault. It is like the independent but uses a reference of heights which is employed as a reference for the bases of the vault of the other side. This allows the bases, for example, of the left side to have the base at the same height as teh right side and vice versa.
•
Spin Axis. Is like the independent option but uses the heights as a reference for the base height of the height turning axis.
•
Vectorial. In the tunnels with [VECTORIAL VAULT], the base can be defined as TY [VECTORIAL]. In this case the complete tunnel is defined vectorially and the values T1x, T1y, T2x, T2y,… are not use. This is the applicable method for complete circular section tunnels.
•
Screen. For tunnels constructed with screens (vectorial vaults) the base of screen type Ty [Screen] can be defined. In this case the program uses the values of T1y and T2y to determine the height down to which the screens are lowered and the values T1x and T2x are not considered.
DEFINITION OF HEELS The tunnel bases can have a heel of length and height: Right heel: h1 and l1 Left heel: h2 and l2
TOTAL EXCAVATION AND REINFORCEMENTS Total line excavation
Allows activation of the flag for visualizing the total excavation line, and the radii R1T, R2T, R3T and R4T, explained previously, must also be defined. et The thickness of the theoretical excavation line under the base. p(%) The gradient of the total excavation line between the bases in order to apply in the event that the kurb is horizontal and the flow of water is required towards a central drain.
If the value et<0 or p(%)<-100 ,the program moves the theoretical line up, in these cases, to be between the bases to look for the subgrade. Primary Supp. [0.000] Allows a value representing the thickness of the primary reinforcement to be inserted.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 107 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Secundary Supp. [0.000] From this box a new layer is allowed to be added which represents the secondary reinforcement.
The lines that define the primary reinforcement and the secondary reinforcement can be parallel to the reinforcement line or to that of the coating. The following possibilities are admitted: (Plays with the sign values inserted) SP1(+) SP2(+) : The line of primary reinforcement is parallel and measured from the reinforcement towards the inside and the secondary reinforcement line is parallel to that of the primary reinforcement and measured towards the inside of the latter. SP1(+) SP2(-) : The primary reinforcement line is parallel and measured from the reinforcement towards the inside and the secondary reinforcement is parallel and measured from the coating. SP1(-) SP2(+) : The primary reinforcement line is parallel and measured from the coating and the secondary reinforcement line is parallel and measured from the primary reinforcement. SP1(-) SP2(-) : The primary reinforcement line is parallel and measured from the coating and the secondary reinforcement line is parallel and measured from the coating.
PAGE: 108 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.4.2.2- Vectorial definition
The vault can also be defined vectorially. For this to happen within the TUNNELS menu we change the Type [ANALYTICAL VAULT] to Type [VECTORIAL VAULT]. The interior, exterior and total excavation can be created or modified graphically. Usually they will be defined in a way that all the data excess will go towards the bottom so that the program can later calculate the intersection for each definite KP, according to the true position of the points T1 and T2
and the counter vault which continues analysing. It is very important to emphasize that the definition of the surfaces should be carried out using independent lines for the right and left part and also the sequence of points should go from above to below as we see from the illustration. This type of section is the most suitable for designing tunnels of screen type, with or without kurb or for defining the complete circular section of a tunneler (given that the analytical system always has a small geometric residue; labour of calculation that must be made for the bases, which in this case do not exist). As well as the vectors, the values Dx and Dy are also included, which define a relative movement of coordinates (0,0) from the vectors with respect to the turning axis. The value of Dx is applied
following the superelevation. The Option [Copy Vault Analytical] Creates some basic vectors from the analytical data and places the origin of the X on the vertical of the centre O1, copying also the value O1x on to Dx..
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 109 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The value O1x is not integrated within the vector given that it is applied later following the superelevation which modifies the true height of the vault in each KP. In the vectorial definitions the parameters O1x, O1y are included, which can be used for the counter vault
The [EDIT] option introduces us to the LINES EDITOR for modifying the vectorial vault. If the number of points of the vectors is 0 (the first time [EDIT]) is entered, the analytical vault is copied automatically.
We must empoy three types of specific line, L9, L7 and L8, so that the program can recognise these surfaces as total excavation, reinforcing and coating respectively.
On exiting the graphic editing of the vault, a warning is drawn in the fill lines that show us how the interior, exterior and theoretical excavation are, and asks us for confirmation to exit. This allows easy detection of errors in the geometry, orientation or types of implied lines. Also created is a file IS#EP.edm which in a previous session can be recovered with “Carga edm” in coordinates.
SCREEN TUNNEL If a tunnel is defined vectorially using screens in H form with the option ; Reduce Screen, the part of the screen which exceeds the suitable terrain is eliminated. If the slab exceeds the suitable terrain, the level of roof of the slab is reduced. It is remembered that on the vectorial definition of screen H, the whole part that exceeds the slab must be created with the line that defines the exterior surface of the vault.
PAGE: 110 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[WIDTHS TABLE] For tunnels made with Walls Screen or any other tunnel defined vectorially, this widths table allows us to define an independent, variable width from the section type. Within the area of variable widths, the program stirs or picks up the geometry of the tunnel, bringing the second point of the vector that defines the exterior vault (reinforcement) to the distance indicated in the table. The data of the table is not extrapolated before the first KP and after the last one, with respect to the geometry defined for the tunnel in these areas.
4.4.3- Section of cut-and-cover tunnel ISTRAM® can use the defined section of tunnel in order to define a section of cut-and-cover tunnel and be able to obtain results corresponding to the combined section, in combination with other vectorially defined slopes. To put it another way, we will obtain all the geometric results and volumetrics of the levelled area section (levelled area of excavation on soil and rock, lists of reframing of slopes etc) and the those corresponding to the tunnel without needing to make combined calculations.
In the LEVELLED AREA menu, in the window SOIL/VAULT , in the case of cut-and-cover tunnels the number of the tunnel and a second fill can be defined. The horizon of separation of the fills is defined using an increase of height “dZ” relative to the key of the tunnel vault. In the measurements the measures of “Fill of cut-and-cover tunnel” will be reflected and “Fill of cut-andcover tunnel 2”.
In the menu CUT in the box CONTROL/DITCH the option [CUT_AND_COVER TUNNEL]. Appears. With this option activated definition can be made of:
•
Number of Tunnel. From the table of
•
Berm of cut Is anchored in the upper
• • •
Ditch. Cut on Rock. Vector cut on Soil.
definition for tunnels. outer corner of the heel of the base.
In the profiles a new closed surface is created which goes to the surface of reinforcement, follows throught the excavation surface and is closed with the surface of the terrain. The heel of the levelled area for the cut-and-cover tunnels, studies the inserted data now for crowning of the levelled area in the menu CROWN]. The area contained in this enclosure appears in the measurements as: FILL_CUT-AND-COVER-
TUNNEL. The cut-and-cover tunnels can be applied to highways and railways of single tradck or to dual carriageways and railways of double track, with the two roadways or track in one single vault or in a separate vault. In this latter case it is necessary to define an open central reservation.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 111 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Initiall the control point for applying the levelled area was in the exterior and upper corner of the heel of the base. In the event that this point is above ground the end of the hard shoulder will also be analysed, so that if we place a vertical hard shoulder with the same height as the base (BD=0, ZBD=h pf the base) the control of the section on levelled area will be passed to the outer-inner corner of the heel. It is possible to define in a cut-and-cover tunnel, the vectorial base. The program searches below the most external point in order to start applying the vector of the levelled area. In Sections in Cut-and-cover Tunnel there exists a new surface (kurb=L51) which covers from the surface excavation axis passing underneath the bases until cutting the line 68 of the subgrade in the upper outer corner of the heel of the bases. (The L51 is included in the library there) Allows the vault not to be completely below the ground, in order to determine the measurement of the FILL-of-CUT_AND_COVER_TUNNEL. If the definition of the vault of the cut-and-cover tunnel is defined by the line of theoretic excavation, this line will be used for minimum recovering of the vault, so that the fill will never be under this theoretic excavation line. On the profile the theoretic excavation line will not appear; it will only appear in areas in which the ground is very close or underneath the vaults in which the ceiling of fill takes the form of a theoretic excavation line.
PAGE: 112 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
4.5-
LINEAR WORKS
Areas of calculation
This menu allows definition of which sections need to generate the complete calculation of axis elevation, which section type needs to be employed in each section and other information on the type of terrain. The definition of Calculation Areas is what controls all the calculations.
Calculations must not be ordered on sections in KP which are outside the areas in which there is definition of gradelines and profiles and of terrain. In such a case the algorithms will be interrupted on the last profile with data and the results files could end up badly finished off. The grade line is extrapolated. The sections are defined for lines of calculation orders, each one, with the following information:
S_MS E_MS (start model section, end model section) S_MS heads the column of the table that defines the number of the section type to employ on the section. If S_MS = 0 (the section type number 0 does not exist): ISTRAM® assumes that it is talking about a structure and only calculates the part corresponding to the road surface, applying the section of road surface from the previous section. If the initial section type has a different value to zero, and the e_MS (final section type on the section) has a zero value, the S_MS will be applied to the whole section. ®
If the initial section type and the final section type have different values (and different to zero), ISTRAM will carry out a linear transition between the geometry of both section types applying the ST_i on the initial KP and the e_MS on to the final KP of the section. So that the transitions are coherent, we must check that the initial and final section have the same number of points. Otherwise the program starts using poins from one and another section in the order. The numbers of the section types, can be used here disordered and can be repeated as many times as necessary; that is, a section type can be applied as many times as required along the axis.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 113 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.5.1- Geotechnic associated with the calculation areas Every one of the sections or intervals of calculation carries a series of parameters and section types that are applied to every area of the project. Along the section we find a geotechnical reality that can also be applied according to intervals.
P It is the thickness of the plant cover on the section. If P=0, there is no plant cover. Ifi P<0 (Plant cover with negative thickness), assume it is about a structure and only the part corresponding to the road surface is calculated. This mode is more complete if section type number 0 is declared, but allows use of certain section types who roadbeds are different.
P+ I Is the depth at which the suitable ground is found on which the road can be built, that is, the sum of the thicknesses of the plant cover plus the layer of inadequate ground. If value: P+I=0 ó P+I≤P is given, it is assumed that there is no inadequate terrain and the suitable terrain is found at depth P.
R Depth of the rock. If R=0 or R≤P+I or R≤P it is considered that the rock does not exist or is found at a great depth and is not goint to affect the levelled areas of the works. Not advisable to give a high value, p. ej. R=20 so that it does not reach the rock, it could affect the drawing of the cross sections. If a value R<0 it is considered that there is no suitable ground and that the rock starts ® on the surface or underneath the topsoil or under inadequate ground. ISTRAM generates the line of suitable terrain onto the ground profiles, as well as: If we place rock on surface (for example with R=-1) other levels of rock can continue to be defined under this one with their respective depths. Si P>0 Si P+I>P Si R>P+I
Line of plant cover line of inadequate ground line of rocky horizon
In the calculations for ground movement, the levels P and I are always levelled, whether we are on cut ground or fill The volumes of earth and rock cut the total of the cut minus the plant cover and inadequate terrain. On fills the calculated volume for banking is that which is up to the current surface of the plus the volume of plant cover or inadequate ground, given that these are cut before constructing the fill.
Definition of areas in structure If on the section of calculation we apply the section type 0, the system will not calculate intersections with the ground and will use the information of the section type employed on the section immediately previous for the geometry of the subgrade, thickness of the roadbed and slopes of closure of the roadbed. If we need some different information for the structure, from any existing section type, we can create a new
PAGE: 114 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
section type and apply it in the area of the structure, writing a negative value for the thickness of the topsoil, or better still, mark the section by activating the 5. This last one is important if the option [Add Branch] was previously used with the other axes that, in the same area, must have the same survey data. Surfaces defined in the file of ground profiles If there appears on the ground profile various surfaces, the first of unknown type and then a suitable ground type (66), the program assumes that the first surface is the topsoil. For example: surface 1 line 26 surface 2 line 66 surface 3 line 103 The program takes them as: surface 1 line 104 (topsoil) surface 2 line 66 (suitable terrain) surface 3 line 103 (rock1). If on the file of ground profiles, surfaces come with types employed for top soil, inadequate ground or rock, DO NOT consider the data inserted in this menu of SURVEY DATA.
R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 Allows another five levels of rock for separate placement to be defined, with similar behaviour. When two consecutive surfaces have the same depth, the two will be generated. Assigned to the first area is zero and to the second, the one which corresponds. A negative value can be placed on any of the six levels of rock, which implies that all the material under the surface or below the surface of the topsoil+inadequate is composed of this rock. They use the surfaces that come in the profile. Usually, if an equal value is given for the topsoil, the same as topsoil+Inadequate and Rock, it is considered that we will pass from the topsoil to the rock and the program will create three lines: 1. 2. 3.
Surface of topsoil Horizon of suitable ground Horizon of rock.
The two last lines match up. Do not believe that the line that separates the topsoil and the inadequate means that the inadequate soil does not exist. If on the ground profile the suitable ground surfaces come (and rock) we can give an inadequate ground line, which will have a different depth than that of the suitable ground (and the rock). The user should bear in mind that guaranteeing that the depth given by the survey for the inadequate ground line will not be left under the suitable terrain and/or rock that comes in the file of ground profiles.
[Symmetrical/Asymmetrical] With the [Asymmetrical] option we can define different thicknesses to the right and left of the axis
[Right/Left] In the [Symmetrical] case the defined data are taken to the Right.
[Rgt.ÆLft.] Copies all the defined data fro the right side onto the left side.
[KP start] [KP end] KP start and end of section. They should match with profiles of existing terrain, if not, ISTRAM®, will measure the section between the first and last ground profile that is within the same.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 115 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
If the last KP of the section and the start KP of the following one match on the profile information, two profiles will be generated on this KP, one with the input section type and the other with the output generating an abrupt transition from the section. IF the KP of a section and the initial one of the following fall between two information profiles, the calculator applies the input section type of the previous profile information, measuring up to that, and reads with the next section type in the subsequent profile information. The section between the two profiles remains in the first instance without being calculated. A subsequent [RECALCULATE] order on the generated file ISPOLn.per , will also calculate the transition section between the two profiles. ® The different sections defined, may be disorganised, ambiguous or among each other, ISTRAM carries out a warning distribution to the calculation and in the event that the ambiguous ones predominate, always chooses the later information. [Reorders] ® If the user wants to make his definition of sections match the sections with which ISTRAM is going to employ in the calculation, the option [Reorder] can be used; but it is not necessary for calculations. Reorders the definition of the user in accordance with the sectioning that ISTRAM® carries out, previous to the calculation. Allows checking of the sectioning, but as we have said the program calculates anyway if it is not used. Example: 1 2 3 4 5
ST3 ST0 ST1 ST2 ST1
ST0 ST0 ST3 ST3 ST3
KPi KPi KPi KPi KPi
0.000 200.000 275.000 1.100.000 800.000
KPf KPf KPf KPf KPf
ISTRAM® will reorder before the calculation or using the function [Reorder]: 1 ST3 ST0 KPi 0.000 KPf 2 ST0 ST0 KPi 200.000 KPf 3 ST1 ST3 KPi 275.000 KPf 4 ST3 ST0 KPi 390.000 KPf 5 ST1 ST3 KPi 800.000 KPf 6 ST2 ST3 KPi 1.300.000 KPf
200.000 280.000 390.000 1.500.000 1.300.000 200.000 275.000 390.000 800.000 1.300.000 1.500.000
Remember that with section type 0 ground movement or design is not measured with section 0, only platform. In the section 3 it starts with the selection type 1 on the KP 275 and finishes with the section type 3 on KP 390 making a linear transition between both section types.
[Save] [Load] Allows saving or loading and/or recovery of section definitions in calculation, On files with extension *.trm.
PAGE: 116 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.5.2- Independent probes On activating the option Independents, the survey data can be defined independently of the calculation sections of the section types. In the menu of section calculations the TOPSOIL value remains in order to show with negative values the existence of a structure. In the new Menu of [INDEPENDENT PROBES],the option [SYMMETRICAL/ASYMMÉTRICAL] with the menu AREAS OF CALCULATION. The data of INDEPENDENT PROBES only carry a KP, so that on KPs between the data the depths are interpolated, Being able to make transitions. The thicknesses on the KPs outside the ends are extrapolated.
4.5.3- Sections defined by their values of level differences. Automatically adds sections in structure and tunnel, to the general sectioning, with the object of carrying out trials. Uses the following parameters.
; Fill in STRUCTURE Menu On pressing the button [Generate] with this button activated the STRUCTURES] menu is automatically filled with the corresponding viaducts and tunnels so that these structures can be represented on the longitudinal on using the guitar struc.gui or another prepared to such effect. [15.00] Level dif for STRUCTURE The structures will be placed in areas where the level difference is equal to or superior to this value. Minimum length [50.00] If the longitude of the structure is less to this value, the section will not be created. [-30.00] Level dif for TUNNEL The tunnels will be placed in areas where the red height is equal to or less than this value. Minimum length [50.00] If the length of the tunnel turns out less than this value, the section will not be created.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 117 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[1] Normal type section In the sections for structures, this section type is located with a value of topsoil thickness equal to or less than one (v = -1). [2] TUNNEL type section In the tunnel sections this section is located, for which reason the user should annotate here a section type in tunnel. [1.00] round off of KPs From this field a value can be inserted for rounding up the start and end KPs of the tunnel structures. [Generate] Adds to the table of calculation sections, the sections in the tunnel and structure.
4.5.4- Sectioning of independent sections independent to the calculation area [D] [C] [F] (ditch, cut, fill) The areas of calculation described up to now, define the sectioning ofr application of the section type as a whole, [D] [C] and [F] are other menus for independent sectioning of the ditches, levelled areas and embankments. If on the [D] menu we define a sectioning on which we apply the section (i) between such a KP, on the seft right, we are saying that, in spite of the fact that on that section section (j) is being applied, the ditch that will be used is the right of the section (i). Just as in the previous case, if the last section type is different to zero and different from the start, the ditch will make a linear transition on the section, between the two section types.
[D] and [F] states new independent sectionings for levelled areas and embankments. In the ares not covered by [D] [C] and [F], the section given in the basic sectioning of CALCULATION AREAS will be applied.
[RIGHT / LEFT] The tables of sectioning [D] [C] and [F] have a switch which allows selection if we are sectioning the right side or the left side, they are independent tables that of the right ditch or the left, and analogically for levelled areas and embankments. This subsectioning complements, but does not substitute the general sectioning. The calculator needs the data of the table AREAS OF CALCULATION.
PAGE: 118 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
4.6-
LINEAR WORKS
Other elements of the section
4.6.1- Crowning of the levelled area
If we apply the section of levelled area from below to above, we will not know which is the slope which arrives at the surface; like the surface horizons of he ground they continue to be meteorized, having a flatter slope of equilibrium. This menu allows independent definition of the section types, a slope of variable crowning for the sections of levelled area.
A [0.000] Height from the section is interrupts the levelled area section in order to apply the crowning slope
S [0.000] Value of crowning slope in metres/metre vertical. The crowning slope substitutes any geometry that was in this area, for example, hard shoulders.
B(max) [0.000] If, owing to the transversal gradient of the ground, the width of the crowning exceeds the value inserted the crowning will be carried out with the same slope and that width, although the height may be less. IF Bmax=0 does not operate. The crowning law can be activated and recovered in files of extension *.crd employing the options [Save] and [Load] and, like all the remaining tables, is stored in the *.vol file with the rest of the SECTION information. If, on the geotechnic section we have a depth of topsoil and/or inadequate terrain, applying a "vector of cut onto inadequate ground" we can also calculate the crowning of the levelled area.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 119 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
4.6.2- Guard ditch The guard ditch can be placed at a set distance or variable one from the foot of the embankment or from the head of the levelled area, conditioning or not its existence with respect to the point of control, which the gradient marks as limit which it does as necessary.
In this menu a table with different geometries can be defined such as GUARD DITCHES and four lists of data for placing these ditches in different sections in the case of FILL or in the case of CUT and separating the right and left sides. On each section a different ditch can be defined for the start and end KPs in whose cae the geometry carries out a transition along the section.
On pressing the box that marks the number of points of the ditch, access is gained to a menu that allows definition of its geometry and and performance.
In the data number 1, the value delta X marks the distance to the foot of the fillt or head of cut from where excavation of the ditch begins from the surface of the ground, however the delta Y of this first point is not considered given that the terrain is covered). The point with the code 3010 is the control point, if it is above the surface of the ground, the guard ditch is NOT constructed on this section. That is, that if the code point 3010 is the second point (by default) the firs section of the ditch (deltaX, deltaY of data 2) marks the gradient limit of the ground in order to construct or not construct the ditch. Now, if the control point of the guard ditch (3010) is the last point of the same, the program terminates the section on the intersection with the ground of this last segment. This allows the guard ditches to be used for generating slight ridges on the head of the cut (see image).
PAGE: 120 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
The codes must be in order, starting with value 3000. The definition of the ditch can also be carried out in [GRAPHIC] mode.
; Guard ditches on separated line type. Allows them to be defined within the file ISPOLn.per with a different type of line (L50 for fill and L168 for cut) to the object for carrying out its separate measurement. C.G. for suitable ground. On activating this option a previous clearing of the terrain is considered where the guard ditch is going to be constructed. If a guard ditch on the fill is defined, this is placed and not the lcut vector on inadequate ground. The foot of the fill will come as far as the natural terrain or to the suitable terrain with respect to where the guard ditch is defined with this option. On the drawing file of the ground plan LTG.lil (see below) the commands GL and GT are increased to GL2 and GT2 and will allow definition of two different types for drawing the guard ditches on cut and fill. ###################################################################### # Definition of Labelling for separated guard ditches # # type of L # # --- --------# # GL 50 Longitudinal Lines # # GT 50 Cross sectional lines # # types de L # # --- ---------# GL2 50 168 Longitudinal lines (Terr,Desm) # GT2 50 168 Cross sectional lines (Terr,Desm) # ######################################################################
4.6.3- Clearing shoulder The clearing shoulder is a part of the section that can be calculated between the ditch and the slope of the cut, before the ditch, or before the clearing shoulder pavement in order to move the slope away from the platform whenever field of view is interrupted and sectioning is lost.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 121 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[Save] [Load] Can be used for generating or loading calculations, a file, with definition of hard shoulders/berms. The files have extension bdj.
Type [EXTERIOR] The berm/hard shoulder is intercalculated between the ditch and the slope of levelled area.
Type [INTERIOR] The hard shoulder/berm is placed between the outermost verge and the berm. This berm obeys the button [NOT CONCAVE/CONCAVE] defined on the berm of cut. IF a step is defined on the berm of levelled area, the step will be carried out at the start of the inner berm of cut
Type [INTERIOR_DITCH] The berm/hard shoulder is placed between the berm of cut and the ditch. The berm is defined on a table by KP, in which each piece of information defines a segment to each side. Each segment is defined by a width and a height. So a berm of 1 m with the 10 % gradient towards the platform, is defined as A=1.0 H=0.1. It is not usual to generate this menu of the table of levelled area. It is much VISIBILITY menu.
easier to use the
Once the first calculation has been made of the complete geometry of the axis being studied, it goes to the VISIBILITY menu. There, some or various visibility studies are made, loss of sections and if necessary calculations for clearing, necessary for achieving the visibility conditions. After this analysis, generation of the Berm file Berma de Despeje (*.bdj)is generated. On returning to the menu Clearing Shoulder is [Load] the *.bdj file generated in VISIBILITY. After reviewing the data and making any corrections, we order the [Save] of the corrected *.bdj and of *.vol from the axis. A calculation now will generate the new geometry. If necessary, a return can be made to the VISIBILITY menu to check graphically and numerically that the berm in calculation complies and achieves the project visibility descriptions, or to study the losses of residual sections that will set the limitations on speed, signalling etc.
PAGE: 122 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.6.4- Coating of fill
This menu allows definition of the bank that is filled with different material. Different sections can be defined using their START KP and END KP with different geometry on the [RIGHT] side and on the [LEFT]. The geometry is defined with the following values:
S_MS, e_MS The interior face of the coating is defined using the geometry of the embankment for any section type. IF the e_MS = 0, the geometry is constant on the whole section, if not a transition is carried out between the s_MS and the e_MS.
Horizontal Distance The thickness of the coating can be given in Horizontal or Normal to the slope of the embankment. If a sufficiently large value is given the coating goes as far as the axis, if this is done on both sides, it constitutes a level of complete embankment. For those coatings on which a sufficiently large HORIZONTAL distance is given and it is sufficiently large enough for them to come up as far as teh axis the option
Paral is activated. (parallel). In these cases if the option is activated the roof of the coating is carried out with the gradient of the subgrade.
VERTICAL distance Is the height of coating and can be defined in various ways.
[From Up] Is measured from the base of the selected soil or from the subgrade, if the value is zero the coating will get as far as the selected soil or the sugrade.
[From Down] Is measured from the surface of the terrain, if the value exceeds the height of the embankment, it is held on the selected soil or on the subgrade.
[Fixed Z] The crowning is at the indicated height. If the foot of the embankment is above this height, there is no coating. If the foot of the embankment is above this height, there is no coating. If the selected soil is underneath this height the complete coating takes place on the whole height of the embankment.
[Level Dif.]
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 123 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
This type does not require Section type or Horizontal distance. A layer is generated on the base of the fillt whose roof is parallel to the subgrade, and whose thickness is measured from the ground on the axis. If the subgrade or the overexcavation are under the ground on the axis, it is not generated. If the height of the subgrad or overexcavation on the ground on the axis is less than the required height, everything is generated as far as the subgrade or overexcavation, with this layer. As for the rest of the coatings, they can be defined independently on both sides, so that if a complete layer is required or the width of the whole section, the information can be repeated on the right and left. In order to generate it on each side, it is not necessary that this side finishes in embankment, it is sufficient that the red height (on the axis) is positive.
[Wall Filter] It is combined with the wall definition on the embankment. This material is defined by its width measured on horizontal, is supported in the trasdos of the wall and goes down to the natural terrain or the suitable terrain as defined in the coating menu for embankments. It is also possible that the filter of the wall goes down as far as the base.
[Exterior] [Outside Subgrd] [Outside G.Sel] So as to be able to use it a section type must be defined of a section type with a fixed embankment by the head, that will be anchored to the edge of the verge of to the edge of the hard shoulder. It is usual that it is defined vectorially and so, the upper section of the vector must simulate the thickness of the coating. On the same KP and on the same side an interior coating and another exterior one can coexist. The measurement of this exterior coating is picked up in the ispol3.dar. The Exterior coating of the embankment, can be anchored to three different points: Edge of Verge or Hard shoulder / berm. Drainage of the Subgrade. Drainage of the Base of the Selected Soil. On occasion, in order for slopes falling with normal horizontal distance to the slope and vertical distance 0, the inner slope cuts the subgrade on the other side of the axis, so, the cut is calculated with the geometric axis and is the inner slope is designed from this point.
[To C.L.] If topsoil or inadequate ground exists, the coating will go as far as the suitable ground.
[To N.L.] The coating of the bank goes down towards the natural ground. If an fill survey exists with draining layer the coating is seated on this drainage layer. The coating data of the fill go to the file *.vol, but may also be archived in files of extension *.trm.
An exterior coating is admitted of the fiill over a walled section. The width of the coating must not be greater than the width of the wall. The coating is interrupted over the head of the wall.
PAGE: 124 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Coating of cut
The section types employed for the coating must have the geometry of the section on cut different to that employed in calcualtion areas and so that the line that defines the geometry is inside that of the areas of calculation on applying it from the end of the ditch.
The geometry is defined with the following values:
S_MS e_MS The outer face of the coating is defined using the geometry of the levelled area of any section type. If the e_MS=0, the geometry is constant on the whole section, if not a transition is carried out between the S_MS y the a e_MS. The volume understood to be between both geometries is measured as COAT_LEVEL (see file ispol3.dar). Different sections can be defined using their START KP and END KP with different geometry on the [RIGHT/LEFT side. From this menu the [Filter Wall] can also be defined. In this case it is defined showing a width value. The measurement of the filter of the wall appears as COAT_LEVELL. IF the selection of the levelled area commences with a wall, the line fo the section of ccoating of the cut is anchored to the code 1290, that is, fromt he upper point of the intrados of the wall.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 125 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
4.6.5-
ISPOL 9
Structures
This menu allows definition of the different structures associated to an axis for representation on the longitudianl profile (guitar Struc.gui). The dialog boxes that allow definition of all this data are the following
[Automatic] Extracts the structures of the table from the Calulation Areas: • If in the areas of calculation a section in structure is marked. Or also: • • •
If T.S.=0 Æ Viaduct. If thickness of plant cover < 0 Æ Viaduct. If T.S. cut with tunnel Æ Tunnel.
6 types of structure that require the following information: VIADUCTS Type. [Viad.] (viaducts) Side. [D] / [I] / [ID]. For drawing with the right grade line, the left or both. Name. [ ]. The name of the structure for the longitudinal profile. KPi [0.000] KPf [0.000]. Start and end of the viaduct. Vanes. [0]. The number of pillars is equal to the number of vanes minus one. Board. [0.00]. Thickness of bulletin board. [..]. In this field it indicates the difference of the height between the upper face of the board and the grade line, in order to deduct, for example in railways the height of the rail and the ballast.
[MORE DATAÆ] Slope. [0.000]. Slope of support in longitudinal direction. [MORE DATAÆ] KP_pilas. If the pilars are equidistant here they are left at zero, unless we are able to place the KPs of up to 30 pillarr, these values can be inserted numerically or graphically. TUNNELS Type. [Tunnel]. Side. [R] / [L] / [LR]. For drawing with the right grade line, the left or both. Name. [ ]. The name of the structure for the longitudinal profile. KPi [0.000] KPf [0.000]. Start and end of tunnel. Vault. [0.00]. Height of vault. [MORE DATAÆ] Slope. [0.000]. Slope of the vault in longitudinal direction. [MORE DATAÆ] Survey. Height from the grade line to the survey of the tunnel to the kurb.
PAGE: 126 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
OVERPASS FOR SEEING IT ON THE LONGITUDINAL PROFILE OF THE SECONDARY AXIS Type. [OP-SL].
Side. [R] / [L] / [LR]. In order to draw with the right grade line, the left or with both. Axis Prin. [ ]. The program will make a cut at the section of the main axis in order to draw it on the profile of the current (secondary) axis on the section KPi, KPf. Name. [ ]. The name of the structure for the longitudinal profile. KPi [0.000] KPf [0.000]. Start and end of the upper step. Vannes. [0]. The number of pillars is the same as the number of vanes minus one. Deck [0.00]. Thickness of the bridges deck.. [..]. In this field is indicated the difference of the height between the upper face of the board and the grade line, in order to deduct, for example in railways the height of a rail and the ballast.
[MORE DATAÆ] KP_pilas. If the pillars are equidistant here they will be left at zero, unless we are able to place these values on the KPs up to 30 pillars, the values can be inserted numerically or graphically. In order to draw on the profile the main axis it should be previously calculated so that on drawing the longitudinal of the secondary axis the 3d model is temporarily drawn on the area of upper step and calculates its intersection to draw it on the profile and calculated the height of the bases of the pillars. Uses the same commands as the guitar Struct.gui as the viaducts. UNDERPASS FOR SEEING IT ON THE LONGITUDINAL PROFILE OF THE SECONDARY AXIS Type. [UP-SL]. Side. [R] / [LI] / [LR]. In order to draw with the right grade line, the left or with both. Axis Prin. [ ]. The program will make a cut at the section of the main axis in order to draw it on the profile of the current (secondary) axis on the section KPi, KPf. Name. [ ]. The name of the structure for the longitudinal profile. KPi [0.000] KPf [0.000]. Start and end of inferior step. Vault. [0.00]. Height of vault. [MORE DATAÆ] Kurb. Height from grade line to the kurb of the tunnel. The main axis should be previously calculated so that on drawing the longitudinal of the secondary axis it is drawn termporarily on the 3d model of the main axis in the area of step inferior and calculates its intersection in order to draw it on the profile. Uses the same commands as the guitar Struct.gui as the tunnels. OVERPASS FOR SEEING IT ON THE LONGITUDINAL PROFILE OF THE PRINCIPAL AXIS Type. [OP-PL]. Side. [R] / [L] / [LR]. Para dibujar con la rasante derecha, la izquierda o con ambas. Axi Secon. Not used. Name. [ ]. The name of the structure for the longitudinal profile. KP. [0.000]. KP centre of the upper step. Z. [0.000]. Height for inserting the symbol of the upper step. SIM. [ ]. Number of symbol to insert. Longi. [0.00]. Length for the symbol (the symbol has to be scalable in X). UNDERPASS FOR SEEING IT ON THE PRINCIPAL PROFILE Type. [UP-PL]. Side. [R] / [L] / [LR]. In order to draw with the right grade line, the left or with both. Axi Secun. Not used. Name. [ ]. El The name of the structure for the longitudinal profile. KP. [0.000]. KP centre of the lower step. Z. [0.000]. Height for inserting the symbol of the lower step. SIM. [ ]. Number of symbol to insert. Longi. [0.00]. Longitude for the symbol (symbol has to be scalable in X).
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 127 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Drawing of sructures on the longitudinal profiles The guitar is incorporated in the library Struct.gui which allows drawing with the longitudinal profile, the vaults, kurb and thimbles with their slopes in tunnels, the supports with with their heels, pillars and board in the viaducts, and both cases the name of the structure, its longitude and the KPs of start and end. Using this guitar the longitude of the structures, viaducts and tunnels can be given in 3D, that is, including the increase of length owing to the gradients of the subgrade. In the longitudinal the OP-PL is drawn with the commands of Viaduct and OP-SL and UP-PI with the same as tunnel and PI-LS. The symbol selected is drawn with the command that labels the name (EVN y ETN) the KP is labelled with the commands of the start KP(EVPI y ETPI). It is included in the library the symbol S310 that represents a mark of 8x8 for a length of steps H=1:1000 V=1/200. For the structures OP-PL (Lower steop on the longitudinal of the main axis) and OP-PL (upper step on the longitudinal of the secondary axis), the longitude of the structure is allowed to be inserted, so that if we use a scalable symbol in the coordinate X, the longitude on the longitudinal profile will be that which corresponds to it. It is included in the library the symbol S311 which is a board of thickness 1 metre for vertical scale 1/200. The size on horizontal will be that which is stated in the structures menu, for any horizontal. #--------------------------------------------------------------------# # Structures: Viaducts y Tunnels # #--------------------------------------------------------------------# # VIADUCTS # # TypesLines Estribos Board Pillars semiwidth # # ----------- ------------------------------# EVTL 0 78 78 1. # # Name style distZ dis.Hour angle tama th tv (ang=0->parallel) # # ------ ------ ------ ------- ------- ---- -- -# EVN 4 2. 5. 0. 3. 0 2 # # KP’s y Lon. Symbol dist.Z dist.hor angle # #------------ ------- ------ -------- -----# EVPI 164 2. 0. 90. KP start # EVPF 164 2. 0. 90. KP End # EVL 163 6. 5. 0. Longitude # #--------------------------------------------------------------------# # TUNELES # # TypesLines boquilla vault # # ----------- -------- -------# ETTL 0 78 # # Name style distZ dis.Hor angulo tama th tv (ang=0->parallel ) # # ------ ------ ------ ------- ------- ---- -- -# ETN 4 -2. 5. 0. 3. 0 2 # # KP’s y Lon. simbolo dist.Z dist.hor angul # #------------ ------- ------ -------- -----# ETPI 562 -2. 0. 90. KP Start # ETPF 562 -2. 0. 90. KP End # ETL 163 -6. 5. 0. Longitude # #--------------------------------------------------------------------#
de STRUCTURES Æ[MORE INFO] the value Pillar [0.00] allows definition of width of pillar different for each viaduct. Si se if a number greater than zero is inserted, it will be used for representing the pilas in the menu of GRADELINES and on the profile drawing of the longitudinal profile with guitars of type Struct.gui.
PAGE: 128 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
4.7-
LINEAR WORKS
Calculate, draw and analyse results, introduction
4.7.1- Options for configuring with the calculations In the previous epigraphs we have learned to define the platform and the cross-section of an axis with much detail, now we ask ourselves how or what we should do to obtain a calculations and a representation on the ground plan of the same. In the following chapters the whole calculatory and representation system will be explained in detail, here the process is only described briefly, sending the user to the following chapter. We must remember some basic conditions for calculating an axis: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
We must have a design on the ground plan associated with the axis. It is necessary for a file of profiles to exist of cross sections of the terrain. The information of the subgrade must be covered ( or be in the interval): The interval of KPs covered by the original terrain. The areas of calculation defined for the axis. The definition of the areas of calculation should be coherent with the intervals covered by the rest of the defined elements. (almost always the area covered by the cross sections) Calculation of the cross-section of an axis
In order to carry out a simple calculation or individual calculation of an axis we press [Calcu.] located on the lateral menu that offers the screen or in the same data menu. At this moment the application writes a file ispoln.per where n is the number of the current axis, besides generating another series of files (whose description we carry out on the corresponding chapter) which contains volumes, coordinates of points of section etc. The file ISPOLn.per can be edited with [EDIT PROFILES] accessible from various places ( the same menu of elevation or in the drop down menus), in order to revise or see if the calculation on a determined area develops as we try to or if on the other hand we must revise some point of the transversal section and correct it.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 129 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
In the following chapter we will se how we can make massive calculations, that is, calculate many axes that participate in our project. Also the way of grouping various axes together in work groups which can represent a determined link or a sub project. Drawing of the ground plan Once the axis is calculated, the program makes use of the information necessary for representing a solution, we choose a drawing mode and we also configure which parts of the same we are going to represent, pressing the [Ground plan] we will obtain a drawing formed with 3D polylines, ready to be used in the elaboration of our plans.
In this case the file of [Mode of Drawing] defines that we are going to represent the axis lines and the main roadways, the verges, and, as a round up, the lines of the head of the slope for levelled areas and the foot of the embankment with its subsequent long and short striped lines. On other occasions ( and as will be seen in the corresponding chapter) it will be necessary to extract other types of information and even to measure if possible.
PAGE: 130 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
On being composed of polylines for 3D information (x,y,z), immediately we must visualize, in the space,. The aspect of our highway (using 3D vision). Using this system we can detect some failure or some geometry that does not correspond with what we are trying to calculate, which helps us to detect errors of design.
4.7.2- Calculation of areas and volumes In this case the files *.dar of the user are able to be saved within *.vol with longer names (12 characters plus extension). The ISTRAM option offers selection of files with extension .dar (tables of measurements or of area definitions) which by default the program uses for every type of project, and they are: ISPOL3.DAR ISPOL6T.DAR/ISPOL6T2.DAR
Specifics for projects for highways, dual carriageways or motorways and railways Specifics for pipes
The tables for measurement ISPOL6T.dar and ISPOL6T2.dar are used by the system automatically in determined situations. Consult the epigraph ‘Cálculation of areas and volumes" further along in this chapter. The USER option, activates the field situated on its right and on clicking on it, we can load the file that we want (could be a table giving personalised info) from the findings in the system libraries. The files *.dar are saved from [EDIT PROFILES]Æ[DEFINE AREAS]Æ[Save]. ISTRAM checks that said tables are correct, and that they exist in the working libraries. If they are not localized, they will not carry out volumetric-surface calculations.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 131 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
4.8-
ISPOL 9
Technical Annex axis on ISPOL
Although the concepts and ideas can appear strange, we consider it advisable to make a brief description of some elements that are part of the system ISPOL and that are especially useful when having to confront complex designs.
4.8.1- Surfaces and codes of the cross-section As we already know, the complete information that the project describes is written into the files ISPOLn.per, which contain the geometric data for each KP, of each one of the surfaces that make up the cross-section. Each point is, as well as catalogued, using numeric codes that grow from the axis to the right and left. A simple diagram which describes the system used by ISTRAM is what is seen in the illustration adjoined. In it we can see a typical profile of a dual carriageway. We can see 4 surfaces that define different geotechnic horizons, which can be created for the application using parallels to the original ground or data that is already defined in the profiles (varias forms for defining and obtaining this data as we shall see in the corresponding chapter).
Also 4 lines or constructive surfaces are distinguishable; the grade line, the subgrade or ground line, overexcavation and termination in the event of inadequate levelling. There exist many more surfaces, like the survey line, the wall, coatings, tunnels etc.
Functionality of the system of numeration of surfaces The number of the surface is bound unequivocally to a type of graphic line defined in the ISTRAM libraries. In this way, so simple is the type of specified element to use with the graphic aspect (colour, thickness, style of line.. ), without needing to configure any additional element. On the other hand, some of the processes that the data use for the surface (so as to be drawn or used for calculating surfaces) should be singularly identifiable. Meaning of the code organisation In principle the surfaces or geotechnic units do not require coding, although it is possible that the user associates codes to determined points with various objectives, such as the identification of the existing roadway or the positioning of a symbol on the code position. However, in order to be able to analyse and use the information of each element it is necessary to code it, so that, independently of its coordinates it is possible always to identify it. For example the portion of surface understood between code 1 and 1.5 of surface 67 always corresponds to the main highway, in the same way that the code 100 will identify the point whre the gade line and subgrade intersect.
PAGE: 132 / 134
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
4.8.2- Names and extensions of files used by ISTRAM Althouth the majority of the names of the files and types of extension try to be original, all those that are used and generated by ISTRAM will now be listed with the intention that they will serve as a reference guide, allowing the user to localise the type of file associated to.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
•
*.cej. Contains the data for defining geometry of the axis on the horizontal design. *.rep. Definition of data for calculating points and setting out. *.per. Cross sectional profiles, automatically calculated or from a coomplete work model including area measurements (ISPOLn.per, ISFIRn.per). *.ras. Geometric data for definition of the grade line. *.egi. Law of turning axes. *.anc. Law of widths. *.prl. Law of superelevations. *.aux. Definition of auxiliary roads (verges). *.stp. Section types. *.trm. Section calculation. *.med. Central reservation. *.crd. Crowning of levelled area. *.pfm. Pavement composition.. *.ssl. Selected ground. *.bdj. Berms/hard shoulder. *.lfr. Border line, boundaries. *.cdf. Layer or independent subgrade. *.mcv. Route marks. *.mge. Margins of expropriation *.spt. Ridges for fill. *.cug. Guard ditch. *.tsp. Table of profile symbols. *.dof. Drainage works. *.tun. Túnnels. *.est. Structures. *.ddv. Speed limitations for the diagram of speeds. *.crt. Crossroads *.acr. Footways. *.vol. This file contains a combination of previous files (.ras, *.anc, *.prl, *.aux, *.stp, *.trm, *.med, *.crd, *.pfm, *.ssl, *.bdj *.cdf *.mcv *.mge *.spt *.cug *.tsp *.dof *.tun, *.est, *.ddv, *.crt, *.acr, …), that completely define the geometry of the work. *.pol. Contains the names of files that compose the complete definition of a project, invoking the file for definition of the horizontal design and those for definition of the elevation and ground profiles employed for each one of its axes, just like the file that contains all the axes of the project.
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
PAGE: 133 / 134
LINEAR WORKS
PAGE: 134 / 134
ISPOL 9
4 - ELEVATION, PLATFORM AND CROSS SECTION
LINEAR WORKS ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
5
The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of Buhodra Ingeniería S.A. and is protected by Spanish and international copyright. The reproduction or modification of any text or illustration is expressly prohibited. Hard copy is exclusively allowed for corporate or individual use, and the copying of its content for educational purposes is prohibited unless otherwise authorised in writing. The educational and illustrative material contained in the present document may be modified at any time without prior notification. The present documentation is subject to a process of continuous updating., and it is therefore impossible to guarantee an exact correspondence between the data input boxes, file formats and other specifications as they appear on screen and as they appear in documentary format. The user acknowledges full responsibility for any consequences deriving from the use of the present material, and by extension of its associated programs.
LINEAR WORKS 1 2 3 4
01 02 03 04
Introduction and General Aspects Axis Design in Ground Plan, Reframing and Drawing Elevation, Land Profiles and Grade Lines Elevation, Platform and Cross Section
5
05
Elevation, Advanced Project Calculation
06 07 08 09 10 11 12
Complex Calculations, Crossings and Junctions Drawing Ground Plans and Profiles Project Reports Widening and Improvement Projects Railway Design Drainage and Distribution, Pipes Project Tracking and Monitoring
http://www.istram.net
© Buhodra Ingeniería S.A.
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
INDEX
5 – ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION 5.1-
SECTION, CALCULATION AND CONTROL TOOLS .................................................................. 3 5.1.1-
5.2-
5.2.1-
5.3-
DRAW 3D LINE.......................................................................................................... 49 ROAD MARKERS ...................................................................................................... 49
SECTION MENU PROFILES........................................................................................... 51 5.6.35.6.45.6.55.6.65.6.75.6.85.6.9-
5.7-
PARAMETERS........................................................................................................... 47
DRAWINGS OF THE ELEVATION MENU ......................................................................... 49 5.6.15.6.2-
5.6.
VISIBILITY.................................................................................................................. 21 Types of visibility studies ........................................................................................ 23 Position of the observer and of the reference, angles, visual barriers,… ........... 29 Results....................................................................................................................... 35 Working methodology and review of results ......................................................... 37 Speed diagram .......................................................................................................... 39 Drainage works ......................................................................................................... 43 Transition wedges .................................................................................................... 46
EXTRAS IN THE SECTION MENU .................................................................................... 47 5.5.1-
5.6-
Generating of cross points ...................................................................................... 13 Calculation of the KP and distance ......................................................................... 14 Project .vol ................................................................................................................ 15 Add KP....................................................................................................................... 15 Gen XYZHR.hpr......................................................................................................... 16 Volume determination by KP/Barycenter ............................................................... 16 Generate Solid Model ............................................................................................... 17 Link ............................................................................................................................ 19 Truncate..................................................................................................................... 20
SECTION MENU UTILITIES............................................................................................ 21 5.4.15.4.1.15.4.1.25.4.1.35.4.1.45.4.25.4.35.4.4-
5.5-
Cross section, saving and loading information ..................................................... 11
SECTION MENU. TOOLS ............................................................................................... 13 5.3.15.3.25.3.35.3.45.3.55.3.65.3.75.3.85.3.9-
5.4-
Brief description of the options in the SECTION menu......................................... 4
OPTIONS OF THE FIXED SIDE SECTION MENU ................................................................... 10
Interpolate T .............................................................................................................. 51 Calculate T................................................................................................................. 51 Save M & Load M ...................................................................................................... 52 Profile symbols ......................................................................................................... 52 Security barriers ....................................................................................................... 53 Add branch................................................................................................................ 53 Add line...................................................................................................................... 55
MENUS AND OPTIONS OF THE SECTION MENU ...................................................... 56 5.7.15.7.2-
PROJECT (PROJECT tab) ........................................................................................ 56 GROUPS .................................................................................................................... 61
INDEX
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 1 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
INDEX
INDEX
PAGE: 2 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
5.1-
LINEAR WORKS
Section, calculation and control tools
In the previous chapter we have learnt how to define an axis in a very thorough way, and also we have briefly described how to calculate and display the result. In this chapter we are going to explain the project concept in which several axes are involved, and there is an in-depth description of all the methods offered in the menus that permit the user to calculate additional elements, whether they are individually (axis by axis) or using some of the geometrical relations between several axes, which could be for example in the case of junction or crossings studies. In the SECTION menu and its submenus, when you click on the graphic screen an echo appears with information about the projection of the point over the current axis. Simultaneously and dynamically, we start to see the cross section calculated in the next profile closest to the cursor, as long as it is situated within the calculation areas. The profile is calculated dynamically and therefore shows the modifications that are entered in the different data windows. When we are in the SECTION menu, we see the following in the message area: CROSS SECTION. Click on the screen for ECHO REPORT If we do this, the cursor is linked to the current axis and it transformed into a rubber cursor which offers us the following information: • Number of the axis • Distance of the cursor from the axis (positive on the right, negative on the left of the axis). • Km point of the axis (KP). • Typology of the axis at that point: o Straight o Curve and its radius o Clothoid and its parameter • Length of the section • Spot height • Longitudinal gradient
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 3 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
5.1.1-
ISPOL 9
Brief description of the options in the SECTION menu
In this subchapter we describe quite simply the options that are offered to the user in the elevation dialog box. At a later stage these will be explained in greater detail. [Renumber] Associates the current SECTION data to another axis given by a number, allowing us to therefore copy all the information from one axis to another.
[Click Axis] This enables us to select an axis by clicking with the mouse on the graphic screen.
Disp. Num. This associates a tag with its number over the axis drawn on the ground plan.
Short Menu This displays the SECTION menu in a drop-down form, with the aim of leaving the drawing area much more visible. By default this option is activated:
[Save] Save a*.vol file with the name of the box <.vol file>. CURVE This enables you to load as axis n+1 (with n being the number of total axes of the project) some of those calculated automatically when crosses between axes are generated. Its functioning is described in the corresponding section. Table.dar [ISTRAM…] [USER …] [ISPOL3.dar] .dar Road Surfaces [ISTRAM…] [USER …] [ISFIR.dar] ISTRAM carries out the measurements of the transverse profiles (levelled area, embankments,…) using a table that defines the different materials that have to be measured and how they have to be measured. These tables are located in the library and for roads and railways the table used is called ISPOL3.dar. The user can define other tables and use for each of the axes. The editing of these measuring tables is described in the chapter PROFILE EDITOR. For the different layers that make up the road surface packages the program uses the table ISFIR.dar by default. The user can also define and use new tables defined by them personally.
TYPE: [ROADS …] It is here where the user defines the construction typology of the project, and is able to select between a road, railway or piping project. Under the heading PLATFORM, design options are offered that can be different depending on the chosen construction typology:
PAGE: 4 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
PLATFORM options in ROAD projects
[INDEP SUBGRADE]
An independent subgrade. For the designing of a specific subgradE case whose arris and slopes do not depend on the position of the axis and the superelevation.
[WIDTHS]
The definition of the widths and extra widths of the main roadways.
[SUPERELEVATION]
The designing of the superelevation laws of the main roadways.
[TILT AXIS] [ECCEN. MEDIAN]
The definition of the position of the spin axis or application axis of the grade line with regards to the geometrical axis. The definition of the eccentricity of the platform with regards to the ground plan axis and in the case of motorways, and the definition of the global geometry of the median.
[AUXILIARY ROADS]
The definition of the auxiliary roadways geometry (hard shoulders).
[SELECT GROUND]
The design of the different ground layers (overbreak) under the road surface package or crown of the land platform.
[PAVEMENT COMPOSIT.]
The design and management of the surface sections.
[FILL DRAININGS]
The definition of the types, geometries and application sections of land clearing to make the embankment.
[SIDEWALKS]
For the definition of pavements in urban sections. Options for the PLATFORM in RAILWAY projects
[TRACK SLEEPER]
The definition of the basic geometry of the rail, sleeper and ballast.
[SHAPE LAYER]
The design of the geometry of the shape layer.
[ECCEN. GAUGE]
The definition of the platform eccentricity with regards to the ground plan axis and the type of rail gauge
[PLATFORM]
The definition of the geometry of the railway section ballast and side corridors. PLATFORM options in PIPING projects
[PIPE DATA]
For pipelines with a steep gradient.
[DITCH/SUPPORT]
To define the geometry of the ditches in the buried pipelines and of the supports on supported pipelines.
[FILLINGS]
To define the different materials with which the section is built: flowable fill, protection fillings, coating,…
[SERVICE ROAD]
To define a service path next to the ditch.
[VECTOR TUBES]
It enables you to define different geometries for noncircular pipelines.
[STOKPILE]
To define the temporary occupation of the provisions for the fillings.
[ECCENTRICITY]
The definition of pipelines that are non centred on the ground plan axis.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 5 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Options for the MODEL SECTION
[Subgrade Section Type]
A declaration of the number of section types to be defined and the design of the subgradient.
[CALC. ZON]
The definition of the calculation stretches, what section types have to be used in each of them and the entering of the probe data.
[C] [D] [T]
A more detailed sectioning of the road ditches, levelled areas and embankments (subsectioning).
[CROWN]
The definition of the geometry for the road ditch and levelled area section and the selection of the decision criteria. The definition of the crown slope on the levelled area.
[FILL]
The definition of the geometry in the case of an embankment.
[CUT]
"FIXED PLATFORM" The exterior part of the independent platform of [VECTORS]
the superelevation law: pavements, low walls, sidesteps and any other geometry steps linked to the auxiliary roadways. "FIXED MEDIAN" The definition of the median geometry. "LEVELLING UNSUITABLE TERRAIN" Similar definition of the geometry of levelling unsuitable terrain. “MEDIAN DITCH” Definition of the geometry of the median ditch.
[V]
Separate sectioning of the vectors (fixed platform,...)
[CLEARING SHOULDER]
The definition of a variable width berm for visibility reasons.
[SLOPE-END DITCH]
The road ditch at the foot of an embankment or at the top of the levelled area.
[COATING]
To define the levelling area/embankment linings or rockfills.
[WALL BETWEEN AXES]
To define a wall between two axes.
[STRUCTURES]
The definition of structures for their displaying in the longitudinal profiles: viaducts, tunnels and below grade and raised crossings in the secondary axis longitudinal and in the longitudinal of the main axis.
[TUNNELS]
The menu to define the geometry of the tunnels.
[EXPROP MARGIN]
This defines the value of the edge of the land to be expropriated.
PAGE: 6 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Options for DRAWING
[LONGITUDINAL P.]
The generating of longitudinal profiles plans.
[TRANSVERSE P.]
The generating of transverse profile plans.
[GrndPln] [Delete]
The generating (on the ground plan map) of the 3D lines that make up the edges of the roadways, shoulders, road ditches, berms, bottom and top of embankments and levelled areas and also the lines of the slope combs.
[Drawing Mode]
The selecting of the file that describes the drawing mode of the ground plan.
[Draw 3D Line]
This generates interactively a 3D polyline referred to a given axis and to a position with regards to the same.
[ROAD MARKERS]
The drawing of polylines that refer to platform codes, and to the KP’s intervals. This is how we can obtain the horizontal signs. Options for PROFILES
[Interpolate T]
The conditions for the automatic interpolation of transverse profiles.
[CalculateT]
The calculation of transverse profiles according to the last calculated series.
[Save M]
This saves a .file to store the complete models of the axes
[Load M] [PROFILE SYMBOLS]
This load a file with the complete models of the axes. The generating of orders for the including of symbols in the profiles.
[Safety barrier]
This enables you to determine automatically the placing of barriers depending on the height of the embankment.
[Add Ramp]
This adds the surfaces defined in another profile file of other axis/axes to an axis profile file.
[Add line]
This adds a symbol to each profile at the point in which it cuts a threedimensional line. Options for the MENUS & OPTIONS
[REPORTS]
A menu that enables you to set up, list, print, rename or generate the list of results from the Linear Works module.
[S.O. PROFILE]
This calls up the points and profile extraction calculation menu, to enable you to generate a new series of profiles over an axis.
[EDIT PROFILES]
This gives way to the Profile Editor menu, to carry out several different operations with the profile files.
[COMPLETE]
This calls up the complete calculation definition menu of a project (or of a project link), treating the platforms of several axes and the relation between them automatically.
[PROJECT]
This unfolds a dialog box that contains the information on all the data files involved in the project.
[GROUPS]
Access to the dialog box that enables you to manage the groups of axes
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 7 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
This menu enables you to enter the Photorealism module from Elevation. It also offers three new tools that enable you to: •
[3D EDITION]
• •
Load a triangle model of the axes calculated in elevation, so that they can be viewed as solids. Modify the grade line of any axis. Modify any fixed alignment of any axis. Options for WIDEN AND IMPROVEMENT
[WIDEN IMPROVEMENT]
AND
[REINFORCE TABLES]
The definition of the parameters for the Widen and Improvement works.
The definition of the parameters for the reinforcement projects. MONITORING options
[CONSTR. MONITORING]
A menu that enables you to carry out the Following up and Control of the Linear Works Construction.
[TUNNEL MONITORING]
This menu enables you to carry out the following up and construction of tunnels. Options for TOOLS
[Generates Points]
Crossing
The generating of the induced geometry of an axis over another, including the spot height and superelevations
[KP, Distance] [Short]
The selecting of points on the screen in an interactive mode to generate a list of coordinates and projection data over an axis
[Project .vol]
Resections all the data from the .vol file that is defined for an axis and it applies it to another.
[Add KP]
This adds a fixed value from a specific KP to all the elevation data.
[Gen. XYZHR .hpr]
The generating of a X,Y,Z, Head and Roll file (azimuth and superelevation) for the development of solid models (bridge platforms, etc.).
[Measuring of vol by KP /by Barycenter]
The configuration of the way to calculate the distance between profile and profile to be used in obtaining the volume between these
[Solid Mod. Gen.]
The generating of the necessary files for the solid displaying of a model in the PHOTOREALISM Module.
[Link]
The automatic modification of the files that contain the complete models of axes that touch each other.
[Truncate]
Truncate of two axes using a border line.
PAGE: 8 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Options for the UTILITIES
[VISIBILITY]
This menu enables you to carry out different visibility studies and the overview of the calculated linear works.
[SPEED DIAGRAM]
This generates speed diagrams with different types of vehicles.
[DRAINAGE WORKS]
The definition of transverse factory works (drainage).
Options for EXTRAS
[PARAMETERS]
Definition of the general parameters used in the calculations
[CROSSROAD]
The definition of the geometric relations between several axes that cross each other at the same level, as in the case of the entrances and exits to roundabouts.
[JUNCTIONS]
The definition of the geometric relations between axes that depend one upon the other, as in the case of a trunk road or exit or entrance branch.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 9 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
5.2-
ISPOL 9
Options of the fixed side SECTION menu
This menu enables you to interact either with the individual access for calculation, the displaying of a volume list (mass diagram), or with the rest of the project in a way that it allows you to access menus in which the junctions are defined, launch commands that create surfaces with the information of the two axes that cross each other (adds branch), etc. [EXIT] This enables you to exit the SECTION menu. When you exit the SECTION menu and go to the PLAN DESING, a temporary *.vol file is saved automatically tmp/mp.vol. This file can be selected with the option [Load] or can be loaded directly with the option [Recover]. This enables you to work deactivating the option: PLAN DESING Æ[OPTIONS]Æ
Confirm when exiting ELEVATION because if you exit without having saved the changes, the programme will give you another opportunity to recover them. When exiting ELEVATION, if the data that corresponds to the current *.vol have not been modified or are the same as those that have already been saved, no confirmation is requested. [RAM UTILITIES] Work options with data and profiles stored in the memory.
[Load Profiles] This loads a land transverse profile file, from which on the one hand, the land longitudinal profile is extracted, and on the other, the transverse profiles which are to be used in the calculation of the earth moving. On loading this file, the number of the current axis is updated (the one from which the profile file has been generated). The number of the file remains associated to its axis in the project table and from this moment on it will be uploaded automatically when we change axis or click on the option [DATA] situated in the floating window. To keep the association, we must save the*.pol file of the project. It checks that the axis number of the *.per file coincides with the current axis, if not a confirmation is requested from the user. [RAM UTILITIES]. General options to calculate the current axis It contains a series of utilities, as long as the option Profiles in RAM is activated (accessible from the drop-down menu STATE Æ[OPTIONS]Æ ; Profiles in RAM). All the configuration characteristics are applied at the moment in which the calculation of the current axis is made and it takes the data of the profiles from the RAM memory and if these are activated, it obtains a series of graphic and numerical results.
RAM UTILITIES Æ [OPTIONS] ; See Gmd Plan This enables you to get a view of the ground plan with each recalculation. In this display you can see one axis or all the axes and, for each axis, you can activate or deactivate the drawing of the bevels, the edges reached and/or the transverse lines where there is a profile.
PAGE: 10 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
; See Mass Diagram This is used to see the values of the mass diagram and the measurements obtained when launching the option [Calculation]. ; Recalculation Gradientes If this option is activated, the whole measurement is recalculated and the resulting mass diagram is shown after each calculation in the grade line menu or at the end of the interactive modification of the grade lines options.
Don´t show profiles in calculation This is used to deactivate the displaying of the profiles in the option [Calculation]. This saves a lot of processing time. ;Draw in 3DVIEW and GROUND PLAN This presents a drawing of the calculated axes or only of the current one over the ground plan view and over the 3D view when they are activated. The previous options are saved /recovered from the ispol.cfg file.
The following options take the existing profiles in the RAM and operate in the following way: [Calculation] If the bevels, edges and line T options are activated, it shows the graphic results on the ground plan and also informs of the result of the mass diagram.
[See Profiles] This displays the profiles calculated in RAM. [See Ground Plan] This displays the ground plan using the selected options. [Draw GrndPlan] This draws the ground plan (creating NON volatile information) using the selected options.
[Delete] This deletes the last drawn ground plan. [Mass Diagram] This carries out a calculation without showing the profiles and showing the mass diagram.
5.2.1- Cross section, saving and loading information [Save] Generates a file with the extension *.vol which contains all the data defined by the elevation of the current axis and which is used in the automatic calculation option [Calcu]: grade lines, widths, superelevations, spin axes, auxiliary roadways, road surface packages, median, eccentricity, sections type, calculation sections,…
[Load] This loads the elevation data contained in a *.vol file onto the system. The axis which is under design changes to the one that is declared in that file and it is the responsibility of the user to load a suitable profile file. Both options introduce the name of the selected *.vol file, to the project table that we have in the memory. From the moment in which this declaration appears, the programme will read the *.vol file that it corresponds to when we change axis. In order to avoid any loss of name association we must save the *.pol file of the project with the key [Save] which is in the actual data menu. The programme checks that the number of the *.vol axis file coincides with the current axis, and if it does not, it requests a confirmation from the user. When a *.vol file or *.ras file is loaded, if the number that the axis contains is different to the current one, we are offered two options: • •
Change of axis Import the data in the current axis.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 11 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The calculation of the section and the obtaining of volumes
[Calcu.] This makes a complete calculation of the axis in elevation: grade line, platform, earth moving and generates the corresponding lists, as well as a file called ISPOL#.per (with # being the current axis), which contains the surface profiles that make up the terrain: vegetation cover, inadequate land, competent land, rock, existing roads, and the profiles of the new edging, grade line and sub and over-excavation /selected soil. It also contains the measurements of the different areas involved in the earth moving.
[Recub.] The ISPOL#.per file can be edited by the user from the profile editor modifying some of the surfaces of which it is made up. The options in [Link] and [Truncate] also automatically modify the geometry of the surfaces contained in the aforementioned file. The option [Recub.] is used to update the measurements contained in the ISPOLn.per file after having launched a geometric modification in this file. This option also generates the new measuring lists on transverse profiles and the mass diagram. [Improve + Recub] In widening and improvement projects, if the land profiles contain information on the existing road surface, the function "Improve + Recub" reviews the sub gradients of the new design, modifying it to take advantage of the existing road surface in the areas where the conditions that are defined in the menu [WIDEN AND IMPROVEMENT] are fulfilled. It also recalculates the earth moving, in which you can see a reduction in the excavation volumes and of the adding of the road surface, as well as the demolition of the existing road surface. [Recu + List All] In a project that contains several axes in which we have carried out modifications from the profile editor or from the functions "Link and Truncate", the option "Recu + List All" carries out a remeasuring of the volume of all the ISPOL#.per files and simultaneously generates lists of earth moving and mass diagram (this is optional) which are independent for each axis and called "file#.lst" with "file" being a name given by the user and "#" the number of the axis. The calculation of the pavement composition
[Gen.Surface P] This presupposes that the current axis has been completely defined and calculated, also there must be a given definition made from the menu "ROAD SURFCE PACK". In this case, when clicking on the option, the system reads the file which contains the complete model of the current axis (ISPOL#.per, with # being the current axis) and creates another parallel file called ISFIR#.per (with # being the current axis), that contains the geometry of the roadbed in each of the calculation profiles. Also, a list is created with the area measurements and volumes of the different layers that make up the roadbed throughout the stretch of roadway: surface.res and surface#.res (with # being the axis number), with formatted lists and fi.res y fi#.res without formatting.
[Recal Surface P] This presupposes that the current axis has been completely defined and also a surface pack has been generated by using the previous option or from the menu "ROAD SURFCE PACK". Then, if the ISPOL#.per file has been modified from the "Profile Editor" or by using one of the options of "Link" "Truncate" or "Improvement", the existing option enables the ISFIR#.per file that contains the different surface layers to be updated automatically in those profiles where the grade line or subgradient has been modified, so that both files are coherent and the new measuring lists are generated of the different surface layers surface #.res and surface.res, as well as fi.res and fi#.res.
Mass diagram
[Mass Diag] If the current axis has been completely calculated, this option generates a list that contains the borders of the areas reached, the red spot height, the area of occupation and a mass diagram that contains the difference of volumes accumulated between the levelled area and embankment, affecting the levelled area volumes of the corresponding swelling factors for the rock and the compaction for the soil. The swellings are defined in the Area definition Table (land volume measuring) ISPOL3.dar. This can be done from the menu DEFINE AREAS in the PROFILE EDITOR. The lists are collected in the dmas.res and dmasn.res files (with n being the calculated axis). The option “Recalculate volume”, which we will see at a later stage, also includes the calculation of the mass diagram.
PAGE: 12 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
5.3-
LINEAR WORKS
SECTION menu. TOOLS
5.3.1- Generating of cross points [Generate Crossing Points] This is an option that enables you to extract the projection of the spot height from an axis that has been completely designed, following its superelevation law, over other axes; to achieve the coinciding of platforms in the entrances and exits of the branches. When we have the platform of an i axis completely designed (grade line, median, eccentricity, spin axes, superelevations and widths) and its calculation has been ordered, we can extract the cross points for another j axis, although we do not have to have any land profiles loaded; you only need to calculate the platform of the i axis. When the i axis has just been calculated, the “Generate Cross Points” is selected. The programme asks what the axis is for the cross points (j). The following data that is requested is the KP points of the start, end, and the equidistance; all of these, data on the receiving axis (the j). It also asks for the axis that receives the cross points. In a motorway, the grade line is applied on the inner edge of the main roadway, not on the axis. Therefore, you can project the spot height over the white band of a motorway. This distance is taken into consideration in the tab that is shown with the cross point. This way the cross points for all the axes that are supported on this one can be extracted. It finally asks for the name of a file to store the data (for example 002001.pas). The use of the cross points is described in the chapter DESIGNING OF GRADE LINES.
This option also enables you to generate a superelevation law, by means of the projection of the spot height of the main axis according to its superelevations on the axis and edges of the main roadway of the branch. The option asks you for the nominal widths of the branch. If you give one of the widths the value 0 then the same superelevation calculated for the other is assigned to that edge. It also asks for the name of the *.prl file to save the superelevations. This option can be used more directly in the grade line definition menu. There, the cross points that are induced by another axis over the current one are deducted.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 13 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
5.3.2- Calculation of the KP and distance [KP, Distance] This utility opens up the following dialog box
:
You have three possible working modes:
1) Interactive: Requesting, in a cyclical way, that you click on a point and choose an axis graphically or with the keyboard. You can continue selecting the points until you finish with
2) By file: There are also three possibilities: • • •
*.top files. The X,Y of a .top format file is read and the results are shown for each of the points. *.pkd files. These are files with two columns: KP and Distance. In this case the programme calculates the X,Y coordinates. *.txt files, that contain: Number, X, Y, Z and PASSWORD. In this case the option asks for the password to be listed and only calculates with the points that this password has or starts with the same letters as the password that has been entered.
If the data comes from a *.top or *.txt file, the number of the point is listed on the screen or in the lists (CONSULT.res and tmp/pkdis.res). If the points are clicked upon on the screen, they are numbered in sequence. In the case of the railways, instead of the spot height of the white band and the projected spot height, the grade line spot height is listed and the difference of spot height with this. Also, the superelevations are listed in millimetres.
3) By line: This requests a polyline whose vertexes will be the calculation points. The tool KP-distance shows the following information: • • • • • • • • • • • •
The X,Y,Z coordinates of the point. The number of the axis. The normal distance to the axis. The KP on which the axis is projected. The azimuth, the radius and coordinates in the point of projection on the axis. The grade line spot height of the axis (Zras). The spot height projected from the axis according to the superelevation (Zproy). The spot height of the white band (ZB.Blan): In roads it is the geometric axis (code point 1) and in motorways it is the inner white band of the roadway (also code 1). This value will differ from the previous one if there are any displacements of the spin axis data. The superelevation of the side of the axis where the point is. The longitudinal slope on the axis. The differences of spot height of the selected point with regards to the projected Z from the axis according to the superelevation (Z-Zproy) and according to the Z of the grade line (Z-Zras). The Z on the platform (surface 67) if the selected point falls within this. If it falls outside of this, it will give us a zero.
PAGE: 14 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Short If this flag is marked, the lists show much more summarised information, offering only the following data: • • • • • •
The X,Y,Z coordinates of the point. The number of the axis. The normal distance to the axis. The KP over which it is projected on the axis. The grade line Z of the axis (Zras) The superelevation of the side of the axis where the point is located.
Adjust Z (Z-Zpr=0) This enables you to adjust the Z of a line according to the projected Z of the axis (you need to select the option "x Line" so that this can be applied). In LIST the user can opt to: • • •
Not list anything: this way only the information will appear on the screen. Obtain the consult.res list with all the requested information. Obtain a tabulated file, called pkdis.res, which will be generated in the tmp folder, in the current folder and can be used with a spreadsheet.
When the KP, Distance is calculated for the current axis and its data is being modified, it is necessary to previously save the.vol file, because the option works on data found in this file and not on the data that is loaded, as it can be used for any axis of the project even though it is not the current axis. In DATA you have the possibility of selecting the way you enter the data of the point: • •
In the X,Y,Z coordinates. Of the KP,Distance shape: In this case you can also create a .top file with the coordinates of the points, which enables you to define points by KP,distance with regards to an axis and reframing them later with regards to a different axis from its coordinates.
5.3.3- Project .vol The function of this order is to resection all the data of the *.vol file that is defined for an axis, and apply it to another. In the study of bypasses it is common to propose variations of the horizontal alignment of an axis in a very localised area, resulting in the stretch of the previous axis to the change having new KP values. To use this function, the two axes have to be defined on the ground plan. When we are in the new axis (the one that will receive the projection) we activate [Project .vol]. The algorithm asks us for the number of the axis that projects its vol over the current axis. All the data is read from the *.vol file of the origin axis and for each KP that is read it calculates its coordinates. The resulting point is projected over the current axis and its new KP is calculated. The data that remains in the elevation tables stay that way with the kp’s of the new axis, which can be saved in its new *.vol. Each old KP has a correspondence with a new KP. Obviously this type of action should only be used when the similarity of the axes is quite high and the lengths are similar.
5.3.4- Add KP This transfers, by adding or subtracting a value, all the platform data definition KP’s, cross-section and others stored in the.vol file. Both this tool and the previous one act upon all the data: grade lines, widths, superelevations,…
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 15 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
5.3.5- Gen XYZHR.hpr This option generates files with the following information throughout the profiles of an axis: • • •
XYZ: coordinates of the axis. H (heading): azimuth-type. R (roll): Superelevation or a lateral slope.
This information can be used as a directive from the PHOTOREALISM module to generate for example bridge platforms, etc., drawing a cross-section as a generating function which is supported on these points with its side direction and slope. When clicking on the option we are asked for: • • • • •
The number of the axis. The starting profile. The final profile. Side: 0Æright, 1Æleft y 2Ætotal (between the edges of the roadway). Name for the *.hpr file.
5.3.6- Volume determination by KP/Barycenter This enables you to select the measuring of volume mode between profiles using as a distance the difference of KP’s, or instead obtaining for each element a reduced distance according to the eccentricity of the barycenters. In the ISPOL3.dar files that are saved from the interactive editor of the volume determination tables of the PROFILE EDITOR ÆDEFINE AREAS, you can include the method to be used. There is a key to change the mode before saving the *.dar file. If the ISPOL3.dar file that the scaler uses automatically has this option included, the key of the ELEVATION menu screen is ignored.
PAGE: 16 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
5.3.7- Generate Solid Model If you have the PHOTOREALISM module, this option automatically builds the solid model of the linear works, creating from the transverse profiles all the scales or triangular aspects that describe their surfaces and assigning them different colours according to whether these scales belong to the roadway, hard shoulders, road ditch, levelled area or embankment. A file from the library called ISPOL.esc declares the names of the files, passwords and the colours of each surface. When you click on the option it opens up a floating data window to generate the different solid models. All the axes that belong to our project appear automatically. We have to deactivate the axes that we do not need to generate the solid model.
The first thing we have to do is to type in the option Block after which a window will open up to name and save the *.b3d file. With the same name plus the number of the axis we can generate the *.3d files (Scales) and the *.ttp file (temporary for the survey, which contains the triangulation of the works). Block File *.b3d This file will contain all the names of the scale files that have been created, so that in PHOTOREALISM they can all be uploaded, with only mentioning the latter in the option [Load Block]. Scale Files *.3d# In these files, the general extension # will be the number of each element of the roadway. A different file is generated for each element and in a different colour; therefore, for example, if we give the name vial, the following files will be created: • • • • • • • •
vial.3d0: contains the median vial.3d1: contains the auxiliary roadways vial.3d2: contains the main roadways vial.3d3: contains the berms vial.3d4: contains the embankment vial.3d5: contains the road ditch vial.3d6: contains the levelled areas vial.3d7: contains the tunnel arches.
We also add to the axis scales, a scale with the terrain up to the edges of the expropriation, guided by the land profiles. In order to define the part of the section that is included in each scale we use the ispol.esc file which is stored in the project library and which contains the related file, the platform code, the RGB colour and the codes of the corresponding section for each scale:
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 17 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
############################################################################### #DEFINITION OF THE SCALE TO EXTRACT BY CODES (maximum 20) # # file up to the code r g b elements # # --- ------- --------------- ----- ----- ----- ---------------------------# T0 0 -11.0 0.500 0.580 0.100 median # T1 1 1.0 0.700 0.700 0.700 hard shoulder # T2 2 2.0 0.500 0.500 0.700 roadway # T3 1 11.0 0.700 0.700 0.700 hard shoulder # T4 3 15.0 0.500 0.900 0.700 berm # T5 4 602.0 0.900 0.700 0.300 embankment # T6 5 1200.0 0.800 0.800 0.800 road ditch # T7 6 3999.0 0.900 0.700 0.300 levelled area # T8 7 4999.0 0.700 0.900 0.600 terrain # T9 8 6000.0 0.700 0.700 0.600 tunnel # # end # # --# END # ###############################################################################
By clicking on the option [Edit ISPOL.esc] the user can set up the colours and codes directly from the screen generating their own ISPOL.esc before generating the output. The file that defines the start and end of the scales throughout a profile is ISPOL.esc. The editor of this file allows you to define between which codes of the PROFILE each scale is drawn, what colour it has and what file stores it in.
Temporary file *.ttp This contains the triangulation generated on the designed surface which can be loaded directly in the menu TOPOGRAPHY, and this way they can be used for different purposes, one of which can be to generate the level lines on the calculated axis model.
PAGE: 18 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Among the particular options of the window to generate the solid model we have: Calculate Land Strip: This generates a scale up to the expropriation edge. Calculate Work Border: This generates a line with the work border (a line that will coincide with the expropriation edge if the "Calculate land strip" is activated”). Gather scales of the same type: This generates the geometry that corresponds to all the axes on one single scale; so, for example, it joins all the roadways in one single scale, all the hard shoulders in one single scale, etc. List KP and vertex Dist: This offers a list with the KP and distance from the axis of each vertex. It creates two lists: *.map for the importing of geometry in 3DSMax and the*.ma2 for PHOTOREALISM to give linear texture to the roads.
5.3.8- Link This enables you to modify automatically two files that contain complete models of two axes a and b (ISPOLa.per and ISPOLb.per), so that there is no overlap between both models, and therefore the earth moving analysis is correct, avoiding any duplicity. The modification consists in truncating both models following a common border which is determined automatically as the intersection of the two of surfaces that make up the models, but which can be edited and modified by the user. This way, on each side of the border, the measured lands and surfaces only belong to one model. In the case of an intersection with several axes, the option must be executed for all the existing junctions between all the pairs of axes that make up the road junction. In the end, each of the axes involved has to remeasure the volume to obtain the definitive measurements, given that the modifications of this operation are only geometric, as if they had been done "by hand" from the Profile Editor. When you click on the option "Link", we are asked for the number of each of the axes to be truncated, as well as which side of the border has to be truncated. This side relates to each axis according to its own advance direction, so that two axes can be truncated by the same side if their advance direction in the junction is the opposite. At this moment, ISTRAM generates the three-dimensional models of the two requested axes in an auxiliary window as well as a "yellow" (L67) line which represents the theoretical border of both models established as the intersection in the space of these. If there is no intersection the line is not created. This "border" must be modified interactively, as it is possible that the intersection of the road surfaces that can be coincident are not well defined automatically (anyway, this part of the border can be generated automatically from the JUNCTION option in the COMPLETE menu). To do so we use the manual editing with the EDITOR menu which can be called up from the drop-down "MENUS". If, for example, we have designed a branch whose roadway is overlapping with the trunk road until it is situated totally within this, we can modify the "border" making it pass through this area along the outer white band of the trunk road, so that the roadway of this branch slowly "dies out" against this, without having to recur to a congregated "widths law" and without there existing any land or a platform overlap.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 19 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The "border" can be cut in pieces and as long as all the pieces are of the same type L67. Each one of them will be used to truncate both models. When the "border" is designed to the user's taste, the editing menu is closed (END) to return to the elevation menu and then click on the graphic window so that the system accepts it and launches the final truncate of both models.
When the system does not find any intersection between the surfaces of the two given models or when we have totally eliminated the border line during the editing, the option ends without making any modification of the profile files. Before working on the profile files with the defined border line, it asks for the name of a .lfr file to save it. Then it executes the truncate operation. The file to store these lines has the extension ".lfr" and for it to be entered into the project file .pol it must contain all the project "borders". We will see in the complete menu how you can accumulate several borders in one single .lfr file.
5.3.9- Truncate This enables you to truncate the file that contains the complete model of an axis to (ISPOLa.per) according to a border that the user has predefined by drawing it on the ground plan. When clicking on the option "Truncate", the number of the axis to be truncated is requested, as well as the side of the border which is to be cleaned (the side relates to the advance direction of the axis).
It also asks you to choose the line that you want to use as a border. Once this is selected, the profiles of the model are modified automatically, eliminating the areas that are situated on the side of the axis that was indicated. Likewise, in this case the border line is saved in an independent ".lfr" file. These Link and Truncate operations affect the surfaces 67 (P_rasan), 68 (P_plata), 107 (overexcavation), and other surfaces created by the option [Calculation] that are in the ISPOL#.per files.
PAGE: 20 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
5.4-
LINEAR WORKS
SECTION menu UTILITIES
5.4.1- VISIBILITY The visibility studies that are performed by the ISTRAM® programme are advancing in such a way that they show the user more complete and precise information than what has been available up to now. This option in ISTRAM® is available in the UTILITIES of the SECTION menu.
Before entering this option, it is necessary to have calculated the geometry of the axis or axes that you wish to study. To do so you need to have defined all the data correctly which, as you already know, is stored in the files: • • • •
.cej Contains the horizontal alignment of all the axes. .vol Contains the geometry of the elevation, platform and type section of each axis. .per Contains the current land profiles over which the roadway is mapped. ispol#.per Contains the profiles of the calculated axis geometry and other attributes.
In the visibility studies, the terrain in the profiles is studied (as far as the expropriation edge which is situated at 5 m by default). Visibility collects the information from two more options of this menu: Road markers and Speed
Diagram. The Road markers are used to view these in the 3D view window and to calculate the visibility of the roadway if these road markers can be visual barriers. It is necessary to draw them so that they can be used in Visibility. The Speed Diagram is used to calculate the study distance in the Stopping Visibility study. Here, the specific speeds for each radius is obtained from the ground plan design table *.dip, which is also necessary to calculate the speed diagram. When you use the speed diagram, it calculates the speed at which you can go along the roadway depending on the stopping distance available. This result appears in the study list, in the file ISPOLVP.txt. The information of the Road markers and Speed Diagram is not essential for the visibility studies, but can be very useful.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 21 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The working screen shows six clearly defined areas:
1.
3D Graphic Window: This offers a 3D view of the roadway and the surrounding area. It is created with OpenGL so therefore it works better with a video card that is able to accelerate the hardware, however this is not essential.
2.
Ground Plan: This is a view of the ground plan triangulation of the same area of the roadway as the previous ones. It is adjusted to the space given by the remaining windows of your column. It shows a line that joins two points in which we find the observer and the reference. The colour of the triangles depends on the part of the roadway that they belong to and on whether they are in or outside the studied area.
3.
Main menu: Dialog boxes to enter data, configuration and the obtaining of results from the visibility study.
4.
Alignments, Speed Diagram and Results: This shows the alignments in the studied area as well as in the areas before and after. It also shows the speed diagram if it is generated and loaded. Once the study has been carried out, it shows the results.
5.
Elevation: This draws the elevation information of the same area as the previous window. The red line represents the observer-reference visual line and the yellow the corresponding grade line stretch.
6.
Axis: This schematizes the complete axis with an alignment diagram, with a black background for the stretch in which the studies is to be carried out and white for the remaining axis. It has a slider that enables you to move the position of the observer with the purpose of only showing different views of the roadway in the 3D graphic window. On the right hand side of the slider is the error navigator which we will explain in more detail later.
PAGE: 22 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
To exit the visibility menu and return to SECTION, you only have to click on the button indicated with the green flag in the previous illustration. In the data area there are three main menus: Studies, Configuration and Results. The first (which appears selected by default) is used to carry out the studies. From the second, we control all the data that configures the visual aspect of the application when it shows the data with which the programme works or the results obtained; and from the third you can access the lists, the generating of an AVI film and other points which will be described in the following section.
5.4.1.1- Types of visibility studies When carrying out the Visibility study you must consider all the factors that define the study so that you can obtain suitable results. It is necessary to know what type of study is going to be carried out, what the established regulations are to parameterize the study and apply them properly. We start off with an observer that simulates the driver that goes along the roadway, and a reference, which is at a specific distance in front of the driver, which must always be visible. Depending on the position of the observer and the reference on the road and the distance that separates these, you can carry out studies with different objectives: • • •
Stopping Visibility Study. Overtaking Visibility Study. Crossings Visibility Study.
These studies have their predefined characteristics in the ISTRAM® programme but can be varied to carry out other studies which have been set up according to the needs of the user. Also, in the Stopping Visibility and Overtaking Visibility you can cover the run of the road without having to do any study to get an idea of the final result of the project and foresee any dangerous areas in which to intensify the study. Stopping and overtaking visibility In the study, all the objects visualised are taken into consideration, including the visual obstacles. The following sketch describes the elements that are involved in the visibility study: The observer goes along the roadway at a distance of a code and is at a specific height. The references are situated on a transverse line to the stretch, complying with a series of specific distance and height conditions with regards to the codes. The Visibility distance that separates the observer from the transverse line in which the references are situated. The Visibility vectors that show the straight line which “joins” the eye of the observer and the points of reference.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 23 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
There are other important parameters in the study that refer to the points in which it is made: • • • • • •
KP of the start of the studies. KP of the end of the studies. Distance between studies or analysis. Initial distance which is not studied because it is understood as visible. The visibility distance to be guaranteed (from a study). The jump distance of the substudies between the initial distance and the distance to be guaranteed.
. ® All this data is configurable from ISTRAM Visibility menus.
For the studies of stopping and overtaking visibility, the programme requests a series of parameters which is explained in the following. The user must remember that the tabs [Stopping] and [Overtaking] gather certain values of those used to define the axis to be studied, i.e. the initial and final KP of the axis, its speed and values by default for the remaining parameters.
PAGE: 24 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Axis From here we select the number of the axis on which the study is going to be made. The axis that we have selected in ELEVATION appears by default. Reverse direction If this is marked, the direction of the axis is reversed, which by default is in an increasing direction of the KP’s (not marked).
Load/Save This saves and loads the configuration of the visibility study. In the case of stopping visibility, the programme also enables us to select three study subtypes: 1.- A study at a Set Speed (Km/h) The speed at which it is supposed that you go along the whole stretch. From this and from the characteristics of the roadway, it calculates the stopping distance at each point according to the Stopping Distance formula:
Dp
(V × Tr ) + = 3,6
V2 254 × ( f l + i )
Dp: stopping distance. V: spot speed. Tr: driver response time. fl: longitudinal friction factor. i: slope.
The speed of the project is used by default. 2.- A study at a set distance (m) The distance in which the study is made, by default 120 m. 3.- Speed diagram This indicates that you should use the speed diagram to calculate the stopping distance. It must be previously calculated from the Elevation menu. It makes the Study Distance, in the Stopping Visibility studies, depend in each KP on the spot speed calculated in the aforementioned speed diagram. This distance is calculated with the previous formula. In the case of overtaking visibility, the study speed has to be given in Km/h. The remaining parameters are the same for both the stopping visibility study and the overtaking: The table for fl This loads the ground plan design table *.dip in which the value of fl is specified (longitudinal friction coefficient for each speed). It is the one that belongs to the project and that is used in the speed diagram by default. Maximum study distance The maximum study distance can reach 5000 m. Initial KP (m) / KP Final (m) KP’s in which the studies on the axis are started and finished, the first and last KP of the axis by default. Observer jumps every (m) The distance between the KP’s in which the observer will position themselves during the study of an axis or stretch, by default 5 m.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 25 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Do not study the first ones (m) This is the distance in which the visibility is presupposed, by default 60 m. Reference jumps every (m) This is the study between one sub-study and following one, by default of 20 m. Calculate clearing shoulders This indicates that when Stopping or Overtaking Visibility studies are made the levelled areas are moved to permit this visibility. Study visual barriers When activating this flag, these are considered as the visual barriers that are declared in the Options in the Observer position and reference, angles, and visual barriers,… KP’s Range /Observer KP’s This enables you to carry out the study either in the indicated KP’s range or in a KP which is defined in the Observer KP field. Observer KP KP in which the observer is situated momentarily according to the criteria of the user to carry out a specific viewing. By default it has the same value as the initial KP and only takes effect if the Observer KP box is activated. Reference KP KP in which the reference is situated from the position of the observer and the distance of the study. It is a merely informative value. Study The visibility study is carried out, informing of the% of the study made, and generating a report which can be consulted from the Results tab. When clicking on this button the programme requests a name for the text file that will contain the study and which will have the extension .txt. Run This offers a view of the run of the whole axis both in 3D (an OpenGL window) and in 2D. The carrying out of a run or a study can be stopped totally by pressing on the key Esc.
.
PAGE: 26 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Visibility of the crossings In the same way that the stopping and overtaking visibility studies are run studies, in other words, they are made throughout the whole axis or the stretch of KP’s that is selected, the study is made from a fixed position which is the one in which a crossings is going to be situated. In the study the observer places themselves outside the roadway which is to be studied and looks at both sides of this to see if they can cross it. The dialog box that is offered to the user is similar to the one described for the stopping and overtaking visibility studies, with the difference that some elements such as the speed diagram disappear, and others like the type of vehicle, its length and its acceleration among other things appear as new characteristics. The common elements such as the position on the observer, berms, and other advanced options have been explained in the previous section.
Therefore, the current axis is studied in the ascending order of the KP’s, and the user can choose the position of the observer (if they are on the right or left of the roadway) and set it up to whether the observer is looking towards their right or left. The crossings distance depends on the type of vehicle according to Spanish regulations, on its acceleration, length and the width on the roadway that is to be crossed.
A study at a fixed Speed (Km/h) to determine the crossings distance The speed at which it is supposed that the vehicle covers all the road alignment, the project speed by default
Dc =
(V × Tc ) 3,6
Tc = Tp +
2 ⋅ (3 + l + w ) 9,8 ⋅ j
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
Dc: crossings distance V: the speed of the road with right of way Tc: manoeuvring time of the crossing Tp: driver response time l: length of vehicle w: width of lanes j: acceleration of the vehicle ( m/s2 )
PAGE: 27 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Type of vehicle, length (m) and its acceleration (g) It varies between the types defined in the Spanish norm 3.1 IC: Articulated, rigid or light. With this value the length and acceleration of the vehicle values are established automatically and with these the necessary distance of the crossings. Furthermore, the user can modify these values (consequently the study will have another type of validity). Width of the roadway to be crossed (m) This indicates the total width of all the lanes to be crossed (by default it takes on a value of 7 m). The type of crossings visibility study This indicates to the programme if the observer is on the right or the left of the roadway in the study and if they are looking to their right or to their left. By default it is “Observer right, looking left”. As we have said before, the remaining data is the same as that described for the stopping and overtaking visibility studies: Observer jumps every (m) The distance between the KP’s in which the observer will be situated during the study of an axis or a stretch of this, by default 5 m. Do not study the first (m) This is the distance in which the visibility is presupposed, by default 60 m. Reference jumps every (m) This is a distance between one sub-study and the next, by default 20 m. Calculate berms This indicates that when a study is made the levelled area is moved to permit this visibility. By default it is not marked. Study visual barriers When activating this flag, visual barriers that are declared in the Options are considered to be within the
Observer position and reference, angles, visual barriers,… Observer KP The KP in which the observer is situated momentarily according to the criteria of the user to carry out a specific viewing. Reference KP The KP in which the reference is situated taken from the position of the observer and the study distance. This is a merely informative value. Study The crossings visibility study is carried out which generates a report. When clicking on this button the programme requests and name for the text file which will contain the study and will have the extension .txt.
PAGE: 28 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
5.4.1.2- Position of the observer and of the reference, angles, visual barriers,… When clicking on this option it opens up two new tabs: Position (which is the one that appears unfolded) and Options. In the studies, the definition of the position of the observer and the reference are taken into consideration. The values of these positions are defined by default according to what is specified in the Spanish road regulations (3.1 IC). In the dialog box that corresponds to the tab Position there are a series of options that enable the user to change these values, or to recover them if they click on the button [Predet.Val.]. The location of these positions is carried out with regards to the transverse profile of the platform (line 67) and the codes that correspond to the edges of the roadway are used:
Position of the observer and the reference on a double lane roadway The values must be entered as if the run were configured for the right roadway. If you are carrying out a study in the opposite direction, the position of the observer and the reference are calculated by symmetry. If is a single lane roadway, the dialog boxes are similar, changing the roadway graph:
Position of the observer and the reference on a single lane roadway
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 29 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
And, likewise, in the case of the crossings the dialog box is:
Position of the observer and the reference on a crossings The horizontal positioning of the observer or reference with regards to the code Side With this option we select the side on which the observer is situated, by default on the right. Code Here, we set the reference code, by default 1 (inner white band in the case of a double roadway, axis in the case of a single roadway). Distance to the code This refers to the previous code; it is the distance from this expressed in m. Always on the right The previous distance is measured on the right, according to the direction of the ascending KP’s stretch. Outwards In this case, the distance is measured towards the outer section of the roadway, depending on the direction of the stretch. This is the option by default. The height of the viewpoint Of the driver over the main roadway, by default and according to the regulation it is 1.10 m. Vertical positioning of the observer or reference From the Surface The height is measured from the surface 67 considering all the possible bends in this. From Code (HOR) The height is measured from the horizontal of the code. From the main roadway (Superelevation) The height is measured from the surface of the roadway taking into consideration the superelevation, with this being the default option. In principle, it is not necessary to change the selection by default of Side, Outwards or Main Roadway (Superelevation), because the results obtained might not be suitable.
PAGE: 30 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Advanced options for visibility studies. Studies with visual barriers The studies with visual barriers are necessary to check that objects situated on the platform (retaining barriers) or close to these (bushes, trees, buildings, raised crossing platforms,…) do not interrupt the visual line. A visual barrier is defined by a 3D line and a parallel over this in the vertical plane. Between both of these an opaque vertical band is created which is studied by the analyser. All the lines of the same type of line (line layer); for example the L404 drawn on the road surface and a parallel to this at a height of 0.70 m can represent a flexible barrier (guardrail) or rigid (newjersey). The line layer on which we have defined the buildings and a global height; for example 15 m, is usually used with urban bypass alignments. The geometry of the visual barriers is defined out of Visibility, in fact any line can become a visual barrier, although the normal situation is for the visual barriers to be defined and drawn in the option Roadway Markings in the Section menu. The section Visual Barriers of the tab Options is the place where we assign, for each type of line that represents these barriers (guardrails, newjerseys, railings,...), a height over the ground in which they are situated. You can use all kinds of specific lines to represent buildings, walls, etc., which may appear in the cartography. As all the types of lines indicated in Visual Barriers are going to be studied, it is advisable that the lines that belong to these types be those required and no others. The ‘movable’ feature indicates if the visual barrier can be moved or not. By default the option is on movable. If there are visual barriers like a building (drawn with another type of line) which evidently cannot be modified, we do not use the option). The option ‘preserve’ enables you to preserve a copy of the lines or original visual barriers in case these are moved by the programme.
If we are carrying out a study of a motorway, we can activate the option ‘cross median’, which enables us to displace the visual barriers along the median until the end of this or enter the lanes in the other direction. Two blue lines are drawn in the OpenGL window, one of them 0.1 m from the ground so that it can be seen, and another at a height indicated for this type of visual barrier, as shown in the drawing on the left. On the right, you can see the same picture but showing the 3D representation of the roadway marking which is being used (guardrail). For this the flag Show roadway markings of the Configuration tab is activated. The following illustration shows the viewing of the aforementioned blue lines on the left, and on the right the same image but with the flag activated, and the type of line (guardrail) appears:
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 31 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Reference Options You can specify that the study be carried out looking at the reference, in its set position over the transverse profile or for it to be studied on the edges of the roadway, both and at the same time. In reference This indicates that the study be carried out specifically between the observer point and that of the reference defined in the corresponding submenus, for each study KP. This is the option by default. On roadway edges This indicates that the study be carried out simultaneously on both edges of the roadway using standard references. Only one lane This is a special mark for those cases in which the edges of the roadway are studied, and the left edge of the lane direction that is being studied is shortened. It is not marked by default. Visual angles Horizontal visual angle (º) This is a maximum turning measurement that a driver must perform to see the reference. The value by default is 45º. Spanish regulations do not specify anything in this matter, but give an idea of the comfort of driving. If you do not want this value not to have any effect on the study we recommend that you use a value of 180º. Vertical visual angle (º) This is the maximum upwards angle of the vehicle’s headlights that must permit you to see the reference on sag vertical curves. The value by default is 1º which is indicated by the regulations.
PAGE: 32 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Configuration of the 3D display window This option enables you to configure the overall characteristics of the display. You can access this by clicking on the Configuration tab (at the same level as Studies). These are options that do not influence the results of the studies, although they can influence the time that it takes to perform these because of the redrawing of the windows and these can have an effect on the way that we see the study.
Added viewing (Ground plan-Elevation) (%) In order that the user can have a global idea of the graphs shown by the programme, apart from the study area, two areas (front and back) are drawn of a size defined by the user. By default the length of these areas coincides with that of the study (0%). The length of these areas is specified as a percentage of the studied area. Elevation exaggeration The relation of H/V scales for the elevation. See Reference When selecting this option, the reference is centred in the middle of the 3D view window. See Forwards (m) In this case, the centre of the window will be occupied by a point which is situated at a certain distance from the observer (by default at 100 m) and with the same characteristics as the reference. It would be the view of the driver who tries to have an overall view of the road in front. This is the view by default. See Tangential This indicates that in the 3D view window the centre of the window is occupied by a point situated at 1 m in front of the observer. In other words, it would be the view of the driver if he looked in the direction in which the vehicle was going at that moment. Camera movement with regards to the observer position This enables you to move the viewpoint of the camera with regards to the observer by movements (in m), in the three directions: lateral (a positive value implies a movement to the right), longitudinal (a positive value produces a movement forwards) and height (a positive value indicates an upward movement). Draw 3D This indicates if the 3D view window is redrawn independently of the studies. By default it is enabled, although if this window slows down the system, it should be disabled. Show road marks When you enable this option, the 3D type lines which are entered as visual barriers are represented in the 3D view with their three-dimensional shape (for example, the type of line 404 represents a roadside barrier).
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 33 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Show textures If you activate this the 3D view is represented with roadway, levelled area, embankments textures,… Generate reports This indicates if you want to generate reports or not of a study that is being carried out and which is enabled by default. The results list has been compressed so that it can have the maximum amount of information in a line in vertical A4 format. Save berms This indicates if you wish to generate berm geometry files that can be used later in the Elevation menu. Keep the indicated 3D view If this control is enabled (option by default) when the position of the observer is changed from the data menu, the programme will “forget” the movements that the user has made in the 3D view window and will show what corresponds to a normal stretch in that window. If this is disabled, it will apply all the movements carried out by the user in the 3D view window to the new position. Film: Speed (Km/h) This indicates the speed of movement of the observer along the roadway during the generating of AVI films, by default 120 Km/h. Visual angle circle (º) By activating the circle option and declaring an angle in sexagesimal degrees, the programme draws us a circle that indicates the visible area with this angle. This circle can be seen in the OpenGL window. Information in the 3D window Here, the programme is informed of which data has to be shown in the 3D window, and can be:
None The observer and reference KPs The latter and also the necessary and visible distance (available) All the latter and also the obstacle that causes the lack of visibility of the reference.
Load/Save This saves and loads the general viewing configuration.
PAGE: 34 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
5.4.1.3- Results From this tab you access the viewing of the results in the form of lists or images: Film in AVI This is used to generate an animation in AVI format, at 25 images per second, moving the camera and the reference through the positions of a stretch or study at the speed indicated in the Configuration. Spot This enables you to generate a BMP image in each position of the stretch or study. Each image is saved in a numbered file. Animation Curves When you click on this option it presents the stretch of the section which is being subjected to the study, generating two files that correspond to the curves that create the observer stretch (camera.cur) and the reference (referen.cur), and that can be used in the Photorealism module to create the animations. See lists This enables you to open any .txt extension file from a visibility study. Cartography Study This presents in the cartography and on the roadway coloured areas throughout the stretch which are the object of the visibility study. These areas are green when there are no problems of visibility and red if there are. Furthermore, the obstacles that cause the lack of visibility are represented by symbols (of a 356 type) as well as the observer-reference visuals (with the type of line 3).
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 35 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
In the following you can see an example of a report on a stopping visibility study at a fixed speed: ################################################################################ # VISIBILITY STUDY # ################################################################################ # # # Stopping visibility study along an axis or stretch of an axis. # # # # # ################################################################################ # ISTRAM(R) V. 9.04 98 # ################################################################################ # # # Axis: 1 direction: Normal # # A study at a fixed speed of 120.0 Km/h # # Axis from KP: 0.000 to KP: 2855.444 # # Study from KP: 0.000 to KP: 2855.444 # # # # Observer jumps for each for the study every: 5.00 m # # Visibility is supposed in the first ones: 60.00 m # # From there, the visibility is studied every: 20.00 m # # # # Vertical tolerance angle, in degrees: 1.00 # # Horizontal tolerance angle, in degrees: 45.00 # # # # The study is made between the view point of the observer and a point of the # # configured reference. # # # # Configured trajectory of the observer: # # Surface: 67 # # Side: Right # # Code: 1 # # Distance to the code: 5.5 m towards the outside # # Height: 1.10 m from the main roadway # # # # Configured trajectory of the reference: # # Surface: 67 # # Side: Right # # Code: 1 # # Distance to the code: 0.0 m towards the outside # # Height: 0.20 m From the main roadway # # # ################################################################################ KP D.Disp D.Nece i Radius Kv fl V.Est V.Red Obstacle Dist.Axis KPObstacle -------------------------------------------------------------------------------0.0 246.6 246.6 2.404% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 5.0 247.7 247.7 2.204% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 10.0 248.9 248.9 2.004% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 15.0 250.0 250.0 1.804% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 20.0 251.2 251.2 1.604% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 25.0 252.5 252.5 1.404% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 30.0 253.7 253.7 1.204% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 35.0 254.9 254.9 1.004% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 40.0 256.2 256.2 0.804% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 45.0 257.5 257.5 0.604% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 50.0 258.7 258.7 0.404% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 55.0 260.1 260.1 0.204% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 60.0 261.4 261.4 0.004% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 65.0 262.7 262.7 -0.196% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 70.0 240.0 264.1 -0.396% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 114.9 Median 1.664 296.717 75.0 240.0 265.5 -0.596% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 114.6 Median 1.525 291.611 80.0 240.0 266.9 -0.796% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 114.3 Median 1.498 286.528 85.0 240.0 268.3 -0.996% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 114.1 Median 1.509 280.428 90.0 220.0 269.8 -1.196% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 109.3 Median 1.809 284.852 95.0 220.0 271.2 -1.396% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 109.0 Median 1.853 279.639 100.0 220.0 272.7 -1.596% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 108.8 Median 1.942 273.422 105.0 220.0 274.2 -1.796% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 108.5 Inside Shoulder 2.188 268.525 110.0 200.0 275.7 -1.996% -383.5 -2500.000 0.291 120.0 103.4 Inside Shoulder 2.511 278.477 115.0 200.0 275.8 -2.000% -383.5 0.000 0.291 120.0 103.4 Inside Shoulder 2.646 271.211 120.0 200.0 275.8 -2.000% -383.5 0.000 0.291 120.0 103.4 Inside Shoulder 2.972 266.812 125.0 180.0 274.3 -1.805% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 98.4 Roadway 3.136 279.299 130.0 180.0 272.8 -1.605% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 98.6 Roadway 3.308 269.210 135.0 180.0 271.3 -1.405% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 98.8 Roadway 3.688 264.914 140.0 160.0 269.8 -1.205% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 93.3 Roadway 3.634 283.306 145.0 160.0 268.4 -1.005% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 93.6 Roadway 3.955 271.538 150.0 160.0 267.0 -0.805% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 93.8 Roadway 4.365 265.494 155.0 160.0 265.5 -0.605% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 94.0 Roadway 4.842 262.241 160.0 140.0 264.2 -0.405% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 87.8 Roadway 4.321 282.109 165.0 140.0 262.8 -0.205% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 88.0 Roadway 4.846 273.525 170.0 140.0 261.4 -0.005% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 88.2 Roadway 5.352 268.868 175.0 140.0 260.1 0.195% -383.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 88.4 Roadway 5.846 267.180 180.0 140.0 258.8 0.395% -398.3 2500.000 0.291 120.0 88.5 Roadway 6.339 266.125 185.0 140.0 257.5 0.595% -430.5 2500.000 0.291 120.0 88.7 Roadway 6.822 265.505 190.0 140.0 256.2 0.795% -468.4 2500.000 0.291 120.0 88.9 Roadway 7.282 235.0 127.6 127.6 -4.569% 0.0 0.000 0.349 80.0
PAGE: 36 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Graphic information of the visibility Once a study has been made you can observe the results in the Alignments, Speed Diagram and Results window. At the bottom of this window a histogram appears in which the yellow columns indicate KP’s at which the desired visibility is achieved, and the red ones indicates KP’s in which it has not been achieved. The height of these columns is proportional to the visibility distance reached. But these results are also visible for the current KP in the Ground Plan window and in the 3D View. In the Ground Plan we see a line that runs through the point where the observer is and the points in which the study has been made. This line is green in the stretches in which there is visibility and red when there is not. In the 3D View window the same line is drawn but in 3D.
Navigation on Errors Once the study has been carried out, from this menu situated at the bottom of the screen you can move sequentially (according to the KPs) on each point in which a possible visibility problem has been found, indicating also the reason for this and the KPs interval where this is shown.
5.4.1.4- Working methodology and review of results To sum up and with the aim of offering a practical Visibility approach, the steps that the user must carry out to do the study are hereby presented: Step 1: Obtaining the necessary data Before entering the visibility option it is necessary to have calculated the elevation of the axis or axes that you wish to study (that there are ispol#.per files, with # being the axis number). It is very useful to have previously calculated and drawn the road marks and visual barriers so that they can be considered by the Visibility algorithms. It is also advisable to have an idea of the regulations that determine the visibility studies. Once everything has been taken into consideration, you can access the visibility studies with the Visibility option in the Section data menu.
Step 2: Entering the data that defines the study Once you are in Visibility: • • •
The axis which is to be studied is selected. A type of study is selected, which defines a set of configuration values of the study according to the current regulations, and The initial KP and end of study KP values are entered, unless the whole axis is going to be studied, in which case you only need to leave the values by default.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 37 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Step 3: Performing the study To do so, you only need to click on the button Study and the study is performed automatically.
Step 4: Viewing the results The results of the study are stored in a report and shown in the window Alignments, Speed Diagram and Results. If the results are not the ones you expected, you must carry out the necessary corrections outside of this menu and, once the pertinent changes have been made, this process is repeated until the required objectives are fulfilled.
Other characteristics As we have previously explained, the Visibility option has other possibilities and/or characteristics that facilitate the work and which are not strictly necessary to carry out the studies. The programme permits the user to place the observer and reference point in the points that it needs throughout the axis. To do so it has a lot of different methods. You can place the observer and reference at any KP of the axis by using the Observer KP option, and entering the value of the desired km point, or also using the slider at the bottom of the menu to give it a position. With regards to its transverse position, there is a submenu, Observer and reference position, angles, visual barriers,… dedicated to this in which you can place the observer at any distance from any code that defines a transverse profile and also at any height over the surface of the roadway. The study can be backed up by a speed diagram that marks the study distance. With these characteristics defined, you can perform a run of the axis or a visibility study. Both of these respect the transverse characteristics of the observer and reference positions. The studies and runs can be made in a normal or opposite direction for the study or to cover both directions of the roadway. You can also mark the contour lines of its surroundings. If the process is very slow, you can deactivate those that have been drawn in any of the graphic windows. The study can be made on the reference or on both sides of the roadway simultaneously. If the roadway is a single lane road is can be done only on the lane that it runs along. By default, from the initial to the last KP, studies are made along the axis every 5 m, considering that in the first 60 m there is going to be visibility, and therefore these are not studied, from there on, substudies are made every 20 m until we reach the study distance. In other words, if we start at KP 1234,234, the first study will be made there, the next at KP 1239,234 and so on; at each of these, the corresponding substudies are carried out, and the objective would be that the straight that joins the observer and the reference at KP 1294,234 does not cut any roadway triangle, the terrain or visual barriers, then repeating this substudy situating the reference point at KPs 1314,234, 1334,234 and 1354,234 (supposing a study distance at 120 m). These conditions can be modified to adapt them to the needs of the user. If the final point of the last substudy does not coincide with the study distance, an additional substudy is made for the study distance (for example, if the conditions by default are modified so that the starting offset is 50, we would study 1284,234, 1304,234, 1324,234, 1344,234, 1364,234 and 1354,234).
PAGE: 38 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
5.4.2- Speed diagram This enables you to generate Lists of Speed Diagrams. The calculation also leads to the presentation of the diagram with the Longitudinal Profile (grid data DiagVel.gui) for the designing of lanes for slow vehicles. It also allows you to carry out the Visibility studies, considering the speeds specified at this point. You can also make a speed diagram with the railway design tables to calculate the times for the stretch. The speed diagram is calculated as the maximum speed that a vehicle can drive along an axis. This maximum speed is always the smallest of the following: 1)
2) 3) 4)
The maximum speed at which the vehicle can reach depending on its mechanical characteristics. For a specific vehicle, this speed depends on the starting speed and on the longitudinal profile of the road alignment, in other words, it depends on the geometry of the AXIS IN ELEVATION (slopes, ramps and vertical curves). The specific speed, which depends on the radius, of the superelevation and the transverse friction coefficient, and therefore it is the role of the GROUND PLANNED AXIS geometry. The maximum speed which is made obligatory by other conditioning factors in urban areas, crossings, etc., regardless of the road alignment geometry. The maximum speed at which a vehicle should go to be able to brake before reaching points with a specific low speed.
The following describes how you can define these speed values: The menu enables us to use three different types of vehicle: • • •
Heavy vehicles under the Spanish regulation 3.1 I.C. Cars Lorries
Heavy Vehicle under the Spanish Regulation 3.1 I.C. The performance of this vehicle is in line with the graph of the aforementioned instruction, where there are different length/speed curves for different slopes. If, as a result of a reduction of the specific speed of the road alignment or of a speed limit imposed by the user, the vehicle is forced to brake, the formula of the stopping distance found in the same instruction is used to calculate the deceleration:
Dp =
V·t p 3,6
+
2
V 254·(f l + i)
Dp = V= tp = fl = i=
Stopping distance (m) Speed (Km/h) Perception and response time (s) Wheel-road surface longitudinal friction coefficient (Depends on V) The slope of the grade line (so much [x] times one)
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 39 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Cars The performance of cars is taken from the following characteristics: • • •
Maximum speed in Km/h Time in seconds to go from 0 to100 Km/h Time it takes to cover 1000 metres from a stopped position
A table is included with these characteristics for 13 different commercial model. The light vehicle of the norm is the SEAT Ibiza, 100 CV. Additionally, we must enter a deceleration value in the case of braking in m/s2. If no positive value is entered here the same formula for the stopping distance is used. The user can enter other different values for these three characteristics, as long as they are coherent.
Lorries The behaviour of lorries is taken from four pieces of information of the time used to reach four different speeds from the stopped position. A table is included with eight different commercial models, for which the times to reach 60, 70, 80 and 85 Km/h are included. Also, in this case, you must enter a speed limit, which by default is set at 90 Km/h. And as in the case of the cars, we can also enter a value for the deceleration in case of braking, if not the formula for the stopping distance will be used. Speed diagram, data for the study Here, you must select a ground plan design table (*.dip) that includes the specific Speeds depending on the radius, as well as the longitudinal and transverse friction coefficient also related to the speed. In the library, there are two tables that comply with these conditions (here is a section as an example): AC10_04A. DIP (Roads Group I: motorways and roads of 100 Km/h. The regulation of 2000) C864_04A.DIP (Roads Group II: de 80, 60 and 40 Km/h. The regulation of 2000) ...... # Radius Superelev. Arecom Aminimo # --------- ------- -------- -------670. 4.7 291. 245. 570. 5.3 258. 217. 485. 5.9 229. 192. 410. 6.5 202. 170. 350. 7.0 179. 151. 305. 7.0 162. 136. 265. 7.0 145. 122. 225. 7.0 129. 108. 190. 7.0 113. 95. 155. 7.0 97. 82. 130. 7.0 85. 72. 105. 7.0 73. 61.
LonClo VelEsp ------- -----89.6 110.0 82.7 105.0 76.3 100.0 70.1 95.0 64.8 90.0 60.5 85.0 56.4 80.0 51.9 75.0 47.7 70.0 43.1 65.0 39.5 60.0 35.5 55.0
ft RsMin RsMax fl ------ ----- ----- ------0.0955 300. 2000. 0.30600 0.0999 278. 2000. 0.31300 0.1039 255. 2000. 0.32000 0.1083 231. 2000. 0.32700 0.1122 208. 2000. 0.33400 0.1165 188. 670. 0.34100 0.1202 168. 522. 0.34800 0.1269 146. 395. 0.35850 0.1331 125. 309. 0.36900 0.1446 103. 241. 0.37950 0.1480 87. 198. 0.39000 0.1568 70. 159. 0.40050
There are two ways of determining the specific speed:
The specific speed according to the radius: To obtain the road alignment ground plan radius, the value of the specific speed that it corresponds to is acquired according to the table. The specific speed according to the Radius and Superelevation: The pair Vesp and ft that comply with the formula are obtained from the design table:
PAGE: 40 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
p ⎞ ⎛ 2 Vesp = 127·R·⎜ f t + ⎟ 100 ⎠ ⎝
LINEAR WORKS
R = Radius at the current KP (m) P = The real superelevation of the road alignment at this point (%) ft = the mobilised transverse friction coefficient
This is useful for cases in which the superelevation does not correspond with the radius, in reinforcement projects or in those cases in which we have not been able to implement the superelevation correctly according to the norm. In the list, as well as the specific speed which has been selected, we see a final column that prints the specific speed obtained exclusively from the radius, to allow comparisons.
[Initial KP and final KP] These limit the area to be studied. Equidistance To generate lists and points of the longitudinal profile. Initial.speed KPi ÆThis defines the speed in the initial KP for the study of the diagram in the right direction.
Initial.speed ÅKPf This defines the speed and the final KP for the study of the diagram in the opposite direction.
Initial time This defines the time origin.
Anticipate braking With this option activated, the programme analyses those points where the specific speed drops suddenly, where the vehicle must start to brake so that it does not go at any time above the specific speed or limit set by the user. With this option deactivated, the vehicle starts to brake when the specific speed or limit by the user drops, and so if the reduction is very sharp in certain stretches they may be above this speed.
dT The user can change the simulation step between 0.001 and 1.000 seconds. The greater the value of dT the faster the list is generated, but with less accuracy. LIMIT ACCORDING TO KP This enables you to define two tables, one for the study of the stretch in the right direction and another for the opposite direction. In these tables, the user can enter speed limits at different KP´s of the road alignment. You must remember that between two values in the table the programme interpolates the speed values linearly, and therefore if punctual limit data is entered, you also have to enter data to reset the nominal speeds. For example, if we want to limit the speed to 50 km/h on the 400-500 and 800-900 stretches, we enter: KP
Speed
0
120
399
120
400
50
500
50
501
120
799
120
800
50
900
50
901
120
GENERATE This calculates the Speed Diagram in the direct and opposite direction and generates the list diagv.res with the following information:
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 41 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Istram 9.04 07/05/07 17:38:05 PROJECT : TEST PROJECT EJE : 1:
98
Motorway in mountain alignment
****************************************************************************** * * * SPEED DIAGRAM * * * * * * increasing KP. * * * ****************************************************************************** VEHICLE DATA: Initial KP ...: Final KP .....: Equidistance ..: Initial Speed..: Initial T......:
Heavy Vehicle of the Norm 3.1-IC 0.000 2855.444 20.000 0.00 0.00
KP t (sg) v (km/h) v.espec. speed limit R i(%) v.esp(R) ----------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ----------- -------- -------0.000 0.00 0.00 94.80 250.00 -375.00 2.404 94.80 20.000 10.99 13.78 94.80 250.00 -375.00 1.604 94.80 40.000 15.19 20.55 94.80 250.00 -375.00 0.804 94.80 60.000 18.25 26.63 94.80 250.00 -375.00 0.004 94.80 80.000 20.73 31.36 94.80 250.00 -375.00 -0.796 94.80 100.000 22.89 35.43 94.80 250.00 -375.00 -1.596 94.80 120.000 24.81 39.39 94.80 250.00 -375.00 -2.000 94.80 140.000 26.56 42.78 94.80 250.00 -375.00 -1.205 94.80 160.000 28.19 45.47 94.80 250.00 -375.00 -0.405 94.80 180.000 29.74 47.49 96.34 250.00 -389.84 0.395 96.34 200.000 31.23 48.84 111.30 250.00 -560.56 1.195 111.30 220.000 32.69 49.74 133.11 250.00 -997.34 1.995 133.11 240.000 34.13 50.55 178.89 250.00 -4516.36 1.393 178.89 260.000 35.54 51.74 167.74 250.00 3077.09 0.593 167.74 280.000 36.91 53.20 140.91 250.00 1284.53 -0.207 140.91 300.000 38.24 54.88 126.47 250.00 811.68 -1.007 126.47 320.000 39.53 56.79 113.79 250.00 593.29 -1.500 113.79 340.000 40.78 58.66 103.64 250.00 467.50 -1.500 103.64 360.000 41.99 60.44 97.40 250.00 400.00 -1.500 97.40 380.000 43.16 62.15 97.40 250.00 400.00 -1.500 97.40 400.000 44.31 63.71 97.40 250.00 400.00 -1.111 97.40 420.000 45.43 65.04 97.40 250.00 400.00 -0.711 97.40 440.000 46.52 66.15 105.15 250.00 484.60 -0.311 105.15 460.000 47.61 67.04 122.76 250.00 729.13 0.089 122.76 480.000 48.67 67.75 145.11 250.00 1471.76 0.489 145.11 500.000 49.73 68.30 195.10 250.00 0.00 0.889 195.10 520.000 50.78 68.69 195.10 250.00 0.00 1.289 195.10 540.000 51.83 68.98 195.10 250.00 0.00 1.300 195.10 560.000 52.87 69.27 195.10 250.00 0.00 1.300 195.10 580.000 53.91 69.55 195.10 250.00 10404.87 1.300 195.10 600.000 54.94 69.83 125.19 250.00 781.53 1.300 125.19 620.000 55.97 70.10 97.98 250.00 406.01 1.300 97.98 640.000 56.99 70.37 86.50 250.00 300.00 1.300 86.50 660.000 58.02 70.64 86.50 250.00 300.00 1.300 86.50 680.000 59.03 70.91 86.50 250.00 300.00 1.300 86.50
Also the files DVdir#.dat y Dvinv#.dat are generated (with # being the number of the axis) in the tmp folder with information for the diagram drawing in a longitudinal profile (DiagVel.gui) and for the VISIBILITY studies. The STUDY DATA and the VEHICLE DATA only initialize when changing the axis.
PAGE: 42 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
5.4.3- Drainage works The transverse drainage works, and other effluents associated to the project, can be defined and presented using the utilities of this dialog box.
Here you can [Load] and [Save] all the works in one single file called *.dof whose name is also entered into the *.pol file of the project (the drainage works can affect several axes and are not filed in the *.vol of any of these). Each works is defined by one or more straight line stretches, each of which is given by the three coordinates of its extreme points: “mouth” and “drainage”. The Type declares the name of a library file *.obf in which the graphic presentation parameters for your ground plan drawing are defined, as well as in the longitudinal profile.
[Num] This is the identification number of the drainage works. If two successive stretches have the same “Number”, it is understood that they are two stretches from the same drainage works linking the drainage to the mouth. If we have defined the stretch with the number "n", we start the definition of the following one with the same number, and the drainage coordinates of the previous one are copied in this as the mouth. [Height] This enables you to define a height value for each drainage works. When generating the profiles, if a different height than zero has been defined, a parallel line to the axis of the drainage works is created. [Clicking/Numerical] This is the switching between two ways of giving the coordinates of the extreme points. In the mode “Clicking” the Connection modes are activated to obtain X, Y coordinates, and temporarily the Z of the connected object. [ORTHOGONALÆ] Once the mouth has been defined, you can define the drainage in such a way that the axis of the drainage works is orthogonal to the alignment axis. When you click on the option [ORTHOGONAL->], faced with the drainage that we want to define, the programme asks us to select the alignment axis which it must cut orthogonally (this can be given numerically or by selecting any line of the ground plan drawing of this axis) and a line on which the drainage must be calculated (for example, the line at the foot of the slope). [NAME] When loading a file for the Type (*.obf), the number related to this type of drainage works appears (which the user can later modify individually). This name will be used for its presentation in the ground plan drawing and in the longitudinal profile (with the grid data isof2.gui).
[Ground plan] [B] This draws all the drainage works on the ground plan map according to the instructions stored in each *.obf file. [B] deletes the drawing that it may have done so that the user can modify any of the definitions before redrawing them with the [Ground plan]. [Profiles] This generates a file with a .per format called OF.per with a developed profile of each drainage works. To obtain the profiles, before giving this order the surface of the current terrain must be duly defined (see the SURFACES menu) so that these can appear in the profiles. The axes must be completely defined and calculated so that all the geometry of the works is available. The profiles of the axes whose GROUP or MODEL is deactivated are not cut.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 43 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
We can access the profile editor with the option [Edit
Profiles] and edit the OF.per file. In the profile editor, the application detects that a file with data on the drainage works is being edited, and therefore a modification of the polyline which represents this and the later clicking on the key [Update Drainage works] permit the user to carry out design changes simply and quickly.
Several lines or surfaces are represented in each profile: • • • • •
The axis of the drainage works. Land or lands, if the surfaces from where they are extracted are defined. The earthmoving platform, including the subgradient, levelled area and embankment. If a land surface exists, an automatic Lengthening/Shortening is made, searching for the coinciding of both surfaces. Road surface. The curves of the crossings if they are defined in the project.
In the case of railway projects the rails and sleepers are included. The axis of the drainage works in the profile can be edited by modifying its mouth or drainage point. As we have previously explained, this modification in the profile can pass automatically to the ground plan definition, by choosing the option [Update Drainage works] which appears in the LINE EDITING window. When we have two stretches that are linked, this option does not work, and we therefore recommend that you previously treat these as independent stretches, re-number them once they have been edited, and finally return to generate the profiles.
[Add] [Insert] [Delete] These act upon the order lines that define the stretches of the drainage works, adding one at the end, inserting one before the current one (the one shown in the first line of the table) or deleting the current stretch. If the name of a *dof file is declared in the *.pol, on the definition of the current project, the name of a *dof file when entering the menu is loaded automatically. When there is an order to draw the longitudinal profiles, if the longitudinal template file which is used (*.gui) has the correct order, it seeks the intersection of the drainage works with the axis and these are shown in the longitudinal. The grid data isp18.gui, isof1.gui and isof2.gui include the STV order that tells the programme to show a symbol according to the vertical scale and type: #################### DRAINAGE WORKS ################################ # --# STV Symbol of OF according to TYPE (LSC of.obf) and according to Vert. Scale # # a label symb. dx dy angle # # ------- ------ ---- ---- ------# N 507 5. 3. 0. drainage works number # EC 502 5. 0. 0. slant in centesimals # KP 503 5. -3. 0. KP # L 504 5. -6. 0. Length # Ze 505 5. -9. 0. Input spot height # Zs 506 5. -12. 0. Output spot height # # NAME Style dx dy Angle tam th tv # # ------- ------ ---- ---- ------- ---- -- -# M 6 5. 6. 0. 2.5 0 4 # # End of drainage works # # --# END # ######################################################################
PAGE: 44 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
The whole display depends on what is defined in the *.obf file of the type of drainage works. The types of line and the symbols that are going to be used are described in these files.
Example of a C4.obf file # TEST DRAINAGE WORKS C4.obf #-------------------------# name #-------------------------N 1 m PIPE #-------------------------# to draw in the ground plan #-------------------------# PL 64 .5 a line parallel to the works axis # PL 64 -.5 a line parallel to the works axis PSE 90 2. 1 symbol in emb. Tam. 2 ang. the main axis in the cut PSD 91 2. 1 symbol in des. Tam. 2 ang. the main axis in the cut # Parallel Line dist.Emb. dis.Des. Ori.emb Ori.des #----------------- ---------- -------- -------- ------PL2 0 .5 1.5 2. 1 1 PL2 0 -.5 1.5 2. 1 1 # Label the name in the ground plan # Style Tam TH TV Dis_Drainage. Relative_angle # ------- ------ --- ---- ---- ------------- --------------PN 24 2. 0 2 5. 0. #-------------------------# to draw in the longitudinal of axes #-------------------------LSC 309 1. 0 a symbol in the cut with axis, size,... #-------------------------END
[SLANTS] This calculates the slant and axis angles with which the different stretches of the drainage works are cut. If a value which is different to 0 in the axis is entered, it calculates the slant with regards to this axis even though it does not cut it. If the drainage works has a defined slant axis, when generating its profiles, it calculates the distance from the origin and the difference of spot heights between the line that defines the works and the platform (surface 67) in the three following points: • •
The two edges of the berms or hard shoulder if there is no berm (Codes 50 or 11). The geometric axis (code-100 in motorways or 1 in roads).
When generating the previous list works.res it gives a list of these values for each works. These values are saved and recovered from the *.dof file. In the LIST menu there is an option to generate a list with the works.res drainage works. Also, in the DRAW TRANSVERSE PROFILES menu, you have the option [Drainage works]. This option selects the OF.per file. The user has the grid data of the transverse profiles obfa1.gut available in the library to show these profiles, with a set of commands to label the parameters of the drainage works.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 45 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
When you want to draw the transverse profiles of the OF.per file with this grid data, we recommend that you enter through the option [Drainage works] in the transverse drawing menu. You can also do so by entering through [File] and selecting the OF.per, but in this case you must first enter the menu [ELEVATION]Æ[DRAINAGE WORKS] to check if the drainage works that are associated to the project have been loaded and then you have to click on the option [SLANTS] so that it can calculate these (when you enter through [TRANSVERSE DRAWING]Æ[Drainage works] these things are done automatically). When you create the profiles of the drainage works, they appear on the intersection with the ground plan axes and at the grade line spot height the symbol S95 which labels the number of each cut axis and a symbol S317 which labels the spot height of the cut axis. These symbols S95 and S317 are protected symbols like the S37, S306 and S307 that enable you to label a value (stored in the coordinate z) which is not affected when you draw the profile with any scale.
5.4.4-
Transition wedges
This menu enables you to generate the different embankment transition materials (MAT_TRANS_1 and MAT_TRANS_2) for the land filling after buttresses of the structures. Firstly, from the tab TYPES we can design the different geometries (distances and slopes). The necessary excavation would be calculated as scaling excavation (EXCAVA_SCALING). In the GRADE LINE menu, if the structure drawing is activated, the lines that define the transition materials (MT1 y MT2) are shown longitudinally. When you calculate the elevation, the profiles are interpolated automatically in all the individual KP’s where these materials appear or change geometry.
To delete the transition material 2 (MT2, calculated as MAT_TRANS_2), you only need to leave the values D3, D4, T3 and T4 as zero. Finally, from the tab WEDGES, each of the previous geometries are divided up into sections. Each shim is defined by the KP in the buttress, the direction of movement and the spot height at the foot of the excavation for the base of the buttress, either in an absolute value, or in a relative value to the land surface (a relative spot height under the surface must be negative).
PAGE: 46 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
5.5-
LINEAR WORKS
EXTRAS in the SECTION menu
5.5.1- PARAMETERS Under this option, we have a series of parameters that the system uses in different places. Almost all of these parameters are saved in the.vol file.
[Equidistance/Multiples for elevation and platform lists] In the lists for the elevation axis points (rasa.res) and the characteristic points of the platform (plat.res) the system will give us information according to the EQUIDISTANCES/MULTIPLES measured on the axis that is entered here. By default the value is 20 m. This value is also modified in the LISTS menu when the generating of the rasa.res list is requested. If it is activated by the “MÚLTIPLES” and the initial KP is, for example, 15.3, we will obtain the sequence 15.3, 20.0, 40.0,… However, if it is activated by “EQUIDISTANCES” we will obtain 15.3, 35.3, 55.3,…
[First profile for the elevation and platform list] In the previously mentioned lists this is the starting KP. This value can also be modified in the LISTS menu when requesting the generating of the list rasa.res.
[Pseudovertical slopes] A closing slope of the surface when the levelled area control is made at the edge of the subgradient and no value has been given to the aforementioned slope. By default it is 0.01 m.
[Horizontal separation between pseudovertical points] This distance enables you to slightly separate some lines on the ground plan that could remain overlapped, facilitating therefore their selection and the extraction of profiles that use these lines. By default 0.01 m.
[Wall width] This is the distance measured in horizontal projection between the lines of the foot of the wall and the top of the wall. By default 0.01 m.
[Maximum depth to consider rock] For depths greater than that which is indicated, we would not take into consideration the presence of rock nor is it to be included in the ISPOL#.per files. By default 25 m. If the rock is not to be considered in the land section, the most advisable thing is to declare it at a depth of 0 in the corresponding option of the CALCULATION AREAS menu.
Grass cover and Inadequate Terrain only in Embankments If this option is activated, only the thickness of the grass cover in the embankment areas will appear in the profiles. In the levelled areas or outside the platform, the thickness is reduced to zero.
Grass cover and Inadequate Terrain only in Levelled Areas If this option is activated, only the thickness of the grass cover in the levelled areas will appear in the profiles. In the embankment areas or outside the platform, the thickness is reduced to zero.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 47 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Clearings measured in the ground plan If this option is activated, the measuring of clearings of the list dmas.res is carried out in the ground plan, if not, the real area is given, taking the slopes into consideration. In any case, there is a specific list for clearings (desbr.res) that gives us all the information.
Keep the symbols of the land profiles file With this option activated, if the land profiles file has any symbol, these pass to the corresponding ISPOL#.per. Minimum separation between profiles (except in the change of stretch) The minimum separation between profiles. By default it has a value of 0.005 m which is what ISTRAM has worked with up to now. This value does not affect the changes of the calculation stretches in which you can calculate repeated profiles. The value cannot be 0.0 or negative. When you calculate the elevation, if a profile is located whose KP has a distance from the previous at a value less than this parameter, it skips this profile (unless we are in a change of calculation area).
Expropriation margin by default This value acts upon all the axes that do not have their own expropriation margin defined (this is the only value that is not saved in the .vol).
Rasa.res: State of the Grade Lines
Rasa.res: Points of the Elevation Axis
Rasa.res: Input Data
PAGE: 48 / 62
Here the programme is informed of what data has to appear in the grade line lists. These values are applied to all the axes and are saved/recovered in the ispol.cfg and/or istram.cfg files.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
5.6-
LINEAR WORKS
DRAWINGS of the ELEVATION menu
5.6.1- DRAW 3D LINE [Draw 3D Line] This enables you to draw a 3D line that refers to the analytical definition of any point of the platform. When clicking on the option, the programme requests you to: • • • • • • •
Click on a point to mark the initial KP. Click on a point to mark the final KP. Side of the axis: right or left. Reference code (1: axis, 2: edge of roadway, 11: edge of hard shoulder, etc.). Distance from the reference code (for example, distance to the edge of the roadway, etc.). Equidistance between points. Type of line to be created.
The menu ROAD MARKINGS enables you to generalise this option for a set of lines that refer to an axis.
5.6.2- ROAD MARKERS
This enables you to associate a set of lines to an axis that refer to points of your platform to be drawn in a ground plan or to view (VISIBILITY or PHOTOREALISM) elements such as continuous white lines, broken line, guardrails, handrails, etc. it also allows you to draw on the ground plan the maximum slope, marking its direction with a vector and labelling the absolute value. The following data is defined:
[Side] Left or right. [Code] The code of the reference point (1: axis, 2: edge of roadway, 11: edge of hard shoulder, etc.). [KPini] KP of the starting point of the line. [Dis.ini] Distance to the point of reference in the initial KP. [KPfin] KP of the final point of the line. [Dis.fin] Distance to the reference point at the final KP. If “Dis.ini” and “Dis.fin” are different, the distance is varied linearly between “KPini” and “KPfin”.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 49 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[L*/S*] Type of line. If you also wish to see the line with its solid presentation in the VISIBILITY menu or in the PHOTOREALISM module, we recommend that you use one of the following types (although others may be defined, see the digital cartography manual): 401: Continuous line 403: Junction line 405: Handrails 407: Rails
402: Broken line 404: Guardrails 406: Axis of the roadway 408: Lane
[Equid.] The maximum equidistance between line vertexes. [P.Sing.] This enables you to enter the singular points on the line (widths changes, superelevation changes, etc.).
[Element] This enables you to select the type of element from the following values: •
Linear: As we have seen up to now (continuous white lines, broken lines, guardrail,...).
•
Dir.Max.Pen: This draws a symbol (S152) with the direction of the maximum slope and the proportional length of the value.
•
Val.Max.Pen: This labels the value of the maximum slope (S560).
•
Reframing points: This positions points with the symbol S43 in the indicated positions.
•
Reframing line: In this case the exact equidistance value is used, while in an element of a linear type the equidistance is taken as a maximum value.
•
Directed Points: The same option as reframing points but in this case they are directed with the azimuth.
The features Direction of Maximum Slope and Maximum Slope Value work in the same way as the longitudinal grid data ISp18.gui. When one of these two is selected, if before the type of line was selected, now we can change the type of symbol [L*/S*]. On changing to these, the equidistance automatically changes to 20 m, the singular points are deactivated and the symbols S152 or S560 are chosen. When you return to a linear element, the equidistance changes to 1 m, the singular points are activated and the line L402 is selected.
[Draw] This generates all the defined lines and symbols in the cartography. The drawings of the road markings are truncated at the initial and final KP’s of the ground plan axis.
[Undo] This deletes the last one drawn which was created on clicking the previous button [Draw]. The definition of the road markings associated to an axis are saved with your *.vol file, but you can also save and load these independently in the files with the extension *.mcv.
PAGE: 50 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
5.6.
LINEAR WORKS
SECTION menu PROFILES
5.6.3- Interpolate T When we generate a calculation sequence to obtain transverse profiles in the REFRAMING and PROFILE CALCULATION menu, normally equidistant points sequences are used (for example every 20 m). After designing the data of widths, calculation stretches, etc. you may have the need to intersperse some profiles in singular points to produce the calculation and points where there are abrupt and well-defined transitions on the platform. When using this option, it opens up a menu in which we choose the tables with data that we wish to consider. When you later tell the programme to calculate the axis, every time a KP data appears in each of the activated tables, it checks if there is already a loaded profile (the file.per must be loaded); if one does not exist a new profile is interpolated from those immediately before and after. You can also define a table of singular KP’s or stretches given by the initial KP, final KP and the equidistance. For the KP’s to interpolate in this data, the option [EQUIDISTANCES] must be activated. The interpolation can be saved with the.vol file (flag
Save to .vol). If you have the cartography, we recommend that once the project has been completely defined, you should deactivate the interpolation and extract profiles from the TRANSVERSE menu, taking into account the same events which have been activated here.
[Reorder] This option enables you to reorder the list of data according to the initial KP for the interpolation in singular KP’s.
[Save] [Load]: These functions enable you to later save and load a *.eip file with the configuration of this menu.
5.6.4- Calculate T When you calculate the axis with an activated interpolation option, a new file is generated IS#.TRZ with the sequence of profiles that we already had in the current*.per, plus the singular points to be entered: We can generate a new data profile file that includes the previously interpolated singular points. By clicking on this option, the system uses the surfaces that are present in the cartography to extract a new profile file in the same way as in the "REFRAMING AND PROFILES "menu; but using this IS#.TRZ.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 51 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
5.6.5- Save M & Load M When a set of axes are being calculated in elevation, the complete models of these are stored in the files ISPOL1.per, ISPOL2.per, ISPOL3.per, etc. From these files we can extract information to draw the longitudinal, the transverse profiles, the three-dimensional model, etc. In order to protect them and avoid any automatic operation overwriting them, we can copy them with another name. It is advisable to do this before the truncating operations, adding branch, etc. The option "Save M" (save model) enables you to copy the previous files with another base name instead of ISPOL, for example "works", so that you obtain the files works1.per, works2.per, works3.per, etc. Hence, a master file is obtained which in this case is called "works.mod", that contains a list of the names of the created files. The option "Load M" (load model) enables you to choose a *.mod file. This file in turn has the names of the axis models which have been previously saved, for example, works1.per, works2.per, works3.per, etc. These files are then copied with the names ISPOL1.per, ISPOL2.per, ISPOL3.per, etc.
5.6.6- Profile symbols The order [PROFILE SYMBOLS] opens up a dialog box which prepares orders for the automatic inserting of symbols in the profiles. Its aim is to present the barriers, electricity post, fences,… in the transverse profiles, These symbols are shown when the Drawing of the transverse profiles is ordered. For each symbol that has been inserted there is a series of controls which we will describe in the following:
[SYMB] This is the symbol number of their series in the library S*. For example 309 is the symbol S309 which is similar to a circular drainage pipe, S308 a catenary post for railways, etc. In the programme library there are several scalable symbols which are suitable for this option, such as the S840, S842, S843, S844, S845... [SIDE] In this box, it switches between the symbol on the right, on the left and on both sides, and if the direction angle which is given is measured from the horizontal (absolute angle) or from the slope of the superelevation (relative angle).
[SUP] [CODI] This is the identifying number of the surface, and the point code within it. This point is taken as a reference for placing the symbol; for example, surface 67 and code 11 identify the surface of the platform and the final point of the hard shoulder; this is the place to install the protection barrier.
[Dx] [Dy] Relative coordinates to move the symbol with regards to the previously given point of reference. [SIZE] [ANGLE] The “size” variable is stored in the Z of the point. Certain symbols store this parameter and use it as a scale factor. In the symbol definition menu you can see how it declares that the Z of a symbol acts as a scale factor. With “angle” we assign a rotation of the symbol in its presentation.
PAGE: 52 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[Initial KP] [Final KP] A stretch of the axis in which the order is valid. This table can store up to 50 orders. The complete table which is applicable to an axis can be saved and loaded in a disk file with the name *.tsp and is stored in the.vol. This menu is also used as a support in the Monitoring of Tunnels. This is fully explained in the corresponding chapter. In the fixed SECTION menu, there is an order [Add Line] which has been previously explained and which also inserts symbols into the profiles: a three-dimensional line is given and the following transverse profiles of an axis cut this and receive a symbol in each of its vertexes; therefore, the passing of collecting drains, electricity pylons, etc. can be marked on the transverse profiles in the true relative position.
5.6.7- Security barriers
This option enables us to position a symbol (by default the S701 and S702 of the library that represents safety barriers) on the surface in an exact position when the height of the embankment is above the indicating value. In the case of two lane roadways, the inner left and inner right areas are also taken into consideration.
5.6.8- Add branch This adds the defined surfaces in other files ISPOLb.per to a ISPOLa.per file, so that the surfaces that belong to the axis b appear in the transverse profiles of the axis. This option must be selected after carrying out the [Link] between the axes a and b if you do not wish to have the overlay of the common areas. You can add as many axes as you wish to the axis a that create a junction or that have a connection with it.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 53 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Crossings If you activate this check box, the curves of the crossings are added where the current axis is involved as the main axis or as the axis that crosses it.
[Add All] This adds all the axes to the current axis. [Add] [Insert] [Delete] This defines the branches to be cut. In the branch field, the number of the axis and the check box are noted. Retr improves the cut with the grade line and the subgradient when they have regressions (only applicable to pseudoparallel axes). [Generate] Adds all the defined branches. [50.000] Semi-width search The maximum distance from the current axis to the branch(es) in which these will be considered. When a branch axis falls outside of this semi width, this axis will no longer be considered.
[0.2000] Hor Edge (horizontal edge. When an axis is added and in a specific profile the first point of the excavation line (L68) has a distance from the last trunk point of more than the value taken from the site Hor Edge, these lines are not joined directly but are taken across the terrain. The remaining lines that make up the section (roadway L67, selected ground L107, etc.) are then taken along the excavation line (L68), in the intermediate gap. [95] Sym.
for num.
of axis A symbol to label the number of the axis. It is inserted in the
branch profile. [317] Spot height Sym. A symbol that labels the spot height. It is inserted in the branch profile. If the grid data to draw the transverse profiles (for example. ANRAMAL.gut) has been defined to label the branch spot height, then the symbol S317 is not drawn, instead we draw the one that is defined in the grid data to avoid its duplicity.
[318] KP Sym. The symbol to label the KP of the axis. It is entered into the branch profile. EXTENSION OF THE TERRAIN Here the programme is told where to obtain the necessary information to extend the geotechnical services between two possibilities: ~ ISPOLx.per of the BRANCH The programme complements the grass cover, inadequate land, adequate land and rocks of the ISPOL#.per of the trunk using the files of the branches. { PERFx.per of the TRUNK If there is a gap between the trunk and the branch in which some information is missing on the terrain, the programme tries to extract this information from the used file as transverse profiles of the trunk terrain, which, because it is not cut by the expropriation edges, can cover a wider area.
SURFACES This informs the programme of the type of surface the branches will be presented with, choosing between two possibilities: { Create new ones These are added solely for the drawing and will not affect the future volume measurements of the axis a, given that the surfaces that have been added to the axis a receive types that are not found in the volume calculator. The operation is carried out obtaining the cross sections which, according to the position and direction of the profiles of axis a, are obtained from the surfaces of the b and then analysing from this these the surfaces 67, 68, 107, etc. (in railway the subballast and the shape layer are also included). In the profiles of the option Add Branch, the protection road ditches are also included with a separated type of line. The user indicates the type of line from which the new surfaces are created, by default L240. ~ Extend the existing ones The surfaces of the excavation, roadway, selected ground, subballast and layer shape of the branch, instead of creating new surfaces, will now increase those corresponding to the trunk and will influence in the future volume measurements. This is the valid reading when the surfaces do not have any gaps between them. With this option, it is important that the order in which the numbers of the successive branches are defined should be according to their proximity (for example, in a train depot). If a surface appears in the branch
PAGE: 54 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
which does not exist in the trunk (such as a drainage layer) the new surfaces are added. However, for the land surfaces (grass cover, inadequate land, competence, rock, rock 2,…) if they do not appear in the trunk profile, they are not added even though they appear in the branch. We are also allowed two options: Join Straight This joins the truncated surfaces with a straight segment. Truncate This allows you to add a profile file without having carried out a previous truncate. This option determines the intersection of the different surfaces and truncates in the two profiles before adding another. The definition carried out in this menu is [Save] / [Load] in *.anr files and also in the *.vol of the current axis.
5.6.9- Add line Once we have generated the definitive profiles of an axis, we can add a symbol to each profile at the point in which these cut a three-dimensional line which we must indicate. A very common application in the transverse profiles is to present in the transverse profiles the existing piping or that we design in the project, border road ditches, longitudinal drainage, etc. The size, distance from the geometric axis, the distance from the ground plan axis or the spot height of the intersected line can be stored in the parameter. This way you can Record the passing of a line with a symbol in the transverse profile and also record its distance from the axis and its spot height.
If you want to show the symbol in its real size, you must use the scalable symbols (we suggest symbol 309 which is defined as a small scalable circle) and with the option Size you can control the size of the symbol). The Lines can be selected individually or instead according to their Type. To label the distances from the rotating axis or spot heights, we recommend the symbols 306 and 307 that receive a special treatment by the profile drawer. If others were used, the numerical value of the distance from the axis or spot height would be affected by the scale of the drawing. The option [Generate] launches the Add Lines to Profiles operation for a set of Axes (From Axis [ ] To Axis [ ]) and searching in a specific semiwidth Band.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 55 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
5.7-
ISPOL 9
MENUS AND OPTIONS OF THE SECTION MENU
5.7.1- PROJECT (PROJECT tab) In the previous chapters we have learnt how to design an axis or several in the most complete way possible, without having explained the concept of crossing and junction which are developed in the chapter ‘Complex Calculations, and the relation between axes’ and the type of special project ‘Widening and improvement’. Although the utility ‘Project’ enables you to take into account these two special characteristics, we believe that it is more convenient if it is described in the current chapter, with the aim of achieving a better understanding of how the programme works. The option [PROJECT] opens up the dialog box that contains the information on all the data files involved in the definition of the project. This dialog box is accessible directly from the adjoining tab to the ELEVATION. We will now describe all the options and concepts that it includes and controls in the global calculation.
Project files (*.pol) The.pol files have already been explained in chapter 1, in the section that corresponds to the structure of the files in a linear works project. However, some things that relate to this type of file are also explained in this section.
PROJECT File name *.pol that contains all the information of the table. This name is modified when you launch the options [Save] or [Load]. Following the .pol file name the user can enter the heading of the project that will appear in the lists. The start of the menu is the same for all the tabs (GENERAL, GROUND PLAN, GRADE LINES, ELEVATION and PROJECT). [New] This deletes the memory of the whole current project and starts a new project. [Save] This creates a *.pol file with all the information contained in this table. It is very important to launch the option Save each time that any of the file names that it contains (*.cej, *.lfr, *.dof, *.vol or *.per) are modified automatically or interactively. The last saved *.pol is loaded automatically when entering the LINEAR WORKS module.
PAGE: 56 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[Load] This loads a *.pol file and simultaneously loads the *.cej file which is mentioned in it. When you load a project file (*.pol) the files vol and.per of the current axis are reloaded automatically. General options of the menu
Comment Comment for the lists. GROUND PLAN Name of the *.cej file which contains the definition of the ground plan axes. This is modified when loading or saving these files in the GROUND PLAN menu and it can also be selected here directly by clicking on the option on the file name of the current ground plan file. BOUNDARIES This is the name of the *.lfr file which contains the definition of all the boundary lines that are used to truncate the axes. It is modified by clicking on the option here. If a file is saved with the option of the fixed menu
LAND P. This enables you to select a *.dtv file (land transverse profiles generating mode). The name of this file is saved with the project and the file is loaded automatically with the project.
[AXIS to project Volumes] This affects the following lists: cvoltot.res: This list is generated after clicking on [Calculation] and contains the following information: ==================================================== * * * VOLUMES ACCUMULATED ON THE TRUNK * * * =================================================== AXIS -----------
K.P. ----------0.000 15.000
MASS DIAGR. ----------0.0 1386.2
MATERIAL PARTIAL VOL. VOL. ACCUMU. ------------- ------------ -----------SURFACE INADEQUATE LAND WALLS GROUND_SEL_2 RELL_ZAP_WALL EMBANKMENT
268.57 489.07 75.26 169.74 97.92 218.86
268.6 489.1 75.3 169.7 97.9 218.9
This list is generated from the "Axis to Project Volumes". In the AXIS column if no data appears, then it is a profile of this master axis. For the remaining axes, a point is calculated (barycenter of its KP’s) and all of its volumes are projected on a KP of the master axis. The number of this axis appears in the AXIS column and then the KP where it is projected in order among the KP’s of the master axis profiles. The total volumes of the branch appear as partial volumes in this KP, and we add it to those accumulated of the master axis and the mass diagram. You must remember that in order to calculate the mass diagram of each axis, the option [REC] (recalculate vol) must be activated. At the end of the lists, a summary appears with the totals of each volume (FULL TOTAL VOLUMES):
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 57 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
=================================================== FULL TOTAL VOLUMES * * * * * * =================================================== EXCAVA_SCALING D_ROCK_2 D_ROCK SURFACE WALL _ BASE INADEQUATE LAND TUNNEL_EXCAV D_LAND WALLS MAT_TRANS_1 GROUND_SEL_3 GROUND _SEL_2 GROUND _SEL_1 RELL_ZAP_WALL GRASS COVER EMBANKMENT EXC_ZAP_WALL
194.882 145.890 237.675 71197.795 1998.551 63487.386 97519.179 875814.958 19284.303 353.013 22823.733 30709.360 16907.093 8103.991 21305.686 180171.057 9722.833
cvtot.res: This is a list similar to the cv.res, without any headings and with the same information as the cvoltot.res, but developed to be passed onto a database. Each line contains a complete KP. In the axis column the number of the "Axis to project Volumes" will appear except in those KP´s where the volumes of the branches are projected.
cvejes.res: This is a tabulated file that contains a line for each axis with the total of its measurements: num_axis_1 nom_medic_1 vol_total nom_medic_2 vol_total … num_axis_2 nom_medic_1 vol_total nom_medic_2 vol_total … … … … … … The last line (axis number =0) contains the total of each measurement.
fiejes.res: This is similar to the previous one but with the measurements of the surface layers: number_axis_1 name_layer_1 volume_total name_layer _2 volume _total … number_axis _2 name_layer _1 volume _total name_layer _2 volume _total … ... … … … … The last line (axis number =0) contains the total sum of each measurement.
KPcv#.res: With # being the number of the axis, these lists contain the same information as the cv#.res but a column is added in front of them with the KP of the average point of the partial stretch ((KP+ previous KP)/2) projected over a common axis (the axis to project volumes). This enables you to transfer these files to a spreadsheet to generate a single mass diagram for the whole project.
Generate KPcvXX.res [Calculation].
This activates the generating of these files when you click on
Crossings If this option is activated and there is a defined crossing in the CROSSING menu, when you click on the option [Calculation] in the PROJECT menu, the programme generates the defined crossings, truncates the axes involved and makes the drawing of the axes and crossing ground plans. The options [ENL] must also be active and you must have a drawing mode defined.
PAGE: 58 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
NO .per If this option is activated (available if you activate the
Crossings), when you calculate the crossings, the programme searches to see if the profiles of the curves have already been generated. If the profile file already exists in the folder /crz, this file is used, and if it does not exist, it tries to generate it again from the cartography. When this option is activated and if the crossings have already been calculated before, you do not need to have the cartography present for the calculation of the crossings.
Bevel Cones If this box is activated, when you calculate those axes that have the revolume measurements order activated ([REC]) and that their drawing mode includes the generating of the bevel cones (for example, with the mode bevels.lil), a measurement of these is made adding the partial and accumulated measurement at each KP, at the end of the cvol#.res list. Profiles If this option is activated, when you generate the bevel cones to measure their volume or to draw them, you also extract the land profiles on the cartography. To do so, the cartography needs to be present. Num. Measuring [58] If you also indicate a measurement number (by default 58= EMBANKMENT) which corresponds to the *.dar table that is being used for the axis, the measurement of the bevel cones is accumulated to the measurement indicated in the total summary of measurements, at the end of the cv.res file and in all the other remaining lists that accumulate the data of each axis. In the axes that have crossings defined and that also generate bevel cones, both measurements calculate the volume.
Do not Interpolate Transverse Profiles This option enables you to deactivate the interpolation of transverse profiles when making the calculation from the PROJECT menu.
Table .dar: This enables you to use a single table of volume measurements for ALL the project axes. If the option is activated, this table is rules over any other which is defined for any particular axis. File, data and options associated to each axis
AXES This contains the name of the *.vol elevation definition files for each axis and the land transverse profiles *.per. They are modified automatically when saving or loading a *.vol from the ELEVATION menu, loading a *.per also from ELEVATION or when generating transverse profiles. When loading, it checks that the number of the file axis *.vol or*.per coincides with the current axis, if not the user is asked to give a confirmation.
CALCULATIONS This column specifies what calculations you wish to make and on which axes: [CAL] Equals [Calculation] from the ELEVATION menu. [MEJ] Equals the option [Improvement] from Widening and Improvement. [ENL] Truncates the axis with the border lines defined in the *.lfr file. [REC] Equals the options Recalculate volume and Mass Diagram. [RFI] Equals [PF recalculation] in the [SURFACES PACKAGE]. [0] Deactivates all the calculations in a row. [|] Activates all the calculations in a row. [Drawings] This enables you to select the ground plan drawing mode file *.lil for all the axes. [0] Disables the drawing mode for this axis. GROUP This shows which group the axis belongs to and indicates if it is active.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 59 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[Calculation] This launches all the active options [CAL] [MEJ] [ENL] [REC] and [RFI] and the ground plan drawing according to the file of the box [Drawings] for all the axes that are in the active GROUP. [Current] This works exactly the same as [CALCULATION] but only for the axis that is situated as the heading of the AXES list. [Delete] This deletes the last ground plan which was drawn with the option [CALCULATION]. Load and save project data
[Save/pol] This records all the project data separately. This order previously saves the declared .pol file so that its contents are always coherent with the saved files. If this file does not exist, a ispol.pol is created. Then it creates a subfolder called pol within the working folder and copies the files *.pol, *.cej, *.dof, *.lfr, *.vol and*.per in it, which have been declared in the PROJECT table. Another folder is also generated in this subfolder which is called lib and which contains the following files: • • • • • • •
ISPOL.gui: The latest longitudinal grid data which has been loaded for the drawing of the corresponding profiles. ISPOL.gut: The latest transverse grid data which has been loaded for the drawing of the corresponding profiles. ISPOL.lil: The latest drawing mode used for the ground plan. ISPOL.ali: The latest labelling mode of ground plan alignments. *.tmu tables of levelled area walls and embankments used in the project axes. *.sra tables of the tabulated subgradient used in the project axes. *.dar tables of USER volume measurements to calculate the land section and SURFACES used in the project axes.
Also, if there are crossings and if the option
Crossings is activated, it creates a copy of the crz folder in the folder pol. This order also creates a second folder which, for a project called file.pol, will be called file_pol
and will enable us to save the different projects separately or different versions or states.
In this file, three new subfolders are also created in which the following files are copied (if they exist or are calculated):
project_pol/profiles/ ISPOL#.per ISFIR#.per
(for all the calculated axes) (for all the calculated axes)
project _pol/lists/ ceje0.res (ground plan list of all the axes) rasa0.res (state of grade lines of all the axes) rasa#.res (state of grade lines and point of the axis in the elevation of each axis)
project _pol/measurements/ cvoltot.res (total volumes) cvolgru.res (summary of volumes per group) cvolejes.res (summary of volumes per axes) cvol#.res (volumes of each axis); firmetot.res (total volumes) firmgru.res (summary of the volumes per group) firmejes.res (summary of the volumes per axes) firm#.res (volumes of each axis) desbr#.res (clearings per axis) aresastot.res (summary of clearings and refining of slopes per axis)
PAGE: 60 / 62
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
5.7.2- GROUPS This opens up a menu which enables you to give names to the axis groups which have been defined in the ground plan. Furthermore, this menu enables you to activate/deactivate some groups to inhibit its calculation and presentation in the calculations of the complete project. From this window you can also see the names of the different axes that make up each group, and it is possible to change the group and the name of the axes; in order for the changes to be definitive, the option [Save
On the side of the name of each axis, a box appears which by default is in cyan. If you click on this box, a window appears for you to select a specific colour for each axis and consequently for each group, and this way you can differentiate between the different groups according to the colour in the menus GROUND PLAN, ELEVATION y COMPLETE, and in the Not Decorated mode, the lines type 53 (axes) are drawn with the colour that is defined here.
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
PAGE: 61 / 62
LINEAR WORKS
PAGE: 62 / 62
ISPOL 9
5 - ELEVATION, ADVANCED PROJECT CALCULATION
LINEAR WORKS COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
6
The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of Buhodra Ingeniería S.A. and is protected by Spanish and international copyright. The reproduction or modification of any text or illustration is expressly prohibited. Hard copy is exclusively allowed for corporate or individual use, and the copying of its content for educational purposes is prohibited unless otherwise authorised in writing. The educational and illustrative material contained in the present document may be modified at any time without prior notification. The present documentation is subject to a process of continuous updating., and it is therefore impossible to guarantee an exact correspondence between the data input boxes, file formats and other specifications as they appear on screen and as they appear in documentary format. The user acknowledges full responsibility for any consequences deriving from the use of the present material, and by extension of its associated programs.
LINEAR WORKS 1 2 3 4 5
01 02 03 04 05
Introduction and General Aspects Axis Design in Ground Plan, Reframing and Drawing Elevation, Land Profiles and Grade Lines Elevation, Platform and Cross Section Elevation, Advanced Project Calculation
6
06
Complex Calculations, Crossings and Junctions
07 08 09 10 11 12
Drawing Ground Plans and Profiles Project Reports Widening and Improvement Projects Railway Design Drainage and Distribution, Pipes Project Tracking and Monitoring
http://www.istram.net
© Buhodra Ingeniería S.A.
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
INDEX
6 – COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS 6.1-
COMPLETE MENU, INTRODUCTION .................................................................................... 3 6.1.16.1.26.1.3-
6.26.3-
6.4-
Definition of Boundary Lines................................................................................... 4 Other Utilities on the Complete Menu ..................................................................... 6 Joining of Axes from the Complete Menu .............................................................. 7
CROSSROADS ............................................................................................................. 9 6.2.16.2.2-
CROSSROADS DEFINITION..................................................................................... 10 Calculations of Crossroads from the Project Menu .............................................. 12
6.3.16.3.26.3.36.3.4-
Junctions, Definition of a Branch on Ground Plan ................................................ 14 Deduction of the Z and Superelevation for the Branch ......................................... 17 Calculation of the Boundary Line between the Trunk and the Branch ................ 18 Acceleration Lane and Wedge Design. ................................................................... 20
JUNCTION OF AXES WITH ISTRAM®.......................................................................... 14
SEMIAUTOMATIC OR SUPERVISED JUNCTIONS ................................................................... 23 6.4.16.4.26.4.3-
Automatic Calculation of the Grade Line and Superelevation for Junctions ...... 25 Review and Acceptance of a Semiautomatic Junction ......................................... 26 Application of the Regulations Governing Road Specifications .......................... 30
INDEX
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 1 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
INDEX
INDEX
PAGE: 2 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
6.1-
LINEAR WORKS
Complete Menu, Introduction
As we saw in the previous chapter, the “project” command enables us to make an overall calculation for our project, which as we already know, is stored in a structure made up of files containing the ground plan design and the section for each axis. In that same dialogue box and that for “Section” we find commands that appear to serve for calculating junctions between roadways (connection between trunk and branch) and crossroads on the same level. For the purposes of organising the ISTRAM manual, we have preferred to postpone an explanation of this until reaching this separate chapter, allowing ourselves the possibility of carrying out analyses and calculations involving several axes. In the COMPLETE menu, we study the relationship between axis platforms and their intersection, derivation, junction or different level crossing areas in order to deduce the geometry of the dependent axes from that of the master axes. In these areas we shall use the term branch for the axis whose geometry is subordinate to the conditions imposed by another axis (trunk). Both platforms must have a series of data previously defined before we can ask this menu to generate the deduced data; e.g. it essential that the ground plan geometry and the widths of the axes, the trunk grade line and superlevation are all totally defined. On entering the [COMPLETE] menu, the cartography is “parked”, leaving a clear work environment, which facilitates edition of the graphic elements. When we leave this menu, the cartography is loaded once again.
This menu activates the ELEVATION ECO INFORMS option, with the feature that clicking on the screen also serves for choosing the axis. The cursor shows us information about KP, alignment type, its length and elevation. 14.4.1 MENU OPTIONS From this menu we can access the [project], [rec. and profile] , [groups] y [KP,dis|short] utilities, present in other parts of the application. As previously mentioned, our aim is to view information concerning several axes that will enable us to define the parameters to correctly calculate the axes when these join up or cross each other. To do this, the simplest initial tools are in the drop down [Drawing] menu which offers the following options: [Axes] This calculates and draws the axes on a ground plan, tagging the number and origin of each axis. It is always convenient to apply this option on entering "COMPLETE” in order to be able to graphically select the axes in other options. [Widths] This draws the calculation widths defined in the ground plan next to the axes. The definition on the GROUND PLAN menu of some coherent widths that represent the main and auxiliary roadways is a very useful when studying junctions.
[Elevation Widths] This draws the borders of the axes and of the analytical shoulders in 3D of those for which the platform has been defined (Ground Plan, Grade line, Widths, Superlevation and Auxiliary Roadways). The axes that are in groups or deactivated models will not be drawn. [Ground Plan][Delete][Drawing Mode] They work like their counterparts described above in the ELEVATION MENU.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 3 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[Crossing Scheme] This draws the sectors occupied by the crossroads defined. [Junction Points] This option draws the characteristic points of the junction on the cartography using a symbol and a text: A,B,C,D,E and the overwidth points: 0,1,1.5,2,3,4 and 5. [KP distance][Short] This determines the KP and the distance from a particular point on an axis. This chapter on utilities provides an in-depth description of all the options.
6.1.1- Definition of Boundary Lines [BOUNDARY L.] (Boundary Lines). A boundary line can be any line that is viewed on screen and which we subsequently assign boundary line qualities so that it can truncate axes. [Load .lfr] This displays on screen the boundary lines stored in the “*.lfr” file defined by the “*.pol”. Each line is tagged with the number of the axes it should “Truncate” and on which side. If the line only has to truncate one axis, the number of the second axis will appear as zero. [Save .lfr] This generates an "*.lfr" file containing the boundary lines edited on screen. After saving it, the application checks and eliminates all the repeated boundary lines it locates inside. It has been observed that when saving the file, many users select, by mistake, the “Add at the end” option, without realising that they have already loaded the boundary lines file content, therefore the file can grow exponentially with lines repeated several times.
The application therefore assumes responsibility for verifying and eliminating repeated lines despite the “Add at the end” option being selected. A tolerance may be defined to determine whether the co-ordinates of two lines are repeated when adding boundary lines at the end of a file. [Define BL] This allows selection of any line, generated in any way so that the application assigns them boundary line attributes. The user selects the axes and the sides that this line should affect. If the user only wants it to truncate one axis, when asked for the choice of the second axis, he should click on “blank” thus indicating none; it will take axis 0 which means only one axis. Axes may be selected by typing in their numbers on the keyboard. [BL Stretch] This option allows the user to dimension the boundary’s area of influence on each axis to avoid problems in bow-shaped axes that cross over each other. If the same initial and end KP is given for an axis, the boundary line is not restricted. Restricted boundary lines appear on screen with an asterisk “*” after the axis number and the restricted side. [Auto BD] This function is equivalent to “Link” on the “ELEVATION ” menu; it generates a boundary line in assisted mode, seeking the intersection between the platforms, with the following differences: • •
The axes are selected graphically, indicating the axes and which sides for each one must be taken into account for the application to carry out the calculations. The boundary line is added on screen to those already there, which allows it to be subsequently modified and to be saved jointly with those already existing.
PAGE: 4 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[Junction BD] This option automatically generates all the boundary lines for the junctions defined on each axis. In order to generate a Y-junction boundary line, the ; BDL box for this junction must be enabled in the [JUNCTIONS] menu. Moreover, if a value is assigned in the Margin box, the boundary line is extended along the intersection of the side slopes of the axes which are calculated from point E up to where KP= KP_E + Margin. If calculation of overwidths has been specified as up to point E, although the boundary line continues to be generated from A, the stretch for which it is applicable will begin at E. The boundary lines thus generated must be saved in an *.lfr file and this file should likewise be selected for the project table. It is recommendable to subsequently extract land profiles for the axes, with profiles on the boundary line points ([Setting Out and Profile]Æ[TRANSVERSE]ÆEvents for profile generationÆ; Boundary Lines). On initiation of the [Junction BD.] option, the application calculates all the axes in active groups. [Auto BD+] This enables interactive modification of the boundary line position from successive cross sections. The option advances automatically until the first profile where both axes appear simultaneously, although they do not cut. To end definition of the boundary line in the current KP, we use the “Exit” button. The “KP” button enables us to automatically forward to the requested KP. In the calculation of the cross-section point, the levelled area line in also added in inadequate for the branch. [Truncate 1]The user selects the boundary lines on screen and the system truncates each axis it affects, as long as these have been calculated beforehand. If the LIN “Link” key is not pressed for an axis, it is protected against truncations and this option does not work on said axis even if there are boundary lines affecting it. [Truncate _all] This performs the same operation but using all the boundary lines. The protected axes are not affected, maintaining the corresponding ISPOLn.per intact. [Tolerance] This tolerance is applied when it comes to saving a boundary lines file, in order to avoid files with duplicated lines.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 5 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
6.1.2- Other Utilities on the Complete Menu [Compl. Calc.] This performs the “Complete Calculation” executing all the operations in the project table. (It is equivalent to the “Calculation” option on this table). The ground plan axes are calculated by generating a ceje.res file; this calculates the resulting platforms (the platn.res), the grade lines giving rise to the rasan.res and the ISPOLn.per, where n is the number of each axis. If the [CAL] key is not pressed for a particular axis, none of these calculations are performed for that axis. If the “Improvement” key is pressed for a particular axis, a geometric Improvement and Widening modification is performed on its ISPOLn.per. If “Link” is pressed, truncations are carried out for all the boundary lines present. The “Recalculate Volumes” and “Recalculate Road Surfaces” orders are also executed. The L lines, T lines, Boundary, Piano lines, etc. will also be drawn for the axes, according to what is ordered in its corresponding .lil file. [Calculate_1] This fully calculates an axis from its "*.per" and its "*.vol" and generates its road surfaces package, without performing any truncation operation. It redoes the ISPOLn.per and the cvoln.res, firmen.res, plat.res and rasan.res files. [LISTS] this provides access to the Lists of Linear Works described above. [Modif. Land] This allows modification of the land profile files for an axis (stated in the project table), whereby the platform of the other axis that has already been executed replaces the original land in the area that it occupies. Thus when calculating the branch, this will be bedded on the slopes of the trunk that is already constructed. The surface of the trunk roadway and the type of road surface existing are also added. [JUNCTION] The purpose of this menu is to define the junctions between pairs of axes from their width diagrams and the trunk platform. This will be described in depth a little further on. [Overwidths] This option calculates the speed change lanes for all the axes that that have links defined from the [JUNCTIONS] menu, with a lane width over zero and belonging to an active group. The lanes calculated go over to trunk overwidths (up to A or E), updating the corresponding *.vol files. The trunk may be in a disabled group. The THROUGH (entry+exit) type junctions have no effect on the overwidth calculations. The option analyses if any wide overwidths have been generated and displays a table with the following information: AXIS, TRUNK, GROUP (Active/Disabled), STATUS (Pending/Executed). The junctions in “pending” status and defined on axes belonging to “active” groups can be enabled using a flag. The “Generate” order executes all the overwidths indicated. To assess whether an overwidth is already executed, we look in the “Width 2” field of the Trunk Widths table to see if the overwidths induced for the axis in question appear.
[TRIMBLE] This menu enables communication to be established with TRIMBLE apparatus through Trimble Link engine software, Version 2.0 B18. This menu is described in greater detail in chapter 8, Project Lists and Reports.
PAGE: 6 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[Generate .SC1] This menu is described in greater detail in chapter 8, Project Lists and Reports. [SINGLE BOX BEAMS] This gives us access to the calculation of single box beams, panels and supports for structures. This is described further on.
6.1.3- Joining of Axes from the Complete Menu [2 AxesÆMotorway] This function is designed for Road Surface Reinforcement projects on motorways, although it may also be employed for other purposes. An approximation of the work procedure is given below: • • • • •
• • • •
We start from a single axis on ground plan that can go along the motorway median; this axis is duplicated with the GROUND PLAN “Save 1 Axis” and “Add File” options. The right-hand roadway is going to be designed on the first “d” axis and the left-hand roadway on the “i” axis. Profiles are extracted for the two axes on the same KP’s. - In the case of Widening and Improvement, the existing borders of the right-hand roadway are defined on the first axis, and those on the left-hand side are defined on the second. In elevation view, the axis on ground plan is taken to the internal white bands using eccentricity. We can use the “Eccentricity along line” function to do this by clicking on the existing inner white band. For the axis representing the right-hand roadway, we only define the main roadway with righthand semi-roadway only; we can use “widths x lines” by clicking on the outer white band. Likewise for the left-hand roadway. The interior banking side slopes should take the slope for the new median… The remaining data is defined for each section, receiving assistance from functions like “Minimum Z Longitudinal” and “Widening and Improvement superlevation”, etc. The calculation and independent improvement is performed for one of the two axes. A boundary line is defined using “Auto BD” where the interior side slopes are cut and the ISPOLd.per and ISPOLi.per are truncated. The elevation view can also be created as two identical motorway sections truncated along the axis.
The “2Axes Æ Motorway” starts from the ISPOLd.per and the ISPOLi.per, to create a third ISPOLa.per file. (We recommend that the initial axis on ground plan be tripled in order to assign it to this final axis. The function undoes the eccentricities and recodes the inner points on each profile (inner shoulder –11, median vertex –100, etc. …) creating two #ISPOLd.per and #ISPOLi.per files. It then mixes them in the following way: The Platform and the new under grade line surfaces, selected soil, etc. complete the #ISPOLd.per files with the #ISPOLi.per , whereby a single, continuous surface is created for each element. - It is necessary to recalculate the volume of the ISPOLa.per This option also allows the ISFIR files to be composed, although this option is not recommended and it is preferable: • • • •
To calculate the ISPOL.per of the composed axis. To calculate the ISFIR.per of the composed axis. To compose the el ISPOL.per of the composed axis with the [JOIN AXES]Æ[2AxesÆMotorway] To recalculate the ISFIR.per for the composed axis.
It is now possible to work on motorway widening and improvement projects and to define the behaviours on the right and on the left. However, this option can be used, [Add Branch] This option is equivalent to [Add Branch] on the SECTION menu, but for when the two axes have the same axis on ground plan and with the option of expanding the existing surfaces. In this case the algorithm is equivalent to a mixture of profiles completing the first axis surfaces with those of the second. An example of how this can be applied is a railway composed of dual track accompanied in parallel by a single track of a different gauge. The dual track bed is defined on axis 1 with appropriate eccentricity.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 7 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Axis 1 is copied on ground plan for the second. The single-track bed is defined on the elevation view with another eccentricity. A boundary line is defined as a line parallel to the axis on ground plan at a suitable distance and the axes are truncated. With this new Add Branch option, both beds are joined on the ISPOL1.per .
PAGE: 8 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
6.2-
LINEAR WORKS
CROSSROADS
This menu is used to define the geometry of the agreement between axes at crossroads. The crossings between two axes are defined on the less important axis, the dating being stored in the .vol file. This utility calculated the necessary data for one axis to “pass” the other, intercalating the sag an crest stretches in the grade line that are necessary for the elevation transition to be correct.
The application also calculates the necessary superlevation for the platforms of the two axes to be connected with precision. Moreover, the necessary calculations are made to achieve the correct interpolation of the cross-section elements specified for each axis, such as the shoulder or pavements. The road surface packages must be similar as regards their geometric conception; otherwise their correct interpretation is not feasible.
Crossroads are defined using two submenus. A first menu, arrangement TYPES, serves to define a series of Types with all the possible combinations of parameters defining an arrangement (radius, etc.) that we are going to use. The ARRANGEMENTS between axes menu defines the types we are going to use each of the 4 possible arrangements that each crossroads between two axes can have. (Each pair of axes can have several crossroads).
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 9 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
6.2.1- CROSSROADS DEFINITION In the first phase we define the features the connection types are going to have, in order to subsequently associate the type to each possible connection. The dialogue box is as follows:
The model describes the left-right, before-after (subsequent) coding that allows the four possible connections between two axes to be defined. The values we must introduce as shown below: [RADIUS] For each arrangement the application generates an axis composed of a circular alignment, with the radius that is indicated here. [CODE] This indicates at which point of the section the arrangement axis is tangent. (2 = outer border of the roadway, 11 = border of the shoulder, etc.) [EQUID] This is the maximum interval for extracting transverse profiles from the arrangement axis. The smaller the Radius, the smaller the equidistance will be. [MARGIN] If the distance of the cut and fill overflow is larger than the arrangement radius, a margin is produced so that the application determines a boundary line where the side banks of the axes involved are cut, behind the centre of the arrangement.
Once the arrangement types have been defined (the most indicative specification we are going to use to define the connections is perhaps the radius), we go on to define the arrangements themselves.
PAGE: 10 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
It is advisable to define the arrangements on the secondary axis, because, amongst other things, the grade line and superlevation data for this axis will be modified to assure that “it passes at the same level” and that vehicles do not jump or normal traffic circulation is not endangered. We shall now describe the meaning of the entries in the dialogue box: [AXIS] The number of the axis that the current axis is going to cross. [KP] The approximate KP of the crossing over the current axis. This serves to mark the possibility that two axes may cross several times. If the current axis is a branch that departs or reaches the other axis without crossing it, the KP may be the initial or end KP of the current axis. In each crossroads there are four possible arrangements: FR: Arrangement beFore the crossroads with the other axis, along the Right-hand side of the current axis. FL: Arrangement beFore the crossroads with the other axis, along the Left-hand side of the current axis. BR: Arrangement suBsequent to the crossroads with the other axis, along the Right-hand side of the current axis. BL: Arrangement suBsequent to the crossroads with the other axis, along the Left-hand side of the current axis. If there is a 0 in the box corresponding to each RB, LB, RA, LA, this indicates that the corresponding arrangement will not be carried out. A number other than 1 indicates the type of arrangement to be used. [vol]. Beside each arrangement (RB, RA, LB, LA) the enabled [vol] button appears by default, whereby the application reconstructs the arrangement’s *.vol file each time the crossroads is calculated. If the [vol] button is pressed, i.e. it is disabled, if a *.vol file already exists when the application calculates the arrangement, it uses this file and it does not reconstruct it. This enables the user to load the *.vol file for each arrangement from the floating ELEVATION window (ARRANGEMENT dropdown button) and to modify its data as regards: Grade lines, superlevation, section types, … and to save it with the [save] button. A new crossroads calculation will therefore use the *.vol file the user has modified, as long as the [vol] button is disabled. The selection of the arrangement we want to edit is very simple, if we bear their naming system in mind, e.g. the first element 3-1(1). RB means. Axis 3 with axis 1, crossroads 1, right-hand before We must take into account that this edition is undertaken by creating a temporary axis n+1, which is only accessible at this moment. The data is stored in a subdirectory named crz, which we must take into account when copying, saving or sharing data.
The sections of the different arrangements are the outcome of making a linear interpolation between the sections of the axes on which they are based, except in the interpolation of auxiliary roadways, where there is a parabolic transition.
Auto_GRD. If this option is enabled, when carrying the project calculation, the application modifies the axis grade lines, undertaking the transition through two parabolas in the entrance arrangement areas and a further two in the exit arrangement areas, to go from the grade lines defined for the axis to the grade line required by the platform of the axis being crossed. The .vol file is automatically saved with the modifications. This option works when the axis that crosses is a road on the turn axis that coincides with the axis on ground plan and on single grade line motorways where the turn axis is transported to the axis on ground plan.
Auto_SUPERELEVATION If this option is enabled, when carrying out the project calculation, the application modifies the axis superelevation, undertaking a transition in the arrangement area so that the elevation at the border of the
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 11 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
axis roadway coincides with that of the axis it crosses (it is recommended that if either of the two previous options is enabled, that a copy of the axis .vol be made, in case the automatic modifications are not accepted). We must differentiate between the previously mentioned Auto-SUPERELEVATION option from the arrangement superelevation, which are determined as follows: For each arrangement axis KP, the transverse profile is extended until it cuts the border of the roadway of one of the two crossing axes. At this point the plane formed by the superelevation and the grade line of that axis is determined. The arrangement is then assigned a superelevation for which the roadway passes through that plane in its cross section. The algorithm works in the same way as that for [-JUNCTIONS]
6.2.2- Calculations of Crossroads from the Project Menu The first time that crossroads are calculated, the cartography must be present in order for the application to extract the transverse profiles of the land that it needs. To do so, the land SURFACE must also be defined. (The semi bandwidth that it uses is that defined in the TRANSVERSE menu, and if Profiles extraction by TRIANGULATION is enabled, it is used here.) The arrangements of axes belonging to disabled groups will not be calculated. The Crossings option on the “PROJECT” menu must be enabled, so that on pressing the “Calculation” option the application generates the crossroads defined, it truncates the axes involved and it draws the ground plan for axes and crossroads. The [CAL], [LIN], [CUB] and [CRS] options must be enabled and there must be a drawing mode defined. If the NO .per option is enabled when the crossroads are calculated in PROJECT, the application searches to see whether the curve profiles have already been previously generated. If there is already a profiles file in the crz directory, this file is used, and if no file exists it tries to generate a new one based on the cartography. With this option enabled, and if crossroads have been previously calculated, it is not necessary to have the cartography present to calculate the crossroads. All the files defining axes on the ground plan (.cej), elevation (.vol), profiles (.per) and other data necessary for generating crossroads are stored in a subdirectory called crz that drops down from the work directory. [Generate crz.pol] This option on the crossroads menu groups together all the .cej of the various arrangements, into a single .cej and it renumbers the .per and .vol from the crz folder, creating the crz.pol project in the work directory. The elevation of each of the arrangement axes is calculated by projecting the grade line of the current axis and that of the other axis following their superlevation, at the beginning and at the end of the arrangement axis, with a central transition area. The road surface packages and definition of the selected land are also calculated and their measurements are incorporated into the axes of each arrangement. For the Section type to be employed in the arrangement, a transition is performed between the tangency points of the axes involved. In the ELEVATION dialogue box, if the CROSSINGS have been previously calculated from the PROJECT menu, the [ARRANGEMENTS] option offers a table of arrangements to select from. For example: 2-1(1).FR 2-1(1).FL 2-1(2).FR 3-1(1).FR
PAGE: 12 / 32
(Axis 2 with axis 1, first crossroads. Before. Right) (Axis 2 with axis 1, first crossroads. Before. Left) (Axis 2 with axis 1, second crossroads. Before. Right) (Axis 3 with axis 1, first crossroads. Before. Right)
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
In a project with N axes, the selected arrangement data is loaded as axis e=N+1. It adds the axis to the ground plan. It loads the .per and the .vol. And it copies the ISPOL#n.per file. This enables the grade lines and the rest of the data defining the arrangement to be analysed, their ground plan to be drawn or any list from the LISTS menu containing the option (G) to be generated. (It should not be recalculated from the ELEVATION menu, because the ISPOLn.per file that is thus generated will not be appropriately truncated). In order to calculate only the crossroads of two axes, one option is to place them in an independent group and disable the rest of the groups. In this way only those axes in enabled groups will be calculated. This little trick will allow us to verify that the data defined for a crossroads is correct. The last step is to restore the initial group number for each axis, continuing the project’s normal design process.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 13 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
6.3-
ISPOL 9
JUNCTION OF AXES WITH ISTRAM®
The geometric design standards for roads and motorways such as the Spanish 3.1 IC specify the need to perform incorporations and exists from a roadway following parameters that define intermediate areas between the trunk and branches, that enable vehicles, depending on the case, to accelerate or brake to match the new speed. On ISTRAM, these elements can be generated semi-automatically using certain commands on the elevation menus and submenus, or manually (the traditional way in older versions of the application) but always with the “complete” menu as the calculation and calculation verification environment. In the COMPLETE menu, we study the relationship between axis platforms and their intersection, derivation, junction or different level crossing areas in order to deduce the geometry of the dependent axes (in general branches) from that of the master (or trunk) axes. On entering the COMPLETE menu, the application saves the cartography and presents an empty environment that facilitates graphic editing. On exiting said menu, the cartography is once again restored. To study the intersection of a branch it is necessary for the trunk to be completely defined as it is the latter that conditions the intersection and the branch widths diagram, each one being saved in its respective *.vol. We can define all the elevation data for the branch, except the grade line and the superlevation that depend on the trunk in the contact area. However, only the widths of the main and the auxiliary roadways are necessary (the usual is a single left-hand width of 4 metres and a width for the inner auxiliary roadway of 1 metre).
6.3.1- Junctions, Definition of a Branch on Ground Plan The algorithms that resolve the geometry of the junction analyse the widths diagrams for both axes and the positive relationship of their horizontal alignments to determine the points where the borders of the roadways intersect. It is highly convenient to have an exact alignment of the branch axis so that no errors are produced. We recommend that the branch take-off alignment be situated with relation to the trunk using an “alignment referred to the trunk by its tag” or a “road connector or apparatus”. We thus order the ground plan calculator to give us the geometric solution of the branch with the correct distance to the trunk. The calculation algorithms are particularly confused when an exit branch road does not begin at the correct distance from the axis on the ground plan or has an initial stretch where it approaches before diverging, when the calculator is expecting that the branch will never approach after tangency or touch point. Let’s imagine the case of the junction of a motorway platform with a right-hand semi-median measuring 3 metres wide, a 1-metre inside hard shoulder, a main roadway measuring 7 metres and a righthand hard shoulder of 2.5 metres and a branch that takes off from an acceleration lane that has an area parallel to the trunk 3.5 metres wide. However, when it has been sufficiently separated it will have a 4-metre wide roadway and a 1-metre left-hand hard shoulder.
In order to define the branch axis on the ground plan with reference to the trunk by tag, the alignment of the trunk in the tangency area must bear the corresponding “tag” in order to be able to refer the first (or the last) branch alignment to it. Thus, for example, if the alignment of the trunk is circular with a –400 metre radius tagged as 23, the alignment at which the branch begins (or terminates) must be of the 23or 123 type with a radius of -414.5 metres (400 metres of trunk radius + 3metres + 1metres + 7metres of trunk widths + 3.5metres of the acceleration lane width.
PAGE: 14 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
In the start area, the branch has a roadway width of 0.5 metres and all the left-hand hard shoulder overlapping the trunk. As the definition of the widths diagram of the branch roadway in this area would be complicated, we propose that nominal widths be assigned and a subsequent truncation operation be performed (along the ABCDE boundary) that will eliminate that excess width. For a branch linked up by a connector, the solution is similar. The case in which the branch axis is “inside” is solved in a similar way. The left-hand hard shoulder is defined as 1 metre wide, the left-hand roadway is zero and the right-hand roadway starts at a width of 3.5 metres. If the branch develops overwidths, the transition can be more difficult to set up than if the axis is on the outside, but that transition does not affect the intersection. In order for these widths to be drawn on the ground plan (and also in this Complete menu with the Ground Plan Widths command) they are declared in the ground plan definition menu:
Junction Menu, Data Extraction and Calculation This menu allows us to define junctions between axes. From their width diagrams and the trunk elevation view, the elevation of the branch in the contact area can be deduced.
The method the application follows is based on the generation of an intelligent boundary in the junction areas using a series of its characteristic points, such as: A = Birthplace of the branch (minimum distance between two axes). B = The intersection of the borders of the main roadways (cut-off of the white lines). Here the main roadways split and the solid zebra-striped area begins. C = Point at given distances from the white bands inside the shoulders (in general there is a distance of 0.5 metres to each of the bands in order for them to have equal spacings of 1 metre) This is the characteristic 1-metre section in which the deceleration lane is considered to end (start for the acceleration lane). The zebra-striped area begins here. D = Cut off of the outside borders of the shoulders. E = Nose (or tip if we are considering an entrance). From this point, branch and axis are now independent roadways.
This boundary is automatically calculated and it able to transmit trunk superlevation and elevation to the branch using the condition that the trunk is a regulated area as far as its transverse breaks are concerned and that the branch is likewise according to its transverse breaks. The boundary line receives the elevation, longitudinal and transverse gradient from the trunk data in order to transmit the elevation, grade line and superlevation to the branch. The calculation is made at a series of discrete points following a
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 15 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
sequence of kilometre points approximately equal distances apart. It is essential that the Equidistance field does not take zero. In the COMPLETE menu, we begin by “Generate Axes” and drawing the “Ground Plan Widths” or “Elevation Widths” On selecting JUNCTION, the following data menu will appear:
In there table there is an area where the user can introduce data on the keyboard or by clicking with the mouse, which coexists with a calculations and results area that provides the different parameters. The left-hand side of the table corresponds to the main axis (trunk) and the right-hand side to the secondary axis (branch). The procedure for filling it in and calculating a junction is as follows:
•
•
We will choose the axes involved in the junction using the keyboard or by directly clicking on one of them with the mouse.
•
We will indicate the type of junction; it will be the entry or exit of the branch from the trunk, depending on the analysis we are going to undertake. One branch can leave an axis and arrive at the same one or at a different one.
By the calculation option, we will define up to where the branch is replaced by overwidths in the trunk and the areas where the branch grade line and/or superelevation are deduced. There are several options: Overwidths Grade line Superelevation They deduce E C C C A A A A A
E E E C E E C E A
E : Grade Line+Superelevation up to E E : Grade Line+ Superelevation up to E C : Grade Line+ Superelevation up to C. Grade line up to E E : Grade Line+ Superelevation up to C. Superelevation up to E E : Grade Line+ Superelevation up to E C : Grade Line+ Superelevation up to C. Grade line up to E E : Grade Line+ Superelevation up to C. Superelevation up to E A : Grade Line up to E E : Superelevation up to E
In the Equidistances section, we introduce the interval for the series of discrete analysis points that will comprise the boundary. We advise a value of 20 or 10 metres for axes with a gentle take-off such as road or motorway branch slip roads (with relatively large radii) and of 10, 5 or less metres for short junctions (junctions on roundabouts). Equidistances start by default at 2.00 metres. The KP of point A is that of the start-up point (in the case of an exit branch) or the arrival point (for an entrance). It is obtained automatically by clicking on the ? button, which fills the box with the KP of the start or the end of the branch. However, merely merely clicking on the number button and introducing the new value can modify this value. If an exit branch begins to approach the trunk, due to an imprecise horizontal alignment or because the branch approaches the trunk and then separates again, we can use help the algorithm to calculate the
PAGE: 16 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
junction putting the KP of the point at which the exit (or entrance) analysis should begin, normally the point of least distance between axes. With the command Extract start widths, the application automatically determines the side on which they touch and the widths of each axis for the main roadway and the auxiliary roadway at point A. To do this the calculator analyses the width diagrams that are stored in the *.vol file for each axis. If the axes have large azimuth changes, as is the case for roundabouts that have a full turn, the wrong side may be obtained. Clicking on the Right Side/Left Side keys, it switches to the correct value. The widths obtained should also be checked and rectified if necessary. Given that the overwidths at points C and E must be determined according to the design, by pressing their data buttons we will introduce the desired values. Typical values are 0.5 metres on each side for C (to determine the 1-metre characteristic section) and a value for E usually coincides with the width of the surfacing berm; a value of 0.5 metres is also frequent. Points C and E are assigned a default width of 0.5 metres. If the shoulder is less than 0.5 metres at point C, it is assigned the width of the shoulder. The necessary calculations are carried out in the second part of the table: •
• •
Pressing ABCDE we obtain said singular points, given by their KP and their distance in each of the axes. Once calculated, the system draws its position on screen and the subsequent redrawings are also kept in view. In the event of an incoherent result being observed, we should carefully review the data items, in order to modify some of them, principally the kilometre point of A (source of the branch) and then carry out the calculation once again. The observations we made before concerning the horizontal alignment should be weighted up here, in case they were the cause of the inappropriate outcome of the study. On clicking on the Boundary key, a data polygon is calculated according to the previously given equidistance, interpolating finer points between ABCDE. It is drawn in striking colours to facilitate visual verification. At this point it is advisable to save the intersection that we are creating by clicking on the Save button and generating an *.ent file. This remains available for loading if we want to treat the junction at a later date and the system has erased this data from the screen. Even though we leave the COMPLETE menu to go ELEVATION, the data for this junction is retained in the memory; but if we exit ELEVATION or we change to analyse another junction, loading the *.ent file is the quickest way of recovering it.
6.3.2- Deduction of the Z and Superelevation for the Branch On calculating the boundary by pressing the [Boundary] key as a polygon composed of a series of discrete points between A, B, C, D and E according to the given equidistance, the application automatically generates the IS#2s1.ras and IS#2s1.prl files (if branch 2 exits trunk 1) or IS#2e1.ras and IS#2e1.prl (in the event of branch 2 entering trunk 1). These are files that contain a stretch of the definition of the grade line (rasante in Spanish) and the superelevation (peralte in Spanish) for the branch derived from the trunk. This data should be incorporated into the definition of the elevation of the branch so that said elevation matches the trunk. To update the data, we will proceed as follows: •
We leave the Complete menu and return to the Elevation menu; we press the axis number key so that the system loads the *.vol table for the branch and we enter the Grade Lines menu.
•
If the branch is an exit, load the grade line generated (IS#2s1.ras file) and continue defining the branch grade line in the area where the axis is now independent. If the branch is an entrance to the trunk, we add the (IS#2e1.ras) grade line derived for the junction area using the [Add .ras] button to the previous grade line. Remember that the [Load] operation deletes all the data for the current grade
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 17 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
line and it replaces it with the new data, while the [Add] operation conserves all the data for the current grade line and adds the new data at the end. •
Similarly for the superlevation: We leave here and enter the superlevation menu. After making the automatic calculation with the appropriate superlevation table, the junction area data is replaced by inserting the superlevation derived from the trunk. The application replaces the KP data items for the stretch corresponding to the junction (normally start and end) and it replaces them with new ones. We should check that the superlevation transitions in the area where the derived superlevation end and those from the table begin are performed smoothly. The relative gradient at the border should be respected so that the increase in superlevation per second is appropriate for the kind of axis (4% per second is a usual value that leads to a prescription of 6 metres of transition for each superlevation percentage point and that is usually adequate for slip roads).
•
At this point save the *.vol of the branch with the whole definition. Also verify that the section type tables and the commands of the calculation slots are correctly defined. The elevation of the branch is normally fully defined, including the automatic superlevation, the only thing missing is the grade line in the *.vol when the junction study is to be started.
6.3.3- Calculation of the Boundary Line between the Trunk and the Branch Once we have calculated the junction zone and correctly defined the branch, we shall now define the boundary line that allows profile truncation and physical separation between the axes. Boundary lines are entities we handle graphically in order to be able to use the interactive on-screen editing utility. They define a kind of vertical wall that is used to cut the cross-sections of the two axes, removing the parts that are not going to be constructed. In the case of junctions between axes, it corresponds to the line on which the two platforms touch, i.e. with the tracing of the analytical boundary we used previously to derive the branch elevation. To create it, we must follow the procedure outlined below: •
We return to the COMPLETE menu, we order the application to draw the axes on ground plan and the widths on ground plan or on elevation if we want to see the alignments, and we enable the JUNCTION table. We load the junction saved previously, that is if the system did not maintain it and we perform a new verification calculation pressing the ABCDE key (this restores certain variables for the junction which may have been lost and enables us to check that there are no errors). Once the polygon of discrete points joining ABCDE has been calculated using the Boundary command, we press the “ÆBDL” button which transfers said polygon to a boundary line. The boundary line is added to the drawing on screen (it appears in yellow upon redrawing) and it is assigned line type L67.
•
It is advisable to save the boundary lines generated in a boundary lines file with an *.lfr extension. The
*.lfr files may contain more than one boundary line. We can save one in each file and bring them all together into a single *.lfr file, or we can add them to a *.lfr that we are going to update every time we create a new one. A routine we usually use to accumulate them is as follows: When we generate the first one, we save it in an *.lfr file (for this example we shall call it total.lfr). We open the PROJECT table and we declare the name of this file in the corresponding box. To do so we click on the BOUNDARIES key [*] in the project table and we select the name of the file (total.lfr). To make this declaration permanent, we save the project *.pol file. The *.pol reminds the user from now on which is the boundary lines file that should be loaded when needed for processing.
PAGE: 18 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Each time we go to the COMPLETE menu from ELEVATION, we press the fixed menu Generate Axes, Ground Plan Widths or Elevation Widths keys and then the Load
This way, before operating on any junction or creating new boundary lines, we have all the boundaries available that we have to maintain. When we create another one through the previously described process, we will have the alignment of all those we have to conserve and when we generate the new one, the
On the Complete menu we press the Auto BD button. We choose the axes involved, indicating the side of the axis affected by answering the question: Lefthand side Y/N? The application will save the data we have on screen so far and on a clean screen it will generate the wired models of the two platforms and the boundary line determined by the intersection between the side slopes, drawing it on screen in yellow with line type L67. The messages bar on the lower edge of the screen we see: Correct the intersection and click to accept. If the line automatically generated is satisfactory, we will only have to click anywhere on the work window to validate it and to go on to truncate the profiles.
Otherwise, this is the time to edit this line: -
We go to Line Editing using the dropdown menu and we modify the boundary line as is necessary, eliminating, for example, the area already obtained by the operations previously described with the Junction menu.
-
We leave the Line Editing menu using END to return to the previous menu, and as we are reminded by the message, we click on any point on the screen to accept. The data screen we saved previously is restored with all the alignment of axes and boundary lines that we have, to which the recently created line has now been added.
-
As this line is an extension of what we had defined before processing the junction, it is advisable to connect the two boundary lines so that the application uses them in a single operation. Let us go back to the Line Editing menu, calling it from the dropdown and there we make the connection and any possible correction to the boundary line alignment. On returning to the COMPLETE menu, we can now save the boundary lines file with these modifications.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 19 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The
6.3.4- Acceleration Lane and Wedge Design. There are two ways most frequently used to project the acceleration wedge and lane: Case 1: Consider the acceleration lane as overwidths of the trunk up to point A of the start-up of the branch. •
When calculating the junction, we automatically obtain the KP values corresponding to its singular points, amongst which is the branch A point (start-up or arrival point, as appropriate). Therefore, on the Elevation menu the trunk widths diagram is defined with the overwidths corresponding to the wedge at each KP, depending on its length. The transition from the start-up point of the wedge to the point where it is fully developed (reaching the typical width of 3.5 metres of an acceleration lane) is linearly calculated.
•
The parallel lane subsequently continues at a width of 3.5 metres, which is incorporated onto the trunk widths diagram with the corresponding KP, up to the initial A point of the branch. At this point the 3.5-metre overwidth should disappear, returning to the nominal width of 7 metres. To facilitate editing, it is advisable not to do this on the same profile. We only have to give a minimal separation margin (we recommend 10 centimetres) between the profiles on which we return to the normal trunk width. It may prove useful to carry out the transition rounding up to the decimetre prior to and following the exact KP of the A point, whereby the wide profile is not cut by the boundary line and the narrow profile is.
Case 2: Consider the acceleration lane as overwidths of the trunk up to point E where the branch platform takes as an axis that is independent of the trunk. •
From this constructive viewpoint and considering that the junction area (up to the tip or the nose) is usually surfaced as a whole, it may be advisable to define all the branch take-off area as overwidths up to where the road surfaces separate (Point E). The procedure will therefore be: • • •
In Complete, we enter the Junction menu and load the previously calculated junction. We give the length (1) of the wedge and of the acceleration lane by clicking on the corresponding buttons and typing in said parameters. This length can be given from width point 1.5 or from point 1 as is described below. By pressing the Calculate Overwidths button, the system calculates the corresponding overwidths of the trunk, generating and drawing points 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, which correspond to: • 0: The starting point of the wedge. • 1: The point at which the wedge is fully developed. Start of the parallel lane. • 1.5: The point where the lane reaches a width of 1.5 metres. • 2: Start of the branch (same KP as point A). End of the constant width of the acceleration lane. • 3: Maximum overwidth of the trunk (KP corresponds to Point E on the branch). Stretch 2-3 follows the outer border of the main roadway of the branch.
PAGE: 20 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
• 4 : This coincides with point E (nose or tip). Points 3 and 4 lie on the same profile of the branch. • 5: Back to the nominal width of the trunk (7 metres for example). It will have the same KP value as point E + 10 centimetres. •
When we are sure that the particular solution is correct, we update the (*.vol) files that contain the definition of the elevation of the two axes by pressing the UPDATE FILES button. The widths diagram is modified on the trunk *.vol and the start (or end) KP of the branch is modified in the first value of the *.vol Calculation Areas table of the branch.
Case 3: Consider that the acceleration lane as overwidths of the trunk up to point C. This case is similar to the previous one. The length of the acceleration lane is measured, according to Spanish Regulation 3.1 IC, from the point at which the wedge reaches a width of 1.5 metres (a characteristic section of 1.5 metres) until the trunk and branch roadways are 1 metre apart (a characteristic section of 1 metre). In the Junction table, however, the length of the wedge is considered to run from its start-up until it is fully developed, reaching a width of 3.5 metres and the acceleration lane is considered to go from point to point C (white bands at one metre). At this point it is interesting to generate a new series of profiles that pass through the singular points obtained and the resulting calculation zones in order to accurately define the platform width changes. The Interpolate profiles option from the Elevation menu allows us to indicate at which points or in which areas to insert auxiliary profiles each time a calculation is made, activating the Widths and Calculation Zones options. The boundary line, in this case, should not begin until the nose. The start point will be E where the platforms separate. The boundary line stretch going from A to E that can be determined from the junctions menu, should not be used, because the variables widths zone would cut all the profiles.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 21 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
In the case of a parallel acceleration lane measuring 3.5 metres wide, point 2 would coincide before A at that distance. The length of the acceleration lane according to the regulation would, in the case of the figure, be 211 metres. As the wedge is 85 metres in length, the outcome for the 1C parallel stretch will be 162.42 metres. In the case of a direct branch type, points 0, 1 and 2 will coincide over point A. The length of the wedge in this case is zero and the 1C length must be the difference between the KP values of points C and A over the trunk (e.g. KPC – KPA = 23.38 metres), easily calculated from the KP of the lower section of the floating Junction menu.
PAGE: 22 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
6.4-
LINEAR WORKS
Semiautomatic or Supervised Junctions
Similarly to defining a crossroads, the elevation menu offers a [junctions] key that provides access to the menu for defining the junctions associated to the axis in course. The data from the [JUNCTIONS] menu is defined for each axis and saved and loaded onto its corresponding *.vol file. This data can be saved in independent *.etq extension files from the junctions dropdown window. The data for a junction between two axes must be defined on the axis working as the BRANCH. A data table can be defined for each of the axes on ground plan. In each data item we add the information for the junction with the other axis from which it departs, or at which it arrives, or through which it passes. The corresponding dialogue box is shown below and now we shall describe the parameters that are defined.
TRUNK [1]. This is the number of the axis from which it departs, at which it arrives or through which it passes. KP_A(Branch) [0.0000]. KP on the current axis of the A point of the junction. It is the start KP of the branch for an exit junction, the end KP for an entrance junction or the KP at which they are tangents for the case of a passing axis.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 23 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[EXIT] TYPE • • •
[EXIT]. For example a branch with a deceleration lane. [ENTRANCE]. For example a branch with an acceleration lane. [PASS]. Where there are two consecutive junctions; one to enter and another to exit For example, an axis that enters and leaves a roundabout (picture).
SurWid, GRADE LINES, SUPERELEVATION Using this option, we will define up to where the branch is replaced by overwidths in the trunk and the zones where the branch grade line and/or superlevation are derived. There are several options: Overwidths Grade Line superlevation They derive E C C C A A A A A
E E E C E E C E A
E : Grade Line+ superlevation up to E E : Grade Line+ superlevation up to E C : Grade Line+ superlevation up to C. Grade line up to E E : Grade Line+ superlevation up to C. Superelevation up to E E : Grade Line+ superlevation up to E C : Grade Line+ superlevation up to C. Grade line up to E E : Grade Line+ superlevation up to C. Superlevation up to E A : Grade Line up to E E : Superlevation up to E
[Overwidths] There are three possibilities: •
[A]. The wedge and the acceleration/deceleration lanes are calculated as overwidths of the trunk up to point A and the branch begins to develop from this point. The boundary line begins at point A.
•
[E]. The wedge and the acceleration/deceleration lanes are calculated as overwidths of the trunk up to point E and the branch begins to develop from this point. The boundary line begins at point E.
•
[C]. The same as in the previous point but up to point C.
Equid. [2.000] The grade line and the superlevation are calculated all along the hip rafter, ABCDE, at points separated by a maximum distance of the Equid value. LANE [3.500] The nominal width of the acceleration/deceleration lane.
PAGE: 24 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
BDL On activating this, the boundary line hip rafter will be extended with the line derived from the slopes of the cut and fill after point E. In order to generate a junction boundary line, the option we are describing must be enabled. Margin [100.00] The boundary line is extended along the intersection of the slopes of the two axes that are calculated from point E up to a KP= KP_E + Margin. Transi.[40] This makes a transition with a double parabola between the defined and derived grade lines. [Ovw_C_T], [Ovw_C_R] y [Ovw_E_T], [Ovw_E_R] These functions allow us to use different overwidths for points C and E, from the trunk to the branch.
6.4.1- Automatic Calculation of the Grade Line and Superelevation for Junctions If the data introduced in defining the junction is correct the application allows us to make the necessary modifications in grade line and superlevation for the junction and the platforms to be perfect. It is evident that the trunk must have its *.vol file defined and the current (or branch) axis also has its *.vol file defined with some data such as widths, sectioning etc. In those areas where junctions have been defined, the application replaces the current grade lines and superlevation rule by the grade lines and superlevation derived for those axes for which the corresponding parameters have been defined using the SurWid, GRADE LINES, SUPERLEVATION option.. In the [GRADE LINES] menu, we merely have to press the [Junct.] option.
Similarly, in the [SUPERELEVATION] menu we find the [Junction] option.
If we decide to accept the superlevation and the grade line proposed in the automatic junctions menu, we must bear in mind that the transitions may not be suitable. We recommend a review of the transitions, as they may possibly not meet regulation standards, and arrangements may appear as either too large or too small and superlevation transitions in fewer metres than those stipulated in the regulations.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 25 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
6.4.2- Review and Acceptance of a Semiautomatic Junction In the precise moment that the [Junction] keys are pressed on the grade line or superlevation sub-menus, the application possesses the necessary data to calculate the junction as stipulated in most regulatory frameworks (see junctions with ISTRAM). To complete and store the information for this, ISTRAM provides the “junction” screen that is accessible from the [COMPLETE] menu. Here we can view the basic data for a junction between a trunk and branch. We shall now proceed with a description of all the parameters and the way of reviewing, modifying and accepting the data. Apart from its widths diagrams and the trunk platform, the method is based on the generation of an intelligent boundary in the junction areas based on its characteristic points.
A.- Birthplace of the branch B.- Intersection of the borders of the main roadways (white bands) C.- Point at given distances from the white bands inside the shoulders. D.- Intersection of outer borders of shoulders E.- Nose or tip of the junction This boundary is calculated automatically and is capable of transmitting the trunk superlevation and elevation to the branch. Using the condition that the trunk is a regulated zone in the sense of its transverse breaks, and the branch is one of these, a boundary line is used that receives the elevation, longitudinal gradient and transverse gradient from the grade line gradient and superlevation of the trunk. This data is analysed from the transverse breaks on the branch to obtain the elevation, grade line and superlevation of the branch over its
PAGE: 26 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
own axis. The calculation is made at a series of discrete points following a sequence of kilometre points approximately equal distances apart. Although we have already explained the meaning of the junction menu command keys, it is convenient to revise their use. Trunk Axis: [ ] Branch Axis: [ ] The axes are given by clicking on their drawing or using the keyboard, according to the selection mode. Calculation: We will define up to where the branch is replaced by overwidths in the trunk and the areas where the branch grade line and/or superlevation are derived. There are several options: Overwidths Grade line Superelevation They derive E C C C A A A A A
E E E C E E C E A
E : Grade Line+Superelevation up to E E : Grade Line+Superelevation up to E C : Grade Line+Superelevation up to C. Grade line up to E E : Grade Line+Superelevation up to C. superlevation up to E E : Grade Line+Superelevation up to E C : Grade Line+Superelevation up to C. Grade line up to E E : Grade Line+Superelevation up to C. superlevation up to E A : Grade Line up to E E : Superelevation up to E
Type: [EXIT / ENTRANCE] The path of the branch with respect to the trunk. In the case of ENTRANCE junctions, we are able to calculate grade lines, superlevation and crossing points without taking point C, D and E into consideration. Equidistances: [n] Equidistance between the points of analysis (5m). KP A: [n] [?] On clicking the “[?]” the calculator looks for the start-up point if it is an exit, or the end of the branch if it is an entrance. We can insert the number we want by pressing the number key. The system will give the initial/end KP that is defined on the branch axis on ground plan. From this point the branch should break way from the trunk. If an inadequate definition of the axis on ground plan brings the axes together, the system will not be able to find the appropriate progress direction for the junction. In this case it is advisable to assist the search, typing a value into KPA that moves it in the right direction. [EXTRACT START WIDTHS] If we press this key, an analysis is made of the widths of the outer border of the main and auxiliary roadway of the trunk and of the branch along the side that they touch one another. Overwidths C and E must be given according to our design intention: A value of 0.5 metres is frequently used for both; a point at which the edges of the roadway are 1 metre apart (C), and the edges of the shoulder are also 1 m (E) (nose or tip). [ABCDE] [Boundary] [Æ BDL] CALCULATIONS [ABCDE] If we press this button an analysis is made of the previous widths and overwidths and the position is calculated in terms of KP and distance to the axis for each of the points, ABCDE, and the table is completed. The graphic display shows points ABCDE. Check that they are in the correct position or modify KPA, overwidths and repeat ABCDE. Also, on pressing this option the gradient at point B and the lengths for the speed change lane are recalculated. The “Boundary” key calculates a data polygon as per the previously introduced equidistance. On redrawing a line joining the points A to E will appear superimposed on the drawing . The following files are also generated: - IS#2s1.ras with the grade line derived for axis 2 as an exit from axis 1. - IS#2s1.prl with the superlevation derived for axis 2 as an exit from axis 1. - IS#2s1.pas with the crossing points derived for axis 2 as an exit from axis 1.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 27 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
If, instead of being entrances they are exits, the “s” becomes an “e” and the axis numbers adapt to the case. When we are satisfied with the boundary, the “Æ BDL” command copies the theoretical boundary in a “boundary line”, which is drawn on screen, added to those already there. This receives attributes of the line and axis type it affects, and it can be saved with the set of boundary lines we have under edition. Observe how all the lines that are under edition on this screen, whose type is the same, will be identified as boundary lines. [List] If we press this option, a list will be generated, for example ent2s1.res (Junction of axis 2 departing from axis 1) that contains the co-ordinates of points A, B, C, D and E of the junction and points 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the speed change lane, as well as the KP’s and the distances to the trunk and to the branch.
Istram 8.13 04/03/05 12:33:55
1173
page
1
PROJECT : ****************************************************************** * * * POINTS FROM THE JUNCTION AND SPEED CHANGE LANE * * * ****************************************************************** TRUNK : AXIS BRANCH : AXIS
1 2
: TRUNK q212 : Branch q212
TRUNK ------------- ------------ ------------ ------ TRUNK ------- ------ BRANCH -------POINT X Y KP Dist.Axis KP Dist.Axis ----- ------------ ------------ ------------ -------- ------------ -------A 719522.599 4756608.357 309.427 3.500 0.000 -3.507 B 719532.566 4756610.150 319.555 3.500 9.755 -4.000 C 719540.023 4756610.984 327.041 4.000 16.938 -4.500 D 719552.374 4756611.174 339.232 6.000 28.978 -5.000 E 719560.303 4756611.584 347.106 7.000 36.645 -6.000 SPEED CHANGE LANE --------------------------------- ------------ ------------ ------ TRUNK ------- ------ BRANCH -------POINT X Y KP Dist.Axis KP Dist.Axis ----- ------------ ------------ ------------ -------- ------------ -------0 719315.882 4756512.521 68.183 3.500 1 719387.198 4756575.213 168.183 7.007 2 719523.218 4756604.905 309.426 7.007 -0.000 -0.000 3 719559.742 4756605.611 345.497 12.780 36.645 -0.000 4 719560.303 4756611.584 347.106 7.000 36.645 -6.000 5 719559.692 4756615.031 347.116 3.500 35.756 -9.376
[Save] [Load] [Start] The “Save” “Load” keys can be used to generate or load an *.ent file with the current definition of the junction parameters. It is advisable to save before making any subsequent modification. “Start” clears the table to start from blank with a new problem. Headroom Calculation and Viewing on the Junction Menu Before using the headroom control command from the Junction menu, the platforms of the axes we are going to consider must be fully defined and the *.vol elevation definition files generated that allow us to calculate the platforms for both. The names of the *.vol files must also be stated in the table of the PROJECT we are dealing with. • We enter the Complete menu, generating axes and viewing the elevation widths to visually monitor the platforms. • We state the axes we want to analyse in the JUNCTION table as trunk and branch. If we press on the Headrooms button, a message appears on the lower screen bar, requesting the point to analyse. By clicking on successive points the differences in elevations between the platforms are labelled on screen. Enabling the connection to intersection will allow us to easily indicate the intersection of the white lines or the borders of the shoulder on both axes. These points are generally critical in these analyses.
PAGE: 28 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Headroom Calculation and Viewing from the COMPLETE Menu
From this window we can undertake an analysis of headrooms. On selecting two axes, their intersection is calculated, and drawings are made of the borders of the roadway and the shoulders for the area surrounding the intersection point (+/-Margin). If the axes have more than one intersection, we can swap with the order “Other Crossing”. The order “Label” analyses the intersections of the “Shoulder Borders” or of the “Roadway Borders”. It is also possible to “Add Points” manually. The resulting headroom can be requested in “Absolute Value” and it is also possible to “Discount” a set amount. The “Minimum Headroom” option seeks out the point where the headroom value is lowest. The results are graphically drawn on screen, adding them to a data grid and incorporating them into a “headrooms.res” list. We can configure the parameters to be shown in the data grid and lists: X, Y, KP, Distance, elevation, Azimuth, Gradient, and Superelevation for each axis.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 29 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
6.4.3- Application of the Regulations Governing Road Specifications This is configured in the lower part of the menu with a series of new options. •
•
•
•
Length of the Transition Wedge. The length of the transition wedge is the difference in KP to go from the nominal width of the roadway to the total width including the speed change lane. The length of the acceleration lane is given in the Instruction as from where the wedge has developed 1 metre up to point (C) in which the white bands have separated 1 metre. We give the measurement from the full development of the wedge up to C. Length (from width = 1.5 up to C). Length of the lane from the point where the wedge width reaches 1.5 metres up to point C of the junction. Length (from point 1 up to C). Lane length from point 1 (end of the wedge up to point C) If the length of the acceleration lane from point 1 to point C is less than the distance between points A and C, it is extended to point A. Lane Width. This is used to calculate the relationship between the previous lengths.
REGULATION STANDARD. A new menu unfolds to calculate the previous lengths according to the Spanish Horizontal Alignment Regulation Standard.
• % Gradient. This is automatically extracted from point C by default when ABCDE are calculated. • pS (Project Speed or Maximum signalled). Project speed or maximum allowed. • Round off This allows us to round up the values calculated to the desired accuracy.
DECELERATION (Exit). Exit branches. o o o o o
Ods. Initial speed equal to pS. Eds. Final speed at point C. Minimum Length. The minimum length of the lane. Wedge Length. Calculated automatically according to the Horizontal Alignment Standard. Lane Length. Calculated automatically according to the Horizontal Alignment Standard.
PAGE: 30 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
ACCELERATION (Entrance). Entry branches. o Oas. Speed at point C. o Eas. Final speed equal to pS. o Minimum Length. The minimum length of the lane. o Wedge Length. Calculated automatically according to the Horizontal Alignment Standard. o Lane Length. Calculated automatically according to the Horizontal Alignment Standard. Accept. This copies the data according to the type of branch onto the junction menu where the user can modify it. The CALCULATION of the trunk OVERWIDTHS determines the position of the 5 points: 1 2 3 4 5
At the birthplace of the speed change lane At the point where the constant width of this lane ends At the point at which the branch axis takes over to continue the platform, i.e. the point where the main roadway reaches its maximum width. At the nose, on boundary point E (on the same transverse break of the branch as point 3: but on the bisector of the shoulders) Slightly displaced from point 4, to return sharply to the nominal width of the main roadway of the trunk.
Furthermore, between points 2 and 3, in the branch take-off area, intermediate points are interpolated according to equidistance given previously, to produce a gentle transition in branch widths. In summary, the polygon formed by 1, 2 points interpolated, points 3, 4 and back to the nominal width 5, defines the variable widths diagram that the main roadway of the trunk would have to have, to incorporate the trunk shield, the branch starting from the profile that passes through points 3 and 4 which has fully separated. This is configured in the lower part of the menu with a series of new options that allow the user to define: •
• •
•
Length of the Transition Wedge. The length of the transition wedge is the difference in KP to go from the nominal to the total width of the roadway width including the speed change lane. The length of the acceleration lane is given in the Instruction from where the wedge has developed 1 metre up to point (C) in which the white bands have separated 1 metre. We give the measurement from the full development of the wedge up to C. Length (from width = 1.5 up to C). Length of the lane from the point where the wedge width reaches 1.5 metres up to point C of the junction. Length (from point 1 up to C). Lane length from point 1 (end of the wedge up to point C) If the length of the acceleration lane from point 1 to point C is less than the distance between points A and C, it is extended to point A. Lane Width. This is used to calculate the relationship between the previous lengths.
If we request “FILE UPDATE”, the *.vol files declared for both axes in the project table are updated. The axis acting as trunk incorporates the modified Widths Diagram, and the branch includes the start KP in its calculation window.
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
PAGE: 31 / 32
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The data that has been calculated may be deleted from the widths table using function [B] from the widths table. Function [B] asks for the branch for which we want to delete the overwidths before executing.
Once the junction has been calculated, transverse profiles are generated at the singular points that have been obtained using the [interpolate T] option, thus automatically enabling the interpolation of widths, superlevation, boundary lines and calculation zones. CONVERSION UP TO POINT ( ) E , A, or C. It is possible that the calculation of overwidths and file updating be done only between points 0, 1 and 2, i.e. the transition from 0 to the width of the acceleration lane (from point 0 to 1) and the acceleration lane before point A (from point 1 to 2). The branch is then considered to start at point A and the boundary line must be applied from this point.
PAGE: 32 / 32
6 - COMPLEX CALCULATIONS, CROSSINGS AND JUNCTIONS
LINEAR WORKS GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
7
The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of Buhodra Ingeniería S.A. and protected by Spanish and international copyright laws. The reproduction or alteration of texts or graphs is expressly forbidden. It can only be printed for personal or corporate use and may not be copies for formative activities which are not authorised in writing. This formative-informative material may be changed without prior warning. Although this documentation is under constant review, it is not guaranteed that, when the program is used, there will be exact consistency between the data entry boxes, file formats and other specifications displayed on the screen and those contained in this document. The user is liable for all consequences derived from the use of this material and, by extension, its associated programs.
LINEAR WORKS 1
01 Introduction and general aspects
2
02 Design of ground axis, setting out of the primary grid and drawing
3
03 Elevation, land profiles and gradients
4
04 Elevation, platform and cross section
5
05 Elevation, advanced project calculation
6
06 Complex calculations, crossroads and junctions
7
07 08 09 10 11 12
Ground plan and profiles Project printouts and reports Improvement and expansion projects Railway design Sanitation and distribution, pipelines Project monitoring and control
http://www.istram.net
© Buhodra Ingeniería S.A.
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
INDEX
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES 7.1-
GENERATION OF PLANS, INTRODUCTION ............................................................................ 3 7.1.17.1.2-
7.2-
GROUND PLAN ................................................................................................................. 10 7.2.17.2.27.2.3-
7.3-
Page distribution for ground plan ........................................................................... 12 Ground plan drawing modes ................................................................................... 12 Description of the .lil drawing mode files ............................................................... 14
DRAWING LONGITUDINAL PROFILES................................................................................... 28 7.3.17.3.27.3.37.3.47.3.57.3.67.3.77.3.87.3.97.3.10-
7.4-
Flow diagram of printing processes ....................................................................... 4 Influence of scale...................................................................................................... 9
Text tables ................................................................................................................. 30 Point tables ............................................................................................................... 31 Interactive editing of grid data for longitudinal profiles........................................ 31 Grid data for longitudinal profiles, fix norm ........................................................... 33 Data associated to the ground, transverse profiles and design information ...... 34 Data associated to the definition of vertical alignments ....................................... 35 Diagrams of superelevations and widths ............................................................... 36 Point tables ............................................................................................................... 37 Route apparatus ....................................................................................................... 37 Examples of longitudinal profiles and associated grid data................................. 37
DRAWING TRANSVERSE PROFILES..................................................................................... 39 7.4.17.4.27.4.37.4.4-
Interactive generation of transverse profile grid data ........................................... 40 Drawing options for profile surfaces ...................................................................... 41 Other options ............................................................................................................ 42 Examples of some grid data for transverse profiles ............................................. 43
INDEX
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 1 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
INDEX
INDEX
PAGE: 2 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
7.1-
Generation of plans, introduction
After completing the project design, we have to produce all the graphic documentation certifying the parameters under which it has been developed. With ISTRAM®, we can prepare all the plans contained in usual project annexes, such as: -
Primary grid ground plan (see chapter entitled Design of ground axis, setting out of the primary grid and drawing) General ground plan Longitudinal profile Transverse profiles Other plans (details, typical sections, etc.) Graphic data output
ISTRAM® generates graphic information or drawings which are located in the same working area used in the cartographic edition. Often none of the plans fit on a single sheet on the represented scale. We then perform paging, distributing the sheets subsequently used to send plans either to physical printers or ‘virtual’ devices such as PDF files or other digital formats.
The user can alter the graphic information generates, moving one or more of the subpages prepared for the ground plan, etc. The paging editor is the tool enabling us to manage sheet distribution and the content of the variable titles defined in the format.
Users often personalise the appearance and presentation of the project’s transverse and longitudinal profiles and ground plan. The configuration of different drawing styles or aspects is stores in text files containing encoded drawing orders which will be read and run by the program when the drawing is generated on the working area. For the ground plan, these are *.lil files and for profiles they are *.gui and *.gut files. ® To make personalisation easier, ISTRAM provides the user with a powerful interactive profile editor enabling us to easily design templates while seeing the results on the screen.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 3 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
7.1.1- Flow diagram of printing processes
PREPARATION OF GROUND PLAN BASE MAP
GROUNDPLAN
• Edited project cartography
• Selection of *.lil style • Generation of drawing • Axis labelling
Cartography alone
Ground plan on cartography
LONGITUDINAL PROFILES
• Selection of *.gui style • Generation of drawing and paging
Ground plan and longitudinal
TRANSVERSAL PROFILES*
• Selection of *.gut style • Generation of drawing and paging
Longitudinal
Transverse
MOST COMMON TYPES OF PLAN
PAGE: 4 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
PRINTING
• • •
SELECTION OF PRINT MODE Print language (hp-gl/2, pdf, dxf) Format (plan scaling and size) Reduction (A1Æ A3, A4)
• •
PAGING Paging file loaded Change (move, turn, etc)
•
PROCESSING Generation of automatic paging in preselected language or sheets exported to virtual printers (edm, dxf language, etc.)
Select a format The first step is to select a format. In Istram, a format (see ‘plan printing and publication') in its most basic expresión is a file containing a paper size and print size in its definition. It can also contain lines, symbols and texts forming a scaled drawing and box. The alter can be variable, such as page No., plan title, etc., and they are controlled by the paging editor. You can easily and rapidly complete the fields for each title, text or symbol you wish to see in teh box. Formats are stored as symbols and identified by the system as S100#, S101#, S102#, S103#, S104#, etc., representing the different formats: A0, A1 and so on. The button [format] is always found in the vertical menú and ithe format selection remains valid until the end of the session.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 5 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Selection of drawing style or mode In the case of ground plans and transverse and longitudinal profiles, modes enable us to configure the type of information to be generated and its future appearance. For example, for the ground plan, we can tell the program to draw the edge of the road with a type 31 line or to draw the position of a symbol inserted in the project’s profiles. In the case of profiles (transverse or longitudinal) we can also defined the number of profiles per sheet for transverse profiles or the width of the longitudinal profile on each sheet. Other options enable us to select an origin and type of information: gradient, subgradient, etc., and, in particular: the cotation, the ordinate, the value of the gradient or slope, etc., and, finally, we configure the type of line, symbol or text used. Drawing styles or modes (.LIL files) are stored in ascii files which can be edited and personalised by the user. The drawing mode is selected when we press the button [drawing mode] and select a file. It is also associated to each axis in the project table. For transverse and longitudinal profiles (GUT and GUI files) they are edited with the help of a dialogue box enabling us to easily ‘navigate’ through the different sections. Try this out with the files provided in the basic library and try to personalise your own style.
Generation of ground plans In the case of ground plans, this action can be performed individually by pressing the [ground plan] button on the elevation menú. To draw the ground plan of all active axes, it is best to use the dialogue box provided by the [project] menú, where we can associate a specifid drawing mode to each axis (although they generally all use the same one) and draw all the project’s axes with a single order. The generated drawing i son ‘real’ scale and with exact coordinates. Istram ‘draws’ the information using polylines 3D, text and symbols, as if it was a ‘wireless’ model (of different types depending on the mode employed), ready to be explored and enabling us to verify that some operations have been performed correctly.
If we wish to generate sheet-plans, we have to control paging. This can be done manually (with the user adding the sheets and placing them in the desired place) or automatically, using the automatic paging option. In eiher case, the result is a page file (with a .pag extension) ready to be loaded by the print manager.
PAGE: 6 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Generation of profile plans The data pertaining to an axis are stored in two different ways. On the one hand, we have files with a .vol extensión which, as we know, store all definition data. Transverse profiles are the constructive geometrical expresión of this data. The generation of longitudinal profile drawings uses analytical definition data and, for transverse profiles, files with a .per extensión which previusly have to be calculated. Any type of file will not initially do, as the drawing modes use the stored types of line and different surface codes. We first select the axis or file to be drawn. A dialogue box then enables us to specify the pks interval to be processed, the horizontal/vertical scales and the file where the paging data is to be stored. Istram ‘draws’ the information on the screen and it is automatically distributed from the upper left-hand corner of the current drawing. AT the end of the process, the user ‘sees’ a series of ‘sheets’ on the screen. We now see how to comunícate with the printing devices.
The information drawn on the screen could be edited and manipulated by the user and subsequently stored in an .edm file. The pages cannot be moved here. The spatial location of the sheets is stored in a *.gui paging file which can then be loaded and altered in the print menu.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 7 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Printing and exporting plans The print control system is accesible from the [Print] button in the [Menus] dropdown list. On the PRINT MODE tab, you can select one of the defined printers. The printers defined in Istram are associated to a paper format which evidently has to be the one used for paging.
We have now generated drawings and a paging file. We open the print manager, select the desired printer and then load the paging file. This file contains the coordinates of each of the pages generated and the variable texts container in the format used. We now just correctly complete the fields.
Printing advice Define the printers according to the sizes and formats to be used and the models available in your organisation. The printer configuration file and drawing formats and modes can be stored in the user’s library used by yourself and other Istram users. Istram can generate series of fully completed plans auomatically, without exporting them to dxf or dgn (to be edited with the associated programs). Therefore, take your time preparing the best formats and drawing modes for each type of product, tailored to your company’s needs. Most of this process can be automated.
PAGE: 8 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
7.1.2- Influence of scale The system defined in Istram to generate different plans is calibrated based on the fact that the printed output will be created in a ‘standard’ manner, using ‘basic’ scales according to the type of plan. For ground plans it assumes 1:1000, for longitudinal profiles 1:1000 and 1:200 (horizontal and vertical) and 1:200 for transverse profiles. These scales are those regularly used by civil engineering program users. The profiles, formats, drawing modes and, in particular, the symbols, texts, distribution, etc., provided by Istram in the main library are adapted to the aforementioned scales. If you wish to generate plans using other scales, you will probably have to change some of the elements to adapt their size and appearance. The ‘work scale’ The work scale on the main graphic window is usually 1:1000. As we explained (chapter 1 of digital cartography), this scale is a value used by the program to generate the graphic output, as you really work with a scale of 1:1. This value was used to design most Istram products, so a 2-metre symbol will have a size of 2 mm on the plans. When information with a different scale is generated, evidently the size will not be the same. There are two ways of solving the size problem: • •
Give an suitable value to the Sfac, Rfac and Cfac scale values, Change the items (symbols, labels, etc.) used and/or create new ones. One suggestion is to 'duplicate' them and store them in a user library such as lib1_50 (library for plans on a scale of 1:50) How the general scale is related to the scale chosen when plans are generated
We have generated some transverse profile plans on a scale of 1:200 (H and V). As the primary scale is 1:1000, it will all have to be multiplied by 5 (1000/200); it’s as easy as that. When you measure something on the drawing you will therefore find that it measures more than you would expect. As you know, some Istram items can use scale factors on x - y, make use of the scale factor (1000/200 = 5, in this example) and block the application of the Sfac and Rfac factors. It is evident that the incorrect use of the combination of these functions will create faults so we recommend responsible management of the item library (remember that if you change the basic or user library and then change project, the results will be incorrect. Make specific changes in the project library) How scale is applied when printing In Istram, unlike other programs, plans are generated from the very beginning, when you decide on the scale and before generating information or sheets and not later, when you print. As soon as you choose a print format, Istram saves the information about paper size and the area to be drawn in the paging files, ensuring that the print scale is as selected when the plans were created.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 9 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
7.2-
ISPOL 9
Ground plan
In general, final ground plans are not created in this menu, but proceeding as follows: •
Geometric definition of the axes in the "HORIZONTAL DESIGN" menu.
•
Labelling of KP, marks, curvatures and agreements from the "SETTING OUT THE PRIMARY GRID AND PROFILES" menu. [LABELLING]
•
Definition of elevation and platform and typical sections in the "SECTION" menu. [CALCULATION]
•
Automatic generation of characteristic lines of the platform, land clearance sections and slopes and the borders of reached areas, from the "SECTION" menu, selecting a *.lil drawing mode and ordering the ground plan to be drawn.
•
The representation of a new surface can be completed in many ways, such as: o
Generating the classic slope profile, automatically from "SECTION", or manually from "TOOLS".
o
Generating the isolines induced by the new surface from the "TOPOGRAPHY" menu.
o
Composition of Ground-Longitudinal plans.
o
* The finishing touches (paging, plans, box labelling, etc.) are performed with basic Map Editor utilities.
o
* etc.
The representation obtained is 3D and therefore can be seen in different views and used as a digital model of the new surface to obtain sections for drainage work, the transverse profiles of other axes, etc. [Ground plan] Extract the singular points of the model from the ISPOLn.per file of transverse profiles ending on an axis: borders of main and auxiliary roads, central reserve, ditch, berms, land clearing head, slope feet, etc., and load these lines describing the linear infrastructure in a longitudinal direction onto the cartography in their true three dimensional position. It can also generate polylines of the transverse profiles (which are straight lines on the ground plan, but show all their relief in perspective) and the slope stripes with alternating long and short segments (they are also drawn in height) or with runoff symbols such as the spring used in Ireland. The control orders defining the lines to be drawn and preconfigured in files in the *.lil library.
PAGE: 10 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[Drawing Mode] activates the selection of one of the library’s *.lil files. It is copied to the ISPOL.lil and will remain active until a new selection option changes it. The .lil file defines which of the lines are generates and with which type from the library, using the codes representing each point on the transverse profile to group them by code in lines of the same type. On an individual level, the selection of the drawing mode and the order generating the graphic information is found in the elevation menu. On a project level, as we know, we can complete the data in the project table associating different drawing modes to each axis. The calculate button performs the tasks specified with the [CAL][MEJ][ENL][REC][RFI] buttons, which have to be disabled if we only wish to obtain the respective drawings. The illustration on the left shows how there can be two axes drawn using different .lil files.
When transverse profiles are edited manually, take care not to "destroy" important codes, as the program could be prevented from automatically linking the points by lines. A file called Leelinel.txt details the codes of each point of the transverse profile, as they are automatically generated by ISTRAM®.
[Ground plan] This option asks for the number of the axis and the first and last profiles of the stretch we wish to draw. It immediately generates longitudinal and transverse lines and land clearance and slope combs. [Delet] eliminates the graphic elements generated with the last option, “Ground plan”.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 11 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
7.2.1- Page distribution for ground plan With the [Ground plan] command, we obtain the graphic representation of the axis or complete project we are designing. If, however, we wish to obtain the plans, we have to use a file containing the coordinates of a page distribution with the chosen format. The page distribution for the ground plans of the project is generated from the [GROUND PLAN DRAWING] submenu located in the GROUND PLAN side menu.
The application requests the axis number and a sheet length to automatically generate page distribution which, as we know, is stored in a .pag file.
Remember the relation between the format used, the scale and the sheet length provided. Classic paging used A1 formats on a scale of 1:1000 in stretches of 700 m of axis. The page file can be loaded at any time to process the information displayed on the screen and prepare plans to be physically printed on a printer or plotter. We can also create ‘digital’ plans in pdf, dxf or dgn format.
7.2.2- Ground plan drawing modes The ground plan drawing modes reflect the type of representation with 3D lines chosen for the different elements. In the modes predefined in our library, the names of the *.lil files use a combination of letters which helps to identify the elements drawn if this mode is selected: L
Longitudinal lines along the axis (the axis itself, road borders, verge borders, etc.)
B
Borders of scope (slope feet and land clearance heads)
P
Piano lines of slopes
E
Margins of Expropriation (by default, 5 metres)
T
Transverse land profiles, where applicable
C
Closed areas to represent land clearance and slopes by colour
M
Walls
PAGE: 12 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
For example, LBT.lil mode orders the drawing of the longitudinal lines of the platform, the borders of scope and the transverse profiles. The specific colours and modes are described in command lines in the file. Following are some graphic examples of the result obtained by applying different .lil files provided by ® ISTRAM by default in its \ispol\lib directory. For slope piano lines we have several ‘surnames’ for code P. P11 orders the program to draw the lines from the border of the verge and P5 does the same but from the border of the berm (code 50).
Lp5.lil l slope piano lines from border of berm
Lp11.lil, slope piano lines from shoulder.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
Mode Lp5m.lil, which draws walls on ground plan.
Drawing mode LBT.lil, 3D view of results.
PAGE: 13 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
7.2.3- Description of the .lil drawing mode files These ASCII files can be edited using, for instance, Windows ‘notebook’. By default, these files use the lines in the basic or primary library. If it has been altered, the results or appearance of the drawings may not be as you wish. On the other hand, we recommend that users enrich the library with types of lines which could enhance the quality of their work. Users can edit and view the different modes provided in the basic ispol library and change (recommending the use of a specific user directory or libuser) the commands to their own taste. It is quite easy to read or interpret drawing commands. Remember that new or modified *.lil files should be stored in the \ispol\libuser user directory or the .\lib project directory. Some commands use existing platform and sub grade line codes, as shown in the following figure:
Following is a description and explanation of a simple drawing mode: # DEFINITION OF L LINE LABELLING ACCORDING TO CODES # # type of L up to code elements # # --- --------- --------------------------------------------- # T 25 -100. central reserve bottom # T 3 -50. central reserve berm and auxiliaries T 5 1. continuous white band # T 60 2. another continuous white band # T 3 11. external shoulders # T 25 50. external berms # T 611 100. Pavement-sub grade line cut # T 82 1000. slope # T 39 1200. ditch # T 43 2000. land clearance # T 69 3000. insufficient land clearance #
#
The bottom of the central reserve will be drawn with the L25 line type, together with all the possible lines between it and the border of the berm, using the L3 line type, etc. To inhibit the representation of any of these lines, just allocate a –1 line type to the respective code. ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF OCCUPATION AND EXPROPRIATION LINE LABELLING # # type of L elements # # --- --------- ---------------- -----------------------------# B 65 areas reached # E 3 expropsiation area #
The types of line used to represent both borders of scope (L65) and the limits of the expropriation area (L3) are defined here. Ground plan drawn with drawing mode BE.lil
PAGE: 14 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
The lines representing transverse profiles are drawn with type L61. ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF TRANSVERSAL LINE LABELLING # # type of L elements # # --- --------- ---------------- -----------------------------# R 61 transverse lines #
Ground plan drawn with drawing mode LT.lil
###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF PIANO LINE LABELLING # # type of L dis(mm) anular 1 length every n # # --- --------- -------- ------- -----------------------------# P 0 5. 1. 2 #
According to this mode, for slope piano lines we draw with an L0 polyline with the lines 5 mm apart (5 metres on the site, assuming a scale of 1:1000). If the resulting line measures less than 1 mm. it is not included in the representation, as it would not be visible. We also draw one of each couple of lines longer.
Ground plan drawn with peine .lil drawing mode
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 15 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The file ends with the word END in upper case letters, invalidating all subsequent commands. ###################################################################### END # ###################################################################### When we wish to test the functionality of some of the elements of the drawing mode, one way to prevent others from being represented is for the # symbol to precede the respective line, so that if we later believe that it is best to re-enable the command, we just activate the line by removing the ‘#’ symbol. Also, remember that several orders of the same type cannot be used at the same time. The last order will be the one used. In the following case, for example, only C5 will be taken into account: ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING CREATION OF ENCLOSED AREAS # # type of L Clear type of L Land # # --- --------------- -------------# C11 72 71 (from verge border c==11) # C 72 71 (from sub grade line) # C5 72 71 (from Berm cod==50) # It would be correct, however, to place a # character at the beginning of lines C11 and C We now describe all the possibilities of this program, by area, also defining specific modes for railway and pipeline projects. Line drawing of any surface and code
These files admit the possibility of drawing a line joining the points of the transverse profile of a given surface with a specific code. The tubería2.lil file uses this new command: ###################################################################### # LINES EXTRACTED FROM ANY SURFACE BY THE CODE # # Type of L Surface Code elements # # --- --------- ---------- ------ -----------------------------# LS 40 68 2. bottom of ditch excavation # There are another two commands which enable us to draw the transverse or longitudinal lines of any surface without having to specify the codes. It is suitable for drawing tunnels. The BOVEDAS.lil file, which uses these concepts, is included in the library.
Ground plan drawn with the Bovedas.lil drawing mode
PAGE: 16 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
###################################################################### # bovedas.lil # ###################################################################### ###################################################################### # LONGITUDINAL LINES EXTRACTED FROM ANY SURFACE # # Type of L Surface elements # # --- --------- ---------- -----------------------------# LL 40 11 Support (without inverted vault) # LL 40 7 Support (with inverted vault) # LL 0 12 Facing (without inverted vault) # LL 0 8 Facing (with inverted vault) # #--------------------------------------------------------------------# # TRANSVERSAL LINES EXTRACTED FROM ANY SURFACE # # Type of L Surface elements # # --- --------- ---------- -----------------------------# LT 40 11 Support (without inverted vault) # LT 40 7 Support (with inverted vault) # LT 0 12 Facing (without inverted vault) # LT 0 8 Facing (with inverted vault) # ######################################################################
Perimeters or land clearance and slope areas LAND CLEARANCE and SLOPE perimeters can be represented instead of piano lines, using closed lines which can be filled in with solid colours, with patterns of SGL raster fills. The library includes lc.lil and recinto.lil files, which use this possibility. Following is part of the recinto.lil file: Using code C, the slopes start at code 100, which is t he drainage point of the sub grade line Code C5 starts at 50, which is the end of the berm, and, finally, code 11 starts from the verge border. # DEFINITION OF LABELLING CREATION OF CLOSED AREAS # # type of L Clea type of L Land # --- -------------- -------------C 72 71 # C5 72 71 (from Berm cod==50) # C11 72 71 (from verge border c==11)
# # # # #
Ground plan drawn with Recinto.lil drawing mode
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 17 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Closed areas The Areas.lil file includes commands enabling us to draw closed areas limited by reference codes taken from given surfaces: ###################################################################### # Areas.lil # ###################################################################### # Closed areas defined by two lines # # Syntax: # # A Tipo_lin Sup_1 Lad_1 Cod_1 Mod_1 Sup_2 Lad_2 Cod_2 Mod_2 # # Where: # # A : Command # # Tip_lin : Type of line to draw the area # # First border: # # Sup_1 : Surface from which it is taken (67,68,...) # # Lad_1 : Side from which it is taken (0->der 1->izq) # Cod_1 : Reference code (1.,2.,11.,, 600.,....) # # Mod_1 : Mode 0->Only if the exact code exists # # -1->First code equal or less # # 1->First code equal or more # # Second border: # # Sup_2 : Surface from which it is taken (67,68,...) # # Lad_2 : Side from which it is taken (0->der 1->izq) # Cod_2 : Reference code (1.,2.,11.,, 600.,....) # # Mod_2 : Mode 0->Only if the exact code exists # # -1->First code equal or less # # 1->First code equal or more # #--------------------------------------------------------------------# # ----FIRST BORDER----------FIRST BORDER------# # A Lin Sup_1 Lad_1 Cod_1 Mod_1 Sup_2 Lad_2 Cod_2 Mod_2 # # - --- ----- ----- ----- --------- ----- ----- ----# A 74 67 0 1. 0 67 0 2. 0 Bed D # A 74 67 1 1. 0 67 1 2. 0 Bed I # A 75 67 0 1. 0 67 0 -11. 0 Ditch Di # A 75 67 1 1. 0 67 1 -11. 0 Ditch Ii # A 75 67 0 2. -1 67 0 11. 0 Ditch D # A 75 67 1 2. -1 67 1 11. 0 Ditch I # A 71 67 0 50. -1 68 0 601. 0 Slope D # A 71 67 1 50. -1 68 1 601. 0 Slope I # A 72 68 0 1103. 0 68 0 1399. 0 Clear D # A 72 68 1 1103. 0 68 1 1399. 0 Clear I # ######################################################################
#
#
Ground plan drawn with the Areas.lil drawing mode
PAGE: 18 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Land clear slope piano lines There are different commands to represent the piano lines of slopes, as follows. The LP11M.lil drawing mode includes the P11 command. It draws the piano lines from the border of the verge so that the ditches are not included. It does not draw the lines of the berms at the sides of the roadbed or the cut with the sub grade line: ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING OF L LINES ACCORDING TO CODES # # type of L up to code elements # # --- --------- ---------------- -----------------------------# T 39 -51. bottom of central reserve # T -1 -12. central res. berms annulled -1 # T 81 -10. central res. auxiliary inner verge# T 31 10. principal roadbeds # T 81 15. external verges # T -1 110. external berms annulled # T 82 1000. slope # T 39 1200. ditch # T 43 2000. land clearance # T 69 3000. inadequate land clearance # ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR COMBS # # type of L dis(mm) anular 1 length every n # # --- --------- -------- ------- -----------------------------# P11 0 1. 1. 2 (Peinado desde b.arcen) # ######################################################################
The LP2.lil file contains the P2 command which draws the piano lines of the slopes starting from code 2 (border of road bed, white band). We also observe a PT code to represent the land clearance and slope piano lines with different types of line. ###################################################################### # LP2.lil (LineL, Piano from code 2) 18/10/2004 # ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR PIANO LINES # # type L clearance type L slope # # --- --------------- ---------------# PT 43 40 # ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR PIANO LINES # # type of L dis(mm) anular 1 length every n # # --- --------- -------- ------- -----------------------------# P2 0 1. 1. 2 (Piano from roadbed border) # ###################################################################### As an example, to draw the piano lines on slopes between specific code, the PeinaMur.lil file is included, with which only two areas of wall backfill can be drawn. P0: Defines the parameters of the piano lines but cancels them all except those defined by PCD or PCT. PCD cod_pie cod_cab: to define piano lines on cleared land between two specific codes. PCT cod_cab cod_pie: to define piano lines on a slope between two specific codes. ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR PIANO LINES # # --- --------- -------- ------- -----------------------------# P0 0 1. 1. 2 (Only piano lines by code) # # Piano lines by land clearance codes # PCD 1251. 1290. # # Piano lines by slope codes # PCT 601. 601.1 # ######################################################################
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 19 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
The PI command changes from suitable cleared land to unsuitable cleared land for drawing piano lines on slopes and longitudinal L lines. This command acts in sections in which the [LAND CLEARANCE]Æ[LAND/VAULT]Æ[T.I.Æ] option has been chosen when defining land clearance on inappropriate land. This command is included in the PEINE_b.lil file. ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR PIANO LINES # # GO OVER COMPETENT/UNSUITABLE POINT FOR PIANO AND L Lines # PI # # type of L dis(mm) anular 1 length every n # # --- --------- -------- ------- -----------------------------# P5 0 1. 1. 2 (from berm cod==50) # ######################################################################
Ground plan drawn with Peine.lil drawing mode
Ground plan drawn with Peine_b.lil drawing mode.
Command PA or CA automatically determines the head of the piano lines searching by codes 100, 50, 11, 2. It considers the first of them which is not disabled in the profile for drawing in the .lil file. In the PeinesA.lil file, code 100 (drainage of sub grade) line drawing has been disabled, so the piano lines start on the berm line (50), verge border (11) or roadbed border (2). ###################################################################### # PIANO LINES of land clearance and slope with different type of line # # piano lines from the berm # # Command PA and CA: automatically select the first code : # # 100, 50 , 11 , 2 which is in the profile and has been ordered to be drawn. (100 is not drawn in this file) # ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING OF L LINES ACCORDING TO CODES # # type of L up to code elements # # --- --------- ---------------- -----------------------------# T 39 -50. bottom of central res. # T 81 -10. berms and central res. auxiliaries # T 31 10. principal roadbeds # T 81 60. berms and external verges # T -1 110. Do not draw subgrade line # T 82 1000. slope # T 39 1200. ditch # T 43 2000. land clearance # ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR PIANO LINES # # type of L dis(mm) anular 1 length every n # # --- --------- -------- ------- -----------------------------# PA 0 1. 1. 2 (Automatic) # ######################################################################
PAGE: 20 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
There is a specific drawing mode for railways, the LPbalast.lil file. It includes a command to draw piano lines, PB, enabling them to be drawn on the ballast slope (code 11-12) and form layer (13-100 or 50100). ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR PIANO LINES # # type of L dis(mm) anular 1 length every n # # --- --------- -------- ------- -----------------------------# PB 0 5. 1. 2 # ######################################################################
Ground plan drawn with LPBalast.lil drawing mode.
To replace slope piano lines with scalable symbols, replace the “1length of each n” (-1) field (see Pmuelle.lil, which uses the S89 symbol).
LONGITUDINAL AND TRANSVERSAL WALL LINES For walls with Width and Depth, surface 150 of the ISPOLn.lil file, we include the lp5m.lil file, which contains these commands: ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR WALLS # # type of L # # --- --------# ML 150 Longitudinal lines # MT 0 Transverse lines # ###################################################################### This same lp5m.lil includes a definition for the longitudinal lines of the section which separate the types of lines of the berms on the platform and the borders of verges, which are mixed together in other .lil files. More types can be separated by entering the respective codes. ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING OF L LINES ACCORDING TO CODES # # type of L up to code elements # # --- --------- ---------------- -----------------------------# T 39 -51. bottom of central res. T 33 -12 central res. berms T 81 -10. central res. auxiliaries T 31 10. principal roadbeds # T 81 15. external verges # T 33 110. external berms # T 82 1000. slope # T 39 1200. ditch # T 43 2000. land clearance T 69 3000. unsuitable land clearance ######################################################################
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
# # #
# #
PAGE: 21 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Ditches and ditches at tops of slopes The ditch lines (bottom of ditch or any other line characteristic of the section) can be drawn by changing the type of line according to the gradient and its orientation, depending on the direction in which water falls. It also inserts one symbol on the high and another on the low points. ###################################################################### # cuneta.lil # ###################################################################### # It draws the line of the bottom of the ditch oriented according to the gradient # # and with a different type of line according to the gradient: # # # # SUP : Surface of profile (68: excavation) # # COD : Code of point to be extracted (600: bottom of ditch) # # TL1 : Type of lines for gradients between 0% and P1% # # TL2 : Type of lines for gradients between P1% and P2% # # TL2 : Type of lines for gradients of over P2% # # P1% and P2% : Cut gradients # # SPB : Symbol for low points # # SPA : Symbol for high points # ###################################################################### # SUP COD. TL1 P1% TL2 P2% TL3 SPB SPA # # -- --- ------ --- --- --- ----- --# LP 68 600. 635 1.0 633 4.0 634 71 5 # ######################################################################
Ground plan drawn with Cuneta.lil drawing mode
There are two commands to draw the longitudinal and transverse lines of ditches on the top of slopes when they are defined in a separate type of line. The library includes the LTG.lil file, which uses these new commands (GL and GT). ###################################################################### # DEFINITION OF LABELLING FOR SEPARATE DITCHES AT TOPS OF SLOPES # type of L # # --- --------# # GL 50 Longitudinal lines # # GT 50 Transverse lines # # types of L # # --- ---------# GL2 50 168 Longitudinal lines (Terr,clear) # GT2 50 168 Transverse lines (Terr,clear) # ######################################################################
PAGE: 22 / 44
#
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Areas to delimit countersink and demolition in expansion and improvement projects There is a command enabling us to use different types of line to represent countersink or demolished areas or uses parts of an existing roadbed. The library includes two files, D.lil and D2.lil which contain this command. In D2.lil, the command is used for motorways with independent reinforcement on both roadbeds. ###################################################################### # D.lil Cutting and demolition # # D : Single existing roadbed # # D2: Double existing roadbed (one on each semi-profile) # ###################################################################### # TYPES OF LINE # # Exist RB Cutting Demo # # --- --------- -------- ------- ------- ------- -------------# D2 75 37 43 0 0 0 ######################################################################
Ground plan drawn with D.lil drawing mode.
Bevel cones The library includes the derrames.lil file with a command which draws bevel cones on the stirrups of structures. It also pains bevel cones on non-perpendicular stirrup structures, in a sequence: SLOPESEMISTRUCTURE-STRUCTURE-SEMISTRUCTURE-SLOPE, etc... ###################################################################### # DEFINITION FOR BEVEL CONES # # Admits N,N5 and N11 as piano lines. # # Slopclea SlopeTer AngMaxCono DisMaxFront TypeBorde TypePiano # # --- -------- -------- ---------- ------------ --------- --------- # N5 0.20 1.00 2.00 0.50 82 0 # ######################################################################
Ground plan drawn with Derrames.lil drawing mode
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 23 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
DRAWING 3D LINES FROM A SYMBOL Ground plan drawing mode carriles.lil contains commands enabling us to extract a symbol (lanes) from the profile and use them to construct a 3D line along the axis. If the desired profile does not appear in a profile, the program interrupts the line. ###################################################################### # LINES EXTRACTED FROM ANY PROFILE SYMBOL # # Type of L Symbol Side elements # # --- --------- -------- --------------------------------# S 170 301 0 Right-hand lanes right side # S 170 301 1 Right-hand lanes left side # S 170 302 0 Left-hand lanes right side # S 170 302 1 Left-hand lanes left side # ###################################################################### The CentroTun.lil drawing mode uses the previous command, which enables us to represent the centre of tunnels as a 3D line. It is applicable to both roads and railways. Information can be extracted from this line and projected on the axis, generating a top, etc... ###################################################################### # CentroTun.lil # ###################################################################### # LINES EXTRACTED FROM ANY PROFILE SYMBOL # # Type of L Symbol Side elements # # --- --------- -------- --------------------------------# S 170 313 0 Centre tunnels right side # S 170 313 1 Centre tunnels left side # ######################################################################
CRITICAL POINTS The "SS" command enables us to extract the position of an associated symbol from inside another and generate a 3D line and .pmt file for subsequent use in the study of clearance gauges. When several "SS" commands are added, we create the possibility of adding the points to the same .pmt file (pmt=2) where each point is numbered with its type of symbol. If the desired symbol does not appear in a profile, the program interrupts the line. ###################################################################### # Pcritico.lil # ###################################################################### # LINES EXTRACTED FROM A SYMBOL INSIDE ANOTHER PROFILE SYMBOL # # Lin Sym Princ_sym side pmt name # # --- --- --- --------- ---- ----------- -------------------------- # SS 170 82 301 0 1 82_301_0 # 1-> create 82_301_0e1.pmt # SS 160 80 301 0 2 82_301_0 # 2-> add 82_301_0e1.pmt # SS 163 74 301 0 2 82_301_0 # 2-> add 82_301_0e1.pmt # #--------------------------------------------------------------------# # Extracts the position of symbol S82 from symbol S301 on the right-hand side # # and creates Line L170. # # Also creates file 301_0e1.pmt (e1->eje 1) # ######################################################################
PAGE: 24 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
DRAWING WELLS AND PIPES For pipeline projects, the system provides a series of specific commands, such as: ZN. Names of WELLS on ground plans ZP. 3D drawing of the mouth and bottom of the well ZT. 3D drawing of the pipes ZD. Description of the well ZM. Pipe material and diameter ZS. Description of the pipe There is an example of these commands in lib\tuberias.lil. The ZC command enables us to label the real angle of elbows due to angular points both on the ground plan and on the elevation in sexagesimal degrees. The angle is calculated in 3D. ###################################################################### # Z-O : enables control of orientation (third character) # # O= 0 : Absolute angle. # # O= 1 : Relative to the axis # ###################################################################### # WELLS style dx dy angle tama th tv O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---- -- -- # ZNO 8 3. -2. 90. 3. 0 2 1 well name # ZDO 8 -3. -2. 90. 3. 0 2 1 description # # WELLS simbo dx dy angle O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- # ZZO 80 0. 0. 0. 1 well symbol # # POZOS tiplin diam.up diam.down n_sides # # ----- ------ --------- --------- ------# ZP 0 1.0 1.2 16 well drawing # # PIPES tiplin equid. n_sides # # ----- ------ ----- ------# ZT 0 10. 16 pipe drawing # # PIPES style dpk(x) deje(y) angle tama th tv O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---- -- -- # ZMO 8 10. 2. 0. 2. 0 0 1 material and diameter# ZSO 8 10. -2. 0. 2. 0 4 1 description # # ELBOWS Symbol dx dy ang. O(real angle in sexagesimal parts) # # ----- ------- ---- --- ---- # ZCO 635 0. 0. 0. 1 # ######################################################################
Ground plan and 3D view of an axis represented with Tuberias.lil drawing mode
A minimum angle can be established in order not to label elbows with angles of less than this value, using these drawing modes: TUBERIA3.lil which uses a symbol. TUBERIA4.lil which uses a cell.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 25 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Following is the content of these *.lil files: ###################################################################### # tuberias3.lil # ###################################################################### # LINES EXTRACTED FROM ANY SURFACE BY CODE # # Type of L Surface Code elements # # --- --------- ---------- ------ -----------------------------# LS 40 68 2. bottom of ditch excavation # ###################################################################### # Z-O : enables control of orientation (third character=O) # # O= 0 : Absolute angle. # # O= 1 : Relative to the axis # ###################################################################### # WELLS style dx dy angle tama th tv O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---- -- -- # ZNO 8 3. -2. 90. 3. 0 2 1 well name # ZDO 8 -3. -2. 90. 3. 0 2 1 description # # WELLS symbo dx dy angle O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- # ZZO 80 0. 0. 0. 1 well symbol # # WELLS typlin diam.up diam.down n_sides # # ----- ------ --------- --------- ------# ZP 0 1.0 1.2 16 well drawing # # PIPES typlin equid. n_sides # # ----- ------ ----- ------# ZT 0 10. 16 pipe drawing # # PIPES style dpk(x) deje(y) angle tama th tv O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---- -- -- # ZMO 8 10. 2. 0. 2. 0 0 1 material and diameter# ZSO 8 10. -2. 0. 2. 0 4 1 description # # ELBOWS Symbol dx dy ang. O ang_min (real angle in sexagesimal parts)# # ----- ------- ---- --- ---- - ------# ZCOM 635 0. 0. 0. 1 2.0 (only greater than 2 degrees)# # ZCO 635 0. 0. 0. 1 # ###################################################################### # end # # --# END # ######################################################################
Ground plan of an axis represented with Tuberia3.lil drawing mode.
PAGE: 26 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
###################################################################### # tuberias4.lil # ###################################################################### # LINES EXTRACTED FROM ANY SURFACE BY CODE # # Type of L Surface Code elements # # --- --------- ---------- ------ -----------------------------# LS 40 68 2. bottom of ditch excavation # ###################################################################### # Z-O : enables control of orientation (third character=O) # # O= 0 : Absolute angle. # # O= 1 : Relative to the axis ###################################################################### # WELLS style dx dy angle tama th tv O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---- -- -- # ZNO 8 3. -2. 90. 3. 0 2 1 well name # ZDO 8 -3. -2. 90. 3. 0 2 1 description # # WELLS symbo dx dy angle O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- # ZZO 80 0. 0. 0. 1 well symbol # # WELLS typlin diam.up diam.down j n_sides # # ----- ------ --------- --------- ------# ZP 0 1.0 1.2 16 well drawing # # PIPES typlin equid. n_sides # # ----- ------ ----- ------# ZT 0 10. 16 pipe drawing # # PIPES style dpk(x) deje(y) angle tama th tv O # # ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---- -- -- # ZMO 8 10. 2. 0. 2. 0 0 1 material and diameter# ZSO 8 10. -2. 0. 2. 0 4 1 description # #--------------------------------------------------------------------# # ELBOWS Cell length ang_min (angle of elbows on ground plan) # ----- ------- -------- ------# ZCPM 20 20. 2.0 Only over 2 degrees # # ZCPC 20 20. # ###################################################################### # end # # --# END # ######################################################################
#
#
Ground plan of an axis represented with Tuberia4.lil drawing mode
BIONDA PROTECTORS The library includes the Biondas.lil drawing mode, enabling us to draw internal and external bionda protectors. The internal bionda for the right-hand lane is on curves to the right, and the bionda for the lefthand lane is on curves to the left.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 27 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
7.3-
ISPOL 9
Drawing longitudinal profiles This menu enables the generation of plans with the longitudinal profile of the ground and t he grade line with its vertical arrangements. It is usual also to represent, on several lower bands, the figures corresponding to heights, kp, etc., forming a drawing similar to the strings of a grid showing the data pre-established by the user and the diagrams of alignments, cambers, land balance, walls etc., of an axis.
When we enter the menu, the data pertaining to the current axis is updated with the files declared in the project table. The options on the side menu are described below.
[Longitudinal] It generates on the screen the plans of the longitudinal profile of the current axis, following the pattern predefined in the "lib/ISPOL.gui" file, which we will discuss later, and a series of data to be entered in the following floating window:
• • • • •
[Initial KP] First KP on the first sheet. [Final KP] Last KP to be shown. [Horizontal scale] for KPs [Vertical scale] for heights. [Name for the page file] (*.pag).
This file will contain the definition of sheets which will then be used to send the plans to the plotter, with the “PRINT” menu option entitled "Automatic Paging” (see cartographic module manual). •
Automatic ground plan sub-paging? (y/n)
For the generation of the paging, ISTRAM® seeks an area above the theoretical data limit (green rectangle). If we answer yes to the above question, the respective band of the ground plan appears on the plans. The *.gui pattern in use should have a sufficient declared “upper margin of paper” to include a sufficiently wide band of ground plan (ispol7.gui has a free margin of 251 mm).
PAGE: 28 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
When we know draw the longitudinal profile, we can select the length in millimetres x sheet regardless of the loaded x axis. We can also select the width and height of the drawing regardless of the chosen format. When the length is changes in mm x sheet, this automatically changes the drawable Xmax values and the width of the paper, so the drawing can be made regardless of the selected format. From the longitudinal profile’s dialogue box, we can also change the selected format and x axis. ® Finally, ISTRAM will generate on the screen the pages of longitudinal profiles (use "Zoom" and "SD" options for details). These profiles can also be edited with all the program’s options and can be saved in "*.edm" files like any other drawings.
[Delet] It eliminates from the current editing session all the graphic objects generated since the menu was entered, including interactive editions using the MENUS dropdown options. Any option which SAVES temporary security files will prevent the use of "Delete", as they will set the counter at the end. [Position] It asks for the number of bands occupied by profiles if you enter with an occupied band which is not included in the green rectangle. It will respect all those you declare and draw in the next. Each band is calculated with a height suitable for the current format.
[Change Axis] It loads the data and performs the calculations required to draw the longitudinal profile of another axis. The names of the files to be used are taken from the current "Project (*.pol)".
[Active Axes] It enables the simultaneous generation of the longitudinal profiles of all the axes in an active group. The Axis number Model also has to be active. It is possible to order axes by group, using the “Order by group” command. This options has two possibilities for the automatic selection of the initial and final KPs for the longitudinal profile of each axis: YESÆAccording to the calculation stretches. From the initial KP of the first stretch to the end of the last stretch. NOÆAccording to Ground Profiles.
[Grid data] It asks us to select a longitudinal profile template from those available in the library. Until it is changed for another, the last one selected will be available in the library under the name of ISPOL.gui. ® ISTRAM uses the "lib/ISPOL.gui" file as a pattern in the generation of the longitudinal profile. The user can change the content of this file by means of the “X axis” option, which enables him/her to choose any of the files in the library with an *.gui extension. The chosen file is copied to the "lib/ISPOL.gui" which is used as a pattern until overwritten by another operation like this one.
[Format] Once a paging format has been selected, it will remain in use until it is changed using this option. In general, the process first needs to know which paper format is to be used; its dimensions must be compatible with the axis length specification for the axis to be represented. When we use automatic ground plan sub-paging (ground plan and longitudinal profile will be on the same physical page), we have to use formats and X axes with which an acceptable result is feasible.
[Ground Plan Cut] As the longitudinal profile drawing is paged in sheets (of 700 m, for instance), this option generates polygons for cutting in respective length sections, with the paging of the current axis, so that using the Copy area option (TOOLS menu), we can combine each longitudinal profile with the corresponding piece of ground plan, or directly export the squared pieces of map to edm or dxf files, etc.. The data requested is: - Starting profile? - Final profile? - Sheet length (m)? - Intermediate every? - Width on left? - Width on right?
Kp starting the first sheet. Last Kp on the last sheet. Axis length on each sheet. A point on profile multiples of... Band on the left of the axis. Band on the right of the axis.
As many closed polygons are generates as are required to cover the ground plan of the axis, marking orthogonal cuts on the axis at each page cut.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 29 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
If we have selected “Automatic ground plan subpaging” in the “Longitudinal” option, this option is NOT necessary, as when the plan is generated, the program copies the information about its position to the cartography and pastes it in a window on the longitudinal profile.
Preparation of data for drawing the mass diagram
[MASS DIAG] It drops down a menu enabling us to manipulate the data of the mass diagram of the current axis or the overall mass diagram, before drawing the longitudinal profile. This information will only be drawn if the [Ground] [Mass diagram] option described on the .gui template is enabled.
7.3.1- Text tables Up to 10 independent tables can be defined. In each table, we can create an indefinite number of stretches with an initial KP, a final KP and a text of up to 60 characters. These tables are used to label different areas of the grid data of the longitudinal axis.
These tables are stored in/recovered from the .vol file. From the interactive grid editor, we can define the location of these tables on the sheet. These tables are designed to issue constant information on each of the plans.
PAGE: 30 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
7.3.2- Point tables Up to two tables of points associated to each axis can be defined and stored in the *.vol file. Each datum on each table contains: - KP of the axis. - Symbol. - Z, which can be: • relative to the ground. • absolute • relative to the right grade line. • relative to the left grade line. • associated text. Points can be uploaded from top/toc files. We are asked for the maximum distance to the axis and the initial and final KPs. The points not projected between the first and last KPs of the axis are always excluded. The "Start" option deletes all the data from the current table. These symbols, their associated texts, their KPs and their heights can be drawn on the longitudinal profile or on the grid data and they can also be seen on the grade line menu.
7.3.3- Interactive editing of grid data for longitudinal profiles Access is from the [Generate .gui] option of the LONGITUDINAL menu and it deploys the following dialogue box which acts as a guide for designing new or altering existing grid data. It contains the different options which control the information groups which can be processed to create drawings.
The *.gui files contain information about how to generate the longitudinal profile. The user can alter existing or create new ones. This can be done from any text editor, but it is advisable to do this interactively from the GENERATE .gui option. Format of .gui files The grid data definition file comprises a header and other blocks: The only essential blocks are the lines starting with a number and the line containing the word "END" (end of each block). ® Lines starting with "#" are not interpreted by ISTRAM (comments) and lines starting with an alphanumerical code can be deleted, replaced or commented.
Commands from different grid data can be combined in each block.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 31 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
All these lines with codes can also be repeated several times before the END of their respective blocks. There are several examples of different grid data in the lib library files, under the name of ISP**.gui. Each time we press one of the buttons, we access a submenu providing a series of options and elements which are conceptually associated and enable us to configure the drawing system in similar work areas. In all these dialogue boxes, the [Back] key returns the control of the system to the previous point. It is advisable to remember that, by default, G001 is presented as the name of the future grid data file to be generated. The files are stored following the known library concept. The [Load] option enables us to select existing *.gui for editing, saving the last one selected. We have to complete the Nom: G001 field before saving the new grid data to a file. If the grid data saved is the same as the one used for drawing, it is automatically reloaded. Specification of size per sheet and origin of the drawing’s coordinates By default, the system offers a size in mm which, used with the working scale, will return the length to be drawn on each sheet. For example, 700 mm at 1/1000 gives 700 m. With their origin in the lower left-hand corner of the available drawing area, dx and dy are the relative coordinates of the origin of the graphic longitudinal profile. From Dy down is the space reserved for the grid data. On each sheet we can draw both the longitudinal profile and the corresponding portion of ground plan. The data defining the size to be used for the ground plan and longitudinal profile are defined in the [Ground] Æ [Parameters] submenu. The program determines the optimal rectangle containing these 700 m, but needs to know (provided from the grid data definition) the vertical dimension of the available window. The following figure shows how the program automatically assigns subpages.
The following sections contain brief comments on some of the details of all these parameters. We recommend that you use the [load] option and select several of the existing grid data to familiarise yourself with these definitions. The graphic pattern shown on the screen will help you to understand the definitions.
PAGE: 32 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
7.3.4- Grid data for longitudinal profiles, fix norm FIX NORM deploys a menu enabling us to define the different fixed elements on each sheet which are independent from the KPs, heights or elements of each project: In this section, we can define the grid of horizontal and vertical lines accompanying the longitudinal profile. We can also label the horizontal and vertical scales. With the [FIX NORM] Æ [EQUIDISTANT HORIZONTAL LINES] Æ HORIZONTAL GRID Æ Zone Æ [all/below] option, we can configure the grid data so that we only draw the horizontal lines below the ground or all of them. This option is found in the TUBOS7.gui grid. By default, it is in the lower left-hand corner.
If several data is created of EQUIDISTANT HORIZONTAL lines, the elevation point is only labelled on the last series defined. The [FIXED PATTERN]Æ[AXIS NAME LABELLING]ÆNAME OF AXIS option enables us to label each axis on each page of the longitudinal profile.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 33 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
7.3.5- Data associated to the ground, transverse profiles and design information GROUND enables us to define a variety of elements associated to the transverse profiles of the ground, to the ISPOLn.per profiles and other entities. All the parameters to be defined are applied in general so we obtain information from the design of the axis and represent as many data as possible.
Together with the longitudinal profile of the ground, we can draw other surfaces in the ISPOLn.per file (they are seen when editing the grade line). This is done by activating GROUND->TRANSVERSE LINES. In this case, if the surfaces have no codes (grounds), we ignore the code field and merely check that the first point is at 0 distance from the axis. The data corresponding to the profile of each line are entered from a distance to the comparison plane, "CPDis.". If a value other than zero is written in this box, the real height of the line is not taken into account and it is drawn as a horizontal stretch in the specified position.
PARAMETERS All the data have a simple explanation, provided to the side of each entry. [0.0] Comparison plane multiple of If a value other than zero is entered, this value will be used. If not, it will continue to do so, considering that it depends on the vertical scale and on whether equidistant horizontal lines are used to mark the reference heights.
[TRANSVERSE LINES]
On each profile, we can label the distance to the axis on the ground plan of the selected element in the PROFILE zone. The surface and code identify the point of the transverse profile.
PAGE: 34 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[OTHER AXES, OTHER LONG, OTHER LINES AND CROSSING P.] From this submenu, we define the form and distribution of the information added from the grade line editor. Remember that we can view grounds and platform or subgrade lines of other axes involved in the project. Through points are also representing, and they are often essential for the interpretation of a design.
[OTHER AXES] A 5-metre margin is admitted to label the KP of the intersection of the axes outside the cut platform of the other axis. It is possible to label the names of other axes on the longitudinal profile. The KP and Z of the grade line of the other axis can be labelled at the point of intersection of the two, plus the KP and Z of the current axis.
7.3.6- Data associated to the definition of vertical alignments RIGHT VERTICAL ALIGNMENT and LEFT VERTICAL ALIGNMENT enable us to graphically represent the vertical alignments, vertical lines of reference, and so on. VERTICAL ALIGNMENTS Æ SYMBOLS AND NOTES ON THE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT OR GRID DATA.. We can label the KP, Kv, the gradient difference as a percentage and one-per-one of the alignments.
The "W Angle Ps-pe rad" command offers the value in radians. It is also possible to note associates to a vertex with or without an alignment: The height of the ground, level difference, level difference cut and level difference fill. It is also possible to label the level difference of the beds of the wells (height of bed – height of ground). VERTICAL ALIGNMENTS Æ WELLS AND VERTICAL Æ Red Z bed. The Copy from left R function transfers all the left vertical alignment data to the right
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 35 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
7.3.7- Diagrams of superelevations and widths SUPERELEVATION DIAGRAM If we have only defined one superelevation datum at the start of the axis, another is added at the last KP in order to be able to draw the superelevation diagram on all the sheets.
The superelevation diagram for railways considers the height difference between the lower height and the vertical alignment for S-shaped bends. “Relative border gradient” enables labelling with the option: mm/m FFCC. The FFCC02.gui grid data uses the S321 symbol to represent this value in mm/m.
WIDTH DIAGRAM It enables us to define all the parameters associated to the diagram of widths. If we select the ; + SUPELEVN option, the diagram of widths shows the superelevations with the information defined in the GROUND PLAN LABELLING menu, adapting the width of the triangles to the diagram of widths. The ISP15P.gui grid data uses this option.
PAGE: 36 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
7.3.8- Point tables
The following can be represented for each datum on the table: • The associated symbol. • The KP. • The height. • The associated name or text. The data on each table can be represented at its real position on the profile or in a fixed position on the grid data referred to the current comparison plane.
7.3.9- Route apparatus
This option enables us to represent the route apparatus in the grid data. The Apa_Via.gui grid data uses these options.
7.3.10- Examples of longitudinal profiles and associated grid data In particular, IsP14.gui explains how to note vertical alignments and diagrams of alignments and superelevations; 15, 16 and 17 contain messages about notes. 18 adds notes on fabricated elements (so do Isof1.gui and Isof2.gui). Others are specific for railways (FFCC01.gui, FFCC02.gui, Renfe2k.gui), pipelines (Isp22.gui, Isp22b.gui, tubos3.gui, tubos4.gui, tubos5.gui, tubos6.gui) or walls (muros.gui, muros2.gui), etc... estruct.gui draws the structures defined in the STRUCTURES menu. DiagVel.gui draws the Speed Diagram. We can label specific speed values, depending on the radius and superelevation and depending on the radius. Exceptionally, a horizontal 1:5000 or greater scale is recommended for this grid data. Apa_Via.gui draws the route apparatus designed for railways.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 37 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Example of IsP01.gui grid data
Example of IsP02.gui grid data
PAGE: 38 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
7.4-
LINEAR WORKS
Drawing transverse profiles This menu can also be accessed from the ISMOS surface modelling module and enables us to complete the graphic representation and generate plans of the information contained in the transverse profile files. The ficheros Ispoln.per files generated from the project menu can thus be presented in a distributed format (several profiles on the same sheet) either on paper of digitally (pdf, dxf, etc.).
The system enabling us to obtain these plans is similar to that described for the longitudinal profiles, a descriptor file which, in this case, has a .gut extension, is responsible for storing the orders required to ® draw a series of transverse profiles in a more or less detailed and enriched manner. ISTRAM also offers a transverse profile grid data editor enabling us to interactively alter these files. The side menu contains the following options: The selection of the file or files on which to apply the format+grid data combination to generate plans could be as follows:
[Drain,Works] This option selects the "OF.per" drainage works file. It should be used with the transverse grid data file: obfa1.gut [File] it enables us to represent a selected profile file on the screen. [ISPOL model] It represents the ISPOLn.per file, where n is the axis in progress if it is fully calculated.
[ISPOL Ground] It represents the last file of ground profiles loaded since "ELEVATION" or "VERTICAL ALIGNMENTS". [Active Axes] It enables us to simultaneously generate the transverse profiles of all the axes in an active group. The Model of the axis number must also be enabled. With this order, we can order axes according to group by means of the “Order by group” option. The system shows the following window for any of the above options: The page file (*.pag) stores the information about the position of the sheets to subsequently generate the plans for the plotter.
[Delet] It eliminates the last transverse profiles generated. ® With all the information, ISTRAM generates the profile sheets in an area of the screen above the theoretical data limit. These profiles can be edited with any of the ISTRAM® graphic utilities. . The [PRINT] menu contains all the tools with which to send these transverse plans to a printer (through *.plt files) or virtually (dxf,dgn,pdf).
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 39 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
7.4.1- Interactive generation of transverse profile grid data [Grid data] With this option, we can choose one of the *.gut files in the library to be the current definition. The system copies the chosen file to ISPOL.gut and this configuration remains in use until the option is changed again. The orders described in these files can be edited and amended easily using the [Generate .gut] grid data editor which deploys the following dialogue box to act as a guide for designing new grid data. A series of button enable us to access the different theme areas in which similar parameters related to the type of data processed are grouped to be included in the plans. On each of the sub-screens, the [back] button takes us back to the previous level.
In [OPTIONS], we can configure the scale or represent a square grid indicating its graduation. These divisions can have whole values or include up to 2 decimals. Another possibility would be to define a symbol for truncated axes by means of frontier lines in order to label the number of the axis which overlaps the other side of the frontier line. By default, S657 is added, labelling “OVERLAP WITH AXIS X”. The FIX NORM option enables us to describe the general parameters applicable to all the profile in relation to basic aspects: decoration, labelling, horizontal and vertical line grids, etc. [KP and DIFF-KP LABELLING] enables us to label the number of the profile and the X and Y coordinates of the axis on the profile. [NAME OF THE AXIS ON PAGE] enables us to label the name of the axis on each of the transverse profile pages. [NAME OF TYPE SECTION] This enables us to label the name of the type section with each profile. The library contains the ISP01st.gut grid data, which uses this command. This option opens a window like this:
The following parameters can be configured: Sim/Est. Style of text with which to label the name of the type section. Dis.Hor. Horizontal distance. Dis.Ver. Vertical distance. Angle. In sexagesimal degrees with which we can rotate the text. Size. Height of the characters. Eng.Hor. Horizontal hitch of the text, which can be: [left], [centre] and [right]. Eng. Ver. Vertical hitch of the text, which can be: [up], [head], [middle], [foot], [down]. Posic. Position relative to the profile: [South], [NW], [SW].
PAGE: 40 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
7.4.2- Drawing options for profile surfaces The SURFACE DATA option deploys: In this submenu, we define how the different data obtained by the application from the profile file is to be distributed. The program enables us to define, in the different sections, the type of attribute taken, from which kind of surface, whether a label or a symbol or both are used, etc.
The [ATTRIBUTES ON SURFACES] option can be used with surfaces without codes (e.g. competent land line 66, plant cover line 104,…). In these cases, the minimum and maximum codes are not taken into account. In the [ATTRIBUTES ON GRID DATA] option, we can give instructions to label the heights of the characteristic points of a specific surface. There are also two possibilities for Extension and Improvement projects: • SURFACE = -1 (Ground): the data is taken from surface 106 (existing roadbed), and completed with surface 104 (plant cover) or 66 (innappropiate land). • SURFACE = -2 (Project): it completes surface 67 (roadbed) with 68 (excavation) and 69 (inappropiate land cut). The MEASUREMENTS option deploys:
There are three possibilities in the Text option: • [All]. it lists the complete name of the measurement as defined in the *.dar table (e.g. 2 S.D_LAND= 52.28 m ). • [Short]. it lists the name of the measurement in narrow format (e.g. A.D_LAND 52.28). • [None]. No letters are added before the name of tne measurement (e.g. D_LAND= 52.28 m2).
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 41 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
When we press [CHARACTERISTIC Z] we are taken to the following window: ; Z_Red in E.Turn It enables us to label the value of the red height (Z_vertical alignment – Z_ground), and we can configure the symbol used to label the red height and its position (of the symbol) relative to the turn axis (horizontal and vertical distance and the angle). The S629 symbol is used by default.
7.4.3- Other options Definition and drawing of closed areas This submenu enables us to define surfaces using the same method used by the cubication systems or .dar tables. With the definition of surfaces, we tell the programme how it should obtain them (with the + up, + down, cut options, etc.) and we then use them in the definition of closed areas.
Branch drawing options added to the profile file
PAGE: 42 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[ADD BRANCH DATA] From this window, we can label information about the branches added with the [Add Branch] option on the transverse profiles.
We can tell it to label the limit of the measurement, the information about the branch with regards to thekp, axis number, axis name and name of the group to which it belongs, besides the height of the vertical alignment of the branch. We can see how it works with the following grid data: ARamal.gut.
7.4.4- Examples of some grid data for transverse profiles Example of IsP01.gut
Example of IsP02.gut
.
The following profile uses a grid data enabling us to draw symbols on the section: The crossbeams and rails are automatically positioned when the type section pertains to railways, but the trains and posts were added from elevation using the symbols to profile submenu. The heights of the rail heads are also labelled using an order in the grid data.
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
PAGE: 43 / 44
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Example of IsP11.gut
PAGE: 44 / 44
7 - GROUND PLAN AND PROFILES
LINEAR WORKS PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
8
The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of Buhodra Ingeniería S.A. and is protected by Spanish and international copyright. The reproduction or modification of any text or illustration is expressly prohibited. Hard copy is exclusively allowed for corporate or individual use, and the copying of its content for educational purposes is prohibited unless otherwise authorised in writing. The educational and illustrative material contained in the present document may be modified at any time without prior notification. The present documentation is subject to a process of continuous updating., and it is therefore impossible to guarantee an exact correspondence between the data input boxes, file formats and other specifications as they appear on screen and as they appear in documentary format. The user acknowledges full responsibility for any consequences deriving from the use of the present material, and by extension of its associated programs.
LINEAR WORKS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Introduction and General Aspects Axis Design in Ground Plan, Reframing and Drawing Elevation, Land Profiles and Grade Lines Elevation, Platform and Cross Section Elevation, Advanced Project Calculation Complex Calculations, Crossings and Junctions Drawing Ground Plans and Profiles
8
08
Project Printouts and Reports
09 10 11 12
Widening and Improvement Projects Railway Design Drainage and Distribution, Pipes Project Tracking and Monitoring
http://www.istram.net
© Buhodra Ingeniería S.A.
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
INDEX
8 – PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS 8.1-
REPORTS, GENERAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 3 8.1.18.1.2-
8.2-
GEOMETRY ...................................................................................................................... 5 8.2.18.2.28.2.38.2.48.2.58.2.68.2.78.2.88.2.98.2.10-
8.3-
Setting out and calculating points on the ground plan axis ................................. 8 Setting out of walls ................................................................................................... 8 Setting out of slopes ................................................................................................ 8 Limit of areas reached and height of slopes .......................................................... 8 Setting out of land clearance head and foot of fill ................................................. 9 Precut on rock........................................................................................................... 9 Pavement heights ..................................................................................................... 10 Setting out of pavements ......................................................................................... 11 Subgrade Z. Setting out and control of pavements ............................................... 11 Overwork ................................................................................................................... 13 Security barriers ....................................................................................................... 13 Railways, tracks reconsidered by long ropes ........................................................ 14 Railways, track displacement .................................................................................. 14 Railways, track apparatus and free track pickets .................................................. 14 Railways, reconsideration and control of lane....................................................... 15 Railways, printout for PLASSER batter .................................................................. 15 Track axis .................................................................................................................. 16
MEASUREMENTS, AREAS AND VOLUMES ............................................................................ 17 8.4.18.4.28.4.38.4.48.4.58.4.68.4.78.4.88.4.98.4.108.4.118.4.128.4.138.4.14-
8.5-
Ground plan alignments........................................................................................... 5 Grade line status and axis points in elevation ....................................................... 5 Complete cross section ........................................................................................... 5 Characteristic points of the platform ...................................................................... 5 Line of the platform .................................................................................................. 5 Line of the structure ................................................................................................. 6 Line of the section .................................................................................................... 6 Projections of a line on an axis ............................................................................... 7 Singular ground plan and elevation point .............................................................. 7 Heights of terrain, axes and borders....................................................................... 7
SETTING OUT ................................................................................................................... 8 8.3.18.3.28.3.38.3.48.3.58.3.68.3.78.3.88.3.98.3.108.3.118.3.128.3.138.3.148.3.158.3.168.3.17-
8.4-
Configuration of parameters common to all printouts .......................................... 3 Types of reports........................................................................................................ 4
Measurements on transverse profiles .................................................................... 17 Partial volumes ......................................................................................................... 17 Percentages of volume by section .......................................................................... 18 Tabulated files for use with spreadsheets.............................................................. 18 Level differences, clearings, occupation and mass diagram ............................... 18 Clearings ................................................................................................................... 18 Total areas by refining axis of slopes and clearings ............................................. 19 Sowing areas............................................................................................................. 19 Measurements of pavements................................................................................... 19 Slope refining areas ................................................................................................. 20 Pavement irrigation areas ........................................................................................ 20 Geotextile areas ........................................................................................................ 20 Areas by length......................................................................................................... 20 Cutting and demolition............................................................................................. 21
PROJECT DATA, ANALYSIS AND TRANSFORMATION ............................................................ 21 8.5.18.5.28.5.38.5.4-
Intersections between ground plan axes................................................................ 21 Land clearance kerbs and guard kerbs .................................................................. 22 Transverse profiles of the terrain (perf.res) ........................................................... 22 Drainage works ......................................................................................................... 22 INDEX
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 1 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
INDEX 8.5.58.5.68.5.78.5.88.5.98.5.108.5.118.5.128.5.138.5.14-
Wells, tubes, turns .................................................................................................... 22 Special longitudinal profiles .................................................................................... 23 Control of Z................................................................................................................ 23 Summary of project axes ......................................................................................... 23 *.vol file data.............................................................................................................. 23 Axes characteristics ................................................................................................. 24 LandXML.................................................................................................................... 24 Structures .................................................................................................................. 25 s/SC1 TRANSVERSE SECTION................................................................................ 25 TRIMBLE .................................................................................................................... 25
INDEX
PAGE: 2 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
8.1-
LINEAR WORKS
Reports, general description The [REPORTS] dialogue box is activated from several points of the program, from [PLAN DESING] and from [SECTION]. It contains the configuration of general parameters defining page appearance. It also orders types of printout according to the information they contain, geometries, volumes, project data, etc. By pressing the respective buttons, a call is made to the system to view (or generate) the specific printout.
8.1.1- Configuration of parameters common to all printouts [Exit] Closes the REPORTS menu. First Page [ ] Here, we specify the number for the first page of the printout (by default, 1).
Page break. If enabled, the printout starts with a page break. Lin.Pag.Num. [ ] Indicates the number of lines per page. For printouts with paging, this establishes the desired page length. Printouts which are generated automatically during system calculations are marked with P (Pregenerated) or S (Selection from several already generated). So if we wish to change the number of lines per page, they must be regenerated. Only those marked with G (Generation upon option selection) directly receive the change.
Char.Inch [ ] Indicates the number of characters per inch. This option is only effective with the traditional printing method using the ISIMPRIM print command file (currently not in use). This file calls another printer configuration file before sending the printout. If eccentricities are used in the definition of the platform, printouts including distances to the axis can measure it fro the mathematical axis defined in the ground plan (option: { Mathematical axis) or from the geometric axis of the section (option: { Geometric axis). If eccentricities are not used, the result is the same. By default, the program lets the default printout configuration choose one or the other (~ Axis according to list).
Comment [ ] Printouts are headed by the name of the project, the number and name of the axis and a command which can be added here to identify and personalise the query. In printouts related to the ground plan, we also use [Ground plan comment] and, similarly, [Elevation comment]. The destination of printouts is always a .res file. With the following options, we decide what to do with the printouts once they are generated:
~ LIST This option displays them on the screen if the ISLISTA library file is defined, which a command sending it to the screen.
PRINT sends the selected printout to the printer. ISIMPRIM runs this print configuration file. { SAVE requests a name to save the .res in a file to be printed. It suggests a .lst extension.
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 3 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
DECIMALS configures the number of decimals on different printouts:
•
In printouts of measurements (cvol.res and firme.res): Areas, Partial Volumes and
Accumulated Volumes. •
In the printout of the complete section: Height and Azimuth.
•
In the case of setting out, it is possible to force the printouts to 6 decimals instead of three by checking this box:
6 decim. in reconsider.
Narrow Printouts of volumes (cvol.res and firme.res) occupy much more width than is admitted on a sheet and normal type. When this box is checked, printouts are produced with 5 data columns instead of 9, thus obtaining narrower printouts with more rows.
Space between lines When this flag is activated, before each profile, a separation is generated in the form of a blank line on the aforementioned volume printouts.
Summary Volum.Empty If this option is not enabled, the summaries of areas in profiles and road surfaces do not show volumes with zero measurements. By default, it is not enabled, so these empty volumes are NOT shown.
8.1.2- Types of reports The printouts described in this chapter can be grouped by similar theme, according to the following structure: •
Geometries: General ground plan and elevation definition printouts, and elements of the platform.
•
Setting out: Printouts to be used for controlling and setting out different constructive elements. Those specifically applied to railways or pipelines are explicitly grouped together.
•
Measurements: Printouts informing of areas and volumes.
•
Project data: Printouts showing parametric data related to the parts defining some of the elements of the project. In some cases, additional calculation or analysis operations are also performed.
The [QUERY (P)] button provides direct access to the QUERY.res printout file generated from different interactive queries such as [KP, distance], [xKP
To select a .res or .lst file for viewing or printing, we use the [*.res] and [*.lst] buttons, respectively.
PAGE: 4 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
8.2-
LINEAR WORKS
Geometry
8.2.1- Ground plan alignments [ceje AXIS ON GROUND PLAN (S/G)] enables us to select or generate a new ceje#.res printout. In the latter, case, it can be generated for a single axis or printout with all the axes of the project (ceje0.res) other than those which are disabled.
8.2.2- Grade line status and axis points in elevation [rasa AXIS ON ELEVATION (S/G)] asks us to select one of the rasa#.res, where # is the number of the axis, or enables us to generate a new printout. In this case, it asks for: • • • •
the number of the axis (if we enter 0, it generates a simultaneous printout of all axes) Initial KP Final KP Interval between points
rasa0.res gives us the set of all the active axes of the project.
8.2.3- Complete cross section [section TRANSVERSE SECTION (G)] lists all the segments of the transverse profiles as distances to the axis and the height and gradient of each section. Each profile takes up one sheet of the printout. This is very useful during explanation work.
[seccxyz TRANS. SECTION (G)] is the same printout but with the X,Y andZ coordinates of each point.
8.2.4- Characteristic points of the platform [plat PLATFORM (S/G)] asks us to select one of the plat#.res printouts containing the characteristic points of the platform of an axis. This printout is generated when calculating the platform or the entire elevation. It also enables us to generate a new printout. In this case, it asks for the same information requested for the previous printout.
8.2.5- Line of the platform [linpla PLATFORM LÍNE (G)] enables us to generate a printout of any point of or referring to the PLATFORM:
The reference point codes can be: -11 1 2 11 12 13
Lower border of the previous verge (motorways) Centre of the roadbed on roads and lower border of the roadbed on motorways Outer border of the main roadbed Outer border of the first outside verge Outer border of the second outside verge Outer border of the third outside verge.
Pavement points and fixed platforms can also be included up to a maximum of 6 data.
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 5 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
8.2.6- Line of the structure [estru STRUCTURE LINE (G)] is similar to Line of the Platform but depths are not measured vertically but normally, to the surface via the cant and longitudinal gradient. It also enables the simultaneous generation of another 20 lines corresponding to points of variable positions. This position can be defined by entering up to 6 data per line: KP, distance to code and normal distance to the surface at the point of reference. The printout contains each line between the first and last KP defined and according to the equidistance entered in the menu. If we also enable the
P.Sing option, we also add the KPs of the singular points of the axis (in and out tangents, vertices, high and low points, width law, cants, turn axes, central reserve and auxiliary roadbeds). It also includes the KP data of lines L1, L2, etc. All the lines can be drawn in 3D if a valid type is defined in the menu. The depth from the point of reference can be NORMAL to the surface GRADE LINE+CANT or VERTICAL. With the
Transversely option enabled, the printout contains the points of variable position for each KP in a consecutive manner. In this case, the transverse lines (L1, L2, L3) are drawn instead of the longitudinal ones. This menu enables us to Save/Load the definition of data by the printout (.les extension files).
8.2.7- Line of the section [line SECTION LINE (G)] generates a printout for resetting any of the longitudinal lines of the platform, which is given by the surface identifier and profile code. It asks for the axis, initial and final KP and side and height distance of the parallel line. The height can be measured in two ways, from the point with code or from the surface (considering the cant for recalculating the height according to the distance from the line).
Distance [ ] ~ To code ~ To axis It indicates the origin of reference for distances.
Next.>= This control tells the program that the code does not have to be exact. It searches for a code greater than or equal to the one entered. At the end of the printout line, the code found in each case is shown. Generate L67e1.lon It generates the Lxxxeyyy.lon file (where xxx is the surface and yyy the number of the axis) which is the longitudinal *.lon file of the listed line.
Depth [0.00] ~ Prolong Surface from code. The surface is prolonged with the gradient of the stretch attached to the code. { From Code (Horizontal). It refers to the height of the surface in the code. { From main RoadWAY (Cant). Prolonging the cant. { From Surface (all). It considers the entire surface. The first and fourth criteria only coincide when the point is on the section of surface just before or after the code. When this printout is generated, a line can be created on the cartography if a valid type is defined. PAGE: 6 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
8.2.8- Projections of a line on an axis [proye LINE PROJEC. (G)] Generates the proye.res printout resulting from projecting a 3D line on an axis, so that the deviations between the two can be analysed and where they occur. Its most immediate use is for comparing a polygonal profile (lane) and the theoretical design axis for road signalling. It also generates a .lon file which is a longitudinal profile of the line of the axis in KPs. It shows the 3D distance and the SECTOR (A: DRUp, B: DR-Down, C: IZ-Down, D: IZ-Up). A tolerance is requested and we are asked whether the 3D is lower than the tolerance; “ok” is entered in the sector column. We can select several lines and generate .lon files for ach one with the same base name.
[proyel LINE .PROJ.,LINE,AXIS (G)] Projection of one line on another according to the direction of an axis. proyel.res is like Project Line but the distances and height differences are measured relative to another reference line. Distances are measured normal to the present axis and the respective KP is also given. It also generates a .lon file which is the longitudinal profile of the line in KPs of the axis.
8.2.9- Singular ground plan and elevation point [psing PLAN/PRO INTEREST P (G)] enables us to generate the following configurable printout. On the one hand, we can select the KPs where there are singular GROUND PLAN and/or ELEVATION and/or CANT points. On the other, we select the information to be shown together with the KP, X, Y and/or Z coordinates of the grade line and/or Z of the Terrain and/or the Cants.
8.2.10- Heights of terrain, axes and borders [ctbor Z,GR,AXIS,BORDERS (G)] This option simultaneously generates a printout for each axis, ctbor1.res, ctbor2.res,...., containing data corresponding to the height of the terrain, height of the grade line (or grade lines in the case of a double road bed) and heights and distance to the land clearance head (D) and foot of embankment (T) axes of each profile or according to an equidistance:
It also enables us to generate a ctbortot.res printout with all the active axes.
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 7 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
8.3-
ISPOL 9
Setting out
8.3.1- Setting out and calculating points on the ground plan axis [cpun SETTING OUT AXIS (S/G)] enables us to select one of the printouts of the calculation of points performed in the setting out menu or to generate a new printout by entering the AXIS, initial KP, final KP and Equidistance. In the case of railways, this printout provides the LOW_WIRE height instead of the projected_Z. cpun0.res gives us a joint printout of all the axes of the project, except those which are disabled.
8.3.2- Setting out of walls [muros WALLS (G)] This printout contains the distance to the axis, height, X and Y coordinates, type (land clearance/embankment, length, and surface of the visible side of the wall heads. This printout also contains a column which accumulates the surface of the visible side of each wall. In the case of an open central reserve, it also shows the measurement of an embankment wall on the open side of the reserve. On the printout, this wall appears with the “M” code.
At the end of the printout there is a page with the total length and surface area of walls broken down into LEFT LAND CLEAR, RIGHT LAND CLEAR, LEFT EMBANKMENT, RIGHT EMBANKMENT, LEFT C. RESERVE and RIGHT C. RESERVE, plus the total corresponding to them all.
8.3.3- Setting out of slopes [slope SET OUT SLOPES (G)] This printout enables us to obtain, by KP, the distances to the axis and heights of the vertices of the land clearance lines of the platform (surface 68) from the last point to a code (by default, 100).
This printout can be obtained with 20 columns by checking the respective box.
8.3.4- Limit of areas reached and height of slopes [zonas OCCUPATION ZONE (S)] The zona#.res files contain the coordinates of the two borders of occupation and the height of the slopes. They are generated when drawing the reached areas of each axis by means of .lil files containing B (such as B.lil, LBT.lil, BE.lil,…).
PAGE: 8 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
8.3.5- Setting out of land clearance head and foot of fill [cabdes CUT HEAD (G)] generates a printout with the last and penultimate point of a given surface, on the right and left, indicating the gradient between them. If we use the surfaces provided by default, the result of the land clearance head and foot of embankment. This printout is used to stake out these lines in the field, emphasising the appropriate point when the profiles of the project terrain are not exact and correcting, “as we go”, the distance of small errors in the theoretical height of the terrain.
This printout also shows the heights from axis Zdt – Zras, where Zdt is the height of the lat point of the land clearance head or foot of embankment and Zras is the height of the turn axis (defined in the grade line menu). A tabulated printout is also created, called cabdes#.res (where # is the axis number) in the tmp folder, to which a column with the axis number is added.
8.3.6- Precut on rock [precor ROCK PRE-CUT (G)] This printout calculated for each side, based on two codes, the lengths of precut on the different land clearances on rock, the heights and the number of shots.
The characteristics of this printout are as follows: 1.
The length of the shots is measured on the slope. The program requests two values, minimum slope and maximum slope, to measure the lengths of the slopes of land clearance on rock between the two values (not counting berms.
2.
The interior slopes can be selected in the case of an open central reserve.
3.
As the codes are not taken into account, the geometry on rock can be defined by preserving the geometry of the land clearance. All the land clearance line is analysed, from the border of the ditch to the rock horizon.
4.
The printout can be generated for the right margin alone, the left margin alone or both.
5.
The surface can be selected to start the measurement from the competent terrain or one of the six available rocks.
6.
It is possible to select the interior slopes in cases of open central reserves with the Int. lef. and Int. rt options.
7.
The surface can be selected to start measuring the competent terrain and the six rock surfaces.
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 9 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
8.
The curvature and width changes can be taken into account for correcting the distance between profiles.
9.
Once code can also be enter5ed for the foot and another for the head of the perforation.
10. The following concepts are shown: •
KP (KPi): KP of datum i, can be shown for all the profiles of the ISPOL#.per file or only multiples of a given value (such as 20).
•
SLOPE LENGTH (LTi): This is the length of the slope line on rock at KPi where the slope is between the minimum and maximum value (to measure between slope heads and feet and not berms).
•
SLOPE SURFACE (Si): Slope surface on rock between two KPs.
•
NUM.SHOTS (Ni): Number of shots.
•
SHOT LENGTH (Li): Average shot length between two KP values.
•
SLOPE ACCUM.(ΣSi): Accumulated slope surface.
•
PRECUT LM (MLi): linear metres of precut between two KPs.
•
PRECUT ACCUM (ΣMLi): Accumulated linear metres of precut.
•
Distance between profiles (which will be different if the curvature or width changes are considered or not).
Si =
LTi + LTi−1 × (PK i − PK i−1 ) 2 Li =
Si PK i − PK i−1
ML i = N i × L i
8.3.7- Pavement heights [ctfir PAVEMENT: Z (G)] generates a printout to extend successive bands of road surface. It shows data for 4 points (A, B, C and D) which are always given as a reference to the points on the road surface. Codes 1 and 2 limit the principal roadbed, 2 and 11 the first auxiliary roadway, etc. B and C are the ends of the ceiling of a band of road surface which is defined by horizontal distance and depth from other points of the road surface, and A and D are other auxiliary points (stacks or nails for the spreader’s cable guide).
If the { Points B and C: Cut-off with slope if outside. A and D: Distance from B and C. All Profiles option is enabled, the program, instead of calculating the data in an analytical manner according to the defined equidistance, analyses all the profiles of the ISPOL#.per file within the specified range of KPs and if point B or C are sought by code 2 or more (outside border of the roadbed or outside shoulder) plus a distance and the point is outside the roadbed package, the program then seeks the intersection with the road surface closure outside slope (surface 67, points 11, 50 and 100). Also, in case point B or C are sought by code 1 or less (inside border of the roadbed or inside shoulders) plus a distance and the point is outside the road surface package on the central reserve side, the program then seeks the intersection with the road surface closure inside slope (surface 67, points -11, -50 and -100). If this option is enabled, point A is calculated at a relative distance to point B and point D at a relative distance to point C.
PAGE: 10 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
8.3.8- Setting out of pavements [repfir PAVEMENT: SET OUT (G)]. The repfir#.res printout is designed for on-site levelling of each road surface component. The format is prepared as a levelling notebook.
We can add external points of reference to the list for staking purposes, given by their distance to the road surface layer’s shoulder. The printouts represent the transverse gradient between the points.
8.3.9- Subgrade Z. Setting out and control of pavements [ctref SUBGRADE: Z. (G)] El The ctref#.res printout is for refining the esplanade platform in parallel to 6 or 12 points referring to the grade line, sub-grade line or one of the selected ground surfaces, identified by their codes.
When the code 100 point on the sub-grade line is requested, if the program does not find it (land clearance with reduced ditch) it then automatically seeks number 99 (low point of the sub-grade line beneath the ditch bottom). If code 99 is requested and not found, it then seeks code 100. If we request -55.5 and it is not found, it then searches for: a) -11 if it contains a twist in the gradient. b) the previous code (-100) if in prolongation. The code of the point actually being listed is printed. 8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 11 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
When this printout is generated, it automatically generates another called cf.res (cf#.res with # = axis number) containing the same data for the SETTING OUT AND CONTROL OF ROAD SURFACES. This printout has a single header at the beginning and no page breaks, so it can be uploaded from worksheets. The following printouts are also generated: • • • • •
cfR#.res: Setting out of road surfaces. cfC#.res: Control of road surfaces. CN#.res: Numerical control file for the LMGS_Grader program. cfCR.res: This printout has the same format as Control of road surface layers (cfC) but the header reads "SETTING OUT OF ROAD SURFACE LAYERS" (cfR). LandXML [Leica]. This button obtains a file in Land XML (istram.xml) format. The selected ground plan and elevation are exported, together with the selected surface, like the numerical control of machinery printout. The refining heights printout has first to be generated. This key deploys a menu similar to LANDXML, discussed later.
[Overal Height] When a value is entered here, it is copied on the 6/12 points. 5 Intersection with slope if outside • •
•
On the outside, for code >1 points, a possible cut with the slope of lines (68) and (67) is analysed and it is truncated on the vertical profile of the bottom of the ditch or foot of the embankment if it exceeds these points. It also analyses from the central reserve side for code <1 points and calculated the cut with the surface (67) from the border of the shoulder to the end. If it does not find the cut and passes beneath the vertex of the central verge, it returns the point to the vertical profile of the vertex of the central reserve. When 5 Intersection with slope if outside is enabled, if at the given depth the point is beneath the foot of the embankment and on the outside, then a point is returned to the vertical profile of the foot of the embankment.
When the profile is truncated and the code requested in the printout is missing, it goes directly to this last code. Requesting a code of <-100 (such as -500), the program seeks the point of the sub-grade line which cuts the slope of the central reserve and, if does not cut it, the point beneath the vertex of the central reserve. The [Save] [Load] options enable us to file or recover the data defining the printout by means of files with an .crf extension.
Remove Repetitions: if two points have the same distance to the axis and height, one of them is removed.
TOLERANCE VALUES Three tolerance values can be defined: tolerance in distance and maximum height to consider that two points are repeated and tolerance in minimum distance to seek two consecutive points to calculate the transverse gradient.
DIFFERENT SURFACE OF REFERENCE FOR HEIGHTS It is also possible to use as a height reference a surface other than that of reference for distances (code+distance). If this flag is enabled, we write the type of surface for the height reference (by default, 107).
POINTS GIVEN BY INTERPOLATION This refers to the possibility of identifying points by interpolating their distance between another two. We check the “interpolate” option in the side box and a percentage value in the distance box.
PAGE: 12 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
When a data point us defined by lateral interpolation between two points defined by their code, defined points with code Q may appear in the middle, but they are ignored. For example: POINT A ------Code 2 Left side. Dist. 0.0 Ht. -.1
POINT B -------
POINT C -------
Interpol. %Dist 50.
Interpol. %Dist 75.
POINT D ------Code 1 Left side Dist. 0.0 Ht. -.1
POINT E ------Code 0 Right side Dist 0.0 Ht -.1
For point B, the distance to the axis and height are half way (50%) between A and D. Point C is at a distance of 75% and a height between A and D. If one of the fixed points (not interpolated) to be used as a reference (in the example, A and D) cannot be calculated, neither are the interpolated points.
SECTIONS The input data can be classified into sections. In each section, all the menu data can be changed except the number of the axis and the number of the first page. The final KP of each section is printed even if it does not correspond to the equidistance. Singular KPs are listed in the section to which they correspond. If they are not in a section, they are not listed. Sections can have KP overlaps, be repeated or disordered. The printout is ordered by section (not by KPs) and, within each section, by KP. In the ctref, cfR, cfC and cfCR printouts, when the section changes, there is a page break because the page header data are different. The equidistance option can be switched to multiples, for example: Pki=1. Pkf= 13.5 Equidi=2. Prints: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 13.5 Pki=1. Pkf= 13.5 Multip=2. Prints: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 13.5
8.3.10- Overwork [sobexc OVERWORK (G)]. Printout to level the overexcavation or improved esplanade in the field.
It can generate ctref.res, cf.res, cfR.res and cfC.res files and also enables us to printout the excavation surface to correct an embankment (87).
8.3.11- Security barriers [bionda SECURITY BARRIERS (G)] This printout takes from the ISPOL#.per file the position of the safety barriers and shows their coordinates and length, showing the total length values at the end.
When the printout is generated, we can tell the program to also generate a road markings file called biondaN.mcv.
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 13 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
8.3.12- Railways, tracks reconsidered by long ropes [repvia.res RECONSIDER TRACKS (G)] This printout is according to RENFE standard N.R.V. 7-1-0.2. The marking points can be Load/Save from .top files. The printout enables us to select the axis and track (single, right or left).
8.3.13- Railways, track displacement [ripvia TRACK DISPLACEMENT (.top) (G)] This printout enables us to define: • • • • • • •
The axis. The track: single, right or left. A *.top file with the data points. Possibility of inserting the principal groundplan and/or elevation and/or cant points. Initial KP and final KP. The semiwidth of the track can be fixed or taken from the real position of the track according to the project. The minimum and maximum displacement values. By default, minimum displacement-3000 mm and maximum displacement 3000 mm.
For each point, the following are printed: • • • • • •
KP. Point (number of the *.top or pla, alz or per). Type of GROUND PLAN-ELEVATION (such as, STRAIGHT KV -1000). The radius. The height of the grade line. The cant in mm.
And, in the case of points from the *.top: • • • •
The height of the point. The lift displacement (height of low thread – height of point) in mm. The displacement in mm (distance from the point to the rail). The closest rail of the selected track is automatically selected. The selected rail.
The height of low thread can be different from the height of the grade line in S-shaped curves if the Maintain centre of gravity option has been enabled.
8.3.14- Railways, track apparatus and free track pickets [apavia TRACK APPARATUS (G)] This printout shows the following for each track apparatus: PAGE: 14 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
• • • • •
LINEAR WORKS
Deviated and principal axes. Type of track apparatus. Points on the principal axis: stock rail joint, mathematical centre and heel. Points on the deviated axis: heel (and in the case of crossing, start of apparatus). Free track pickets (with a symbol on the map in the position of each one).
8.3.15- Railways, reconsideration and control of lane [carril RECONSIDER LANE (G)] It generates a printout for reconsideration and control of lane placement. The length of the cord, a distance and a height increase relative to the active face of the lane can be entered. The Round off arrow to mult. [1.000] option enables us to give the value of the arrow with fractions of millimetres.
The generated file is named according to the following nomenclature: carrilEx.res Where: E = Axis number x = "u" for single track, "d" for right track and "i" for left track
8.3.16- Railways, printout for PLASSER batter [plasser PLASSER BATTER] PLASSER BATTER with CGV5 computer.
It generates a printout with a series of columns separated by tabulators. The columns contain the following data: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
KP of the singular point. Synchronism mark (S), had to have no data. Radius: positive (+) Æ right, negative (-) Æ left. The points tangent to the straights are marked with 0. The circulation beginning and end are marked with the radius. Direction of the curve: Positive radius Æ right (D), negative radius Æ left (I). Only shown on the corresponding KPs. Transition curve (0 or nothing=Clothoid, 1=No transition, 2=Klein). In case of non-transition curves, the point tangent to the straight is marked with the radius and a one is entered in this column. If there is transition with a clothoid, it is left blank. Cants: + Æ right, - Æ left. The sign is the same as that of the radius. The points with cant 0 have to be marked, which can coincide or not with the singular ground plan points. Direction of the cant: Positive cant Æ right (D), negative cant Æ left (I), (only at beginning and end of constant cant). Transverse levelling curve on cant (0 or nothing=Clothoid, 1=No transition, 2=Klein).
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 15 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
9.
Vertical curves: the input tangent is marked with the VK and the output tangent with 0, where the VK is positive in peak and negative in valley. When the end of a vertical curve coincides with the start of the next one, the KP is repeated, the first with a zero (end of curve) and the second with the KP of the following curve. 10. Direction of the curve: Positive VK Æ C (peak), negative VK ÆH (valley). 11. We can also enter data through a *.top point file for which the lift displacement and displacement are calculated. Negative lift displacements are entered as zero (maintaining the "-" sign in the column) and a warning is also shown.
POINTS AND GEOMETRIC HEIGHT If a cloud of points have been surveyed (.top file) and levelling has subsequently taken place, the trigonometric height can be replaced by the geometric height of the levelling, also defining a .pkz file. Data can also be entered using: • A .top file of picket coordinates. • A .pkd file of KPs and distances measured from the active face to the picket. • A .pkz file with the levelling of the track.
TOLERANCE Should an overlap appear in the chains of points taken, the following can be entered: • Tolerance in KP when considering that the point has been repeated. The tolerance for repeated points also causes a datum from the .top file to be associated to a singular point if the different of KPs is above tolerance. • Way to distribute the error: a) NOT distribute: Only the average displacement is calculated at the repeated point. b) x Length: The error is distributed according to the distance up a maximum distance. c) x Points: It is corrected at each point by reducing the value of the error at each points by a pre-established value until the entire error is absorbed.
Lower grade line (mm) This enables us to generate printouts for gradually “lifting” the lane when the height difference is important.
Maximum displacement If this value is exceeded, the maximum displacement is printed. Maximum lift This enables us to limit the maximum lift (by default, to 70 mm).
Round off KPs It rounds off the KPs resulting from the specified value (by default, to 1). The rounding off of KPs also affects singular points on ground plans, elevation and cants.
Lists without spaces The data is only separated by the tabulator. When this option is enables, the zeros are removed from decimals and the comma also, in the case of whole values.
0-KV-KV-0 In vertical curves, a datum can be entered with KV=0 at a pre-established distance before and after each curve. SEMIWIDTH OF TRACK ~ FIXED The same value is always applied. It is the option checked by default and appears with the consigned value in TRACK and SLEEPER. { ACCORDTO .vol In this case, it reads the values from the .vol file. With this option it is also possible to not consider the width variation due to the cant.
8.3.17- Track axis [ejevia TRACK AXIS (G)] It generates the ejeviaEx.res printout, where E is the axis number and x is
value u (single track), d (right track) or i (left track). For the requested KPs, it shows the distance to the axis on the ground plan, the X and Y coordinated, the grade line and low thread heights and the cant in mm.
PAGE: 16 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
8.4-
LINEAR WORKS
Measurements, areas and volumes
8.4.1- Measurements on transverse profiles [cvol TRANSV.PROFILE.MEAS (S)] When this button is pressed, we select one of the cvol#.res containing the measurements on the transverse profiles and the total cubication of an axis. This printout is generated with the calculation of the entire elevation or with the redo cubic option. Between these printouts is the cvoltot.res containing the measurements of all the axes. In this case, the complete measurements of each branch are injected in the trunk in a profile, which is the projection of the middle point of the branch axis on the trunk. This printout ends with the total summary of volumes for each axis. It also includes the axes projected on a KP subsequent to the principal axis (they are associated to the final KP). The profile where the crossing is injected appears with a "+" sign and the place where a bevel cone is injected appears with a "c". When the complete calculation is made from the PROJECT window, and if there is a valid axis number in the AXIS to project volumes box, the cvolejes.res printout is generated, containing a summary of measurements per axis, using a column for each measurement with a positive value in at least one axis, and one row per axis. The printout ends with a row with the total value. The measurements of axes located in disabled groups or with the [CAL] and [REC] options enabled will not appear. We can also select the cvolgru.res printout. It is a mixture of the ejes.res and cvolejes.res printouts and contains all the project’s axes divided into groups (only active groups) and shows their number, name, initial and final KP, all the measurements of each axis, each group and the sum of the active groups. It is generated with the cvolejes.res printout when a complete calculation is made from the PROJECT menu and a valid axis number (other than 0) appears in the Axis to project volumes box.
[cvol idem PARTIAL (G)] Printout of the volumes contained in any ISPOL#.per profile file in the section between two KPs specified by the user. It enables us to enter initial cubic measurements to be added to the accumulated values. It asks “only multiples of?” in order to refrain from showing the data for intermediate profiles. It admits a 0 value, meaning that all the profiles in the requested KP range will be shown. It also admits a -1 value, in which case it only shows the final summary. When, to generate a partial cvol.res, we select a ISFIR#.per file, the program analyses whether the “Tonnes” are to be shown in the data of the road surface package of the .vol of the respective axis, and uses the density data from the first section of road surfaces defined in that .vol.
8.4.2- Partial volumes [volp PARTIAL VOLUMES (G)] It asks for the *.per file and the measurements to be shown, generating the volpXX.res file. It also enables us to define a KP to start and end the section. 8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 17 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9 A printout of partial volumes can be generated using all the ISPOL#.per or ISFIR#.per of the active axes. The printout is called volpejes.res. The printouts for all the axes (in active groups) can be generated at the same time, showing only the multiples of a given value. It also generates a cvol0.res or firme0.res printout containing all of them. They can also be generated with the summaries only. The respective cv.res and fi.res are also generated.
If we wish to generate the printout for a single file, we can enter the values of initial accumulated volumes through a dialogue box.
8.4.3- Percentages of volume by section [cvol Percentages x stretches (G)] This option generates a work completed printout. We have to select a .vol file, which is analysed, showing a menu with the names of the measurements it contains and the possibility of assigning a percentage of completion to each one. We can also define the initial and final KP of the section. If the [Another stretch] option is selected, we can define subsequent sections. The [Last stretch] option ends the printout at the final KP of the present section. For each section we can select [Only multiples of]. However, it continues to consider the nonmultiple profiles in the section to calculate the partial and accumulated volume. With a -1 value, a summary is generated for each section, together with a total summary.
8.4.4- Tabulated files for use with spreadsheets For each of the aforementioned types of measurement, cv#.res data files are created which can be loaded from spreadsheets, helping the engineer to perform specific studio tasks or plan land movements.
8.4.5- Level differences, clearings, occupation and mass diagram [dmas MASS DIAGRAM, ETC (S/G)] This prints the dmas#.res file containing the level differences, occupation widths on the left and right, occupied area, clearing areas in land clearance and embankment and land balance. It is generated with Redo cubic and Redo cubic + listAll. In the PARAMETERS menu, we can select whether the CLEARING values are real areas or their ground plan projection.
8.4.6- Clearings [desbr CLEARINGS (S/G)] It prints the desbr#.res file containing the widths of occupation, to the left and right, of land clearance and embankment on ground plan and real surface. It is generated with Redo cubic and Redo cubic + listAll and we can enter initial and final KPs to generate the printout.
PAGE: 18 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
8.4.7- Total areas by refining axis of slopes and clearings [areastot CLEARINGS AND REFINING (G)] This is a tabulated printout, with one line per axis and another with the totals, with the following measurements: AXIS desbroce_real_total Desbroce_Real_Desmonte Desbroce_Real_Terraplen Desbroce_planta_total Desbroce_planta_Desmonte Desbroce_planta_Terraplen Mediana_Izquierda Mediana_derecha Talud_Desmonte_izquierdo Talud_Desmonte_derecho Talud_Terraplén_Izquierdo Talud_Terraplén_derecho Subrasante_Izquierda Subrasante_Derecha.
8.4.8- Sowing areas [siembra SOWING AREAS (G)] This printout is similar to REFINING AREAS but only shows surfaces of slopes in land clearance or embankment. The printouts separate the left from the right measurements, and also show a first column with the total area in land clearance and embankment. We can generate a single printout, siembratot.res or siembra.res, containing all the axes in active groups.
To calculate them, there are two possibilities: 1. 2.
~ Measurement by KPs Option by default. { x Barycentres. Compensating the distances by the barycentres.
The MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM TRANSVERSE GRADIENT values can be entered, in which case the printout only measures the areas in which the transverse gradient is between the values entered. Include Inadequate Lev. Area.We can include or not the sowing areas in the inadequate levelled areas. Exclude Rock Lev. Area. We can include or not the sowing areas in levelled areas on rock. [Initial fill code] We can define an initial code to measure the fill area. By default, it is 100 (sub-grade line drain). If the code does not exist, the measurement is from the immediately lower code.
8.4.9- Measurements of pavements [firm PAVEMENTS MEASUREMENTS (S/G)] The volume measurements of each component of the road surface package can be seen in the firme#.res files. Tabulated fi#.res files are also created when we generate or recalculate the road surface package of each axis. We can also show the firmetot.res, including the road surface summary axis by axis, including the tonnes of each component if we enter a density value for each component and the ; List tonnes box is checked. It also generates the firmgru.res and firmejes.res printouts with measurements of road surface layers per axis and group. If all the axes have the List Fill box disabled in the road surface definition menu, the fills are not shown in the joint summary in the firmetot.res file. When a new printout is generated, we are asked for: • •
Axis number Initial KP
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 19 / 26
LINEAR WORKS • •
ISPOL 9
Final KP ROADWAY: 0: Right ,1: Left, 2: Both
Should the printout be obtained for one of the roadways, the firme#D.res and fi#D.res or firme#.res and fi#.res printouts are also obtained, where # is the axis number.
8.4.10- Slope refining areas [refino SUBGRADE: AREAS (G)]. This show the areas of the land clearance and embankment slopes to calculate their refining cost. Partial printouts can be generated for the right or left sides, or both of them together.
8.4.11- Pavement irrigation areas
[riegos PAVEMENT: SPRAY AREAS (G)] This generates the irrigation areas of the selected road surface component or the selected road surface layer. It can be generated for a specific layer, for the subgrade line or for all the present layers. If the printout is generated for one of the roadways, the riego#D.res or riego#I.res (where # is the axis number) printouts are also generated. The partial areas consider all intermediate profiles, although they are not printed. It ends with a summary by layer. When asked to generate a printout with the irrigation of the road surfaces of all the active axes, the riegostot.res file is generated. These printouts also include the real widths of the layers.
8.4.12- Geotextile areas [areag GEOTEXTILE AREAS (G)] This generates a printout with the lengths in profile, partial and accumulate surface areas.
This printout is based on two types of surface: the lower surface is represented by line type L87, representing the bottom clearance line and the upper surface, with line type L89, corresponds to the drainage layer line. The length is measured in the areas where these two surfaces are separate.
8.4.13- Areas by length [areas LONGITUDE AREAS
PAGE: 20 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
Istram 9.05 14/05/07 11:01:57 2246 PROJECT : TEST PROJECT AXIS : 1:
Mountain motorway
******************************************************************************************** * * * AREAS AND LENGTHS * * * * * * * * * ********************************************************************************************
K.P. ----------0.000 15.000 30.000 45.000 60.000 75.000 90.000 105.000 120.000 135.000 150.000 165.000 180.000 195.000 210.000
2.0 11.0 ----------------- -----------------LENGTH IN PROFILE PARTIAL AREAS ACCUMULATED AREAS ------------------------- ------------------------- ------------------------REAL LENG 2D LENG REAL AREA 2D AREA REAL AREA 2D AREA ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ -----------2.508 2.500 0.000 0.000 0.00 0.00 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 37.62 37.50 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 75.24 75.00 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 112.86 112.50 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 150.48 150.00 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 188.10 187.50 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 225.72 225.00 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 263.34 262.50 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 300.96 300.00 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 338.58 337.50 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 376.20 375.00 2.508 2.500 37.620 37.500 413.82 412.50 2.507 2.500 37.615 37.500 451.43 450.00 2.504 2.500 37.588 37.500 489.02 487.50 2.502 2.500 37.549 37.500 526.57 525.00
8.4.14- Cutting and demolition [fresa CUTTING AND DEMOLITION (G)] It separately presents the cutting and demolition volumes of the existing roadway. For each KP it also prints the accumulated ground plan areas.
The dialogue box includes an option for generating a setting out of the sub-grade line printout. A code is added to each point according to its position relative to the existing roadway.
8.5-
Project data, analysis and transformation
8.5.1- Intersections between ground plan axes [inters AXES INTERSECTIONS (G)] This generates a printout with the KPs, coordinates, heights of the axes and terrain and height differences of all the intersections between the ground plan axes and azimuths of each axis. It enables us to add a tolerance value to lengthen the ends of the axes to seek the cuts. This printout only analyses axes belonging to active groups.
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 21 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
8.5.2- Land clearance kerbs and guard kerbs [cunet, cungd KERBS, GUARDS K. (G)] This generates a printout of kerbs.
The following options also generate files with a .ras or .lon extension to be used in the design of grade lines, on the right or on the left (I, D): cun_I.ras, cun_D.ras
cun_I.lon, cun_D.lon
From the GRADE LINES menu, in LOAD1, we can use these files to load these data in the longitudinal profiles of the kerbs, and then change them if necessary. It also enables us to generate a cungd.res printout with the guard kerbs (option: { Guard Kerb.). The printout ends with total kerb length per side.
8.5.3- Transverse profiles of the terrain (perf.res) [perf PROFILES OF THE TERRAIN (G)] When this option is selected, the program asks in the message area for the number of the axis for which we wish to obtain the printout. The screen then displays the printout for each profile, its KP and the distance to the axis and height of each of the points on the profile. The printout is saved with the following name: perf#.res (where # is the axis number): Istram 9.05 14/05/07 12:54:41 2246 PROJECT : TEST PROJECT AXIS : 1:
page Mountain motorway
1
==================================================== * * * PROFILES OF THE TERRAIN * * * ==================================================== KP 0+000.000 DIST.AXI HT -96.795 578.348 -96.059 578.000 -94.132 577.273 -93.849 577.000 -88.381 576.245 -86.817 576.000 -75.741 575.724 -69.459 575.445 -59.867 575.000 -58.875 574.523 -57.795 574.000 -54.164 573.320 -52.537 573.000 -41.426 572.007 -41.342 572.000 -33.358 572.000
KP 0+015.000 DIST.AXI HT -99.090 587.000 -97.995 586.224 -97.730 586.000 -97.285 585.573 -96.809 585.000 -96.373 584.788 -95.543 584.000 -94.663 583.409 -94.136 583.000 -93.483 582.532 -92.598 582.000 -91.705 581.399 -91.107 581.000 -89.650 580.130 -89.488 580.000 -89.448 579.957
KP 0+030.000 DIST.AXI HT -99.651 587.293 -99.080 587.000 -98.901 586.808 -97.742 586.000 -96.976 585.245 -96.685 585.000 -95.242 584.079 -95.129 584.000 -94.878 583.808 -93.918 583.075 -93.831 583.000 -93.696 582.931 -91.544 582.000 -90.646 581.097 -90.571 581.000 -90.477 580.934
KP 0+045.000 DIST.AXI HT -99.111 587.015 -99.093 587.002 -99.090 587.000 -99.076 586.991 -97.451 586.000 -97.099 585.537 -96.793 585.000 -96.399 584.780 -95.172 584.000 -94.226 583.130 -94.083 583.000 -92.517 582.015 -92.491 582.000 -92.487 581.997 -91.202 581.000 -89.812 580.129
8.5.4- Drainage works [obras DRAINAGE WORKS (G)] generates the obras.res printout of prefabricated work.
8.5.5- Wells, tubes, turns [pozos WELL Z (G)] generates the pozos.res printout with the list of wells, in the case of supported or underground pipe sections. PAGE: 22 / 26
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[tubos TUBES (G)] tubos.res printout which shows both ground plan lengths (2D) and real lengths (3D), plus diameter, thickness, type, material and description of each tube.
[rotatn ANGLES OF TURNS (G)] generates the codos.res printout with the KP of the turns, their input and output gradients and the ground plan and real angle in sexagesimal degrees.
8.5.6- Special longitudinal profiles [lon SPECIAL LONGITUDINAL (G)] enables us to generate two printouts and files of different longitudinal profiles: Lonfm#.res, lonfm#.lon (with # as axis number): printout or longitudinal of the bottom of the central reserve. Lonpf#.res, lonpf#.lon (with # as axis number): printout or longitudinal of the inner foot of the first layer of road surface, on the side where the cant is inclined towards the central verge. It also enables us to create the ground plan (3D) of the longitudinal profiles.
8.5.7- Control of Z [controlZ Z CONTROL .top (G)] The program uses a .top file to compare its heights with the surface
defined by a theoretical depth and a tolerance. The KP and distance to the axis of each point are calculated, together with the theoretical Z, considering the cant and theoretical depth. The height difference (error) is printed and if it is out of tolerance it is marked as either above or below the theoretical value.
Two possibilities for determining the project height: 1) 2)
Prolonging the cant of the principal roadway. Real section: if the point is in the platform area it uses surface 67; otherwise, it uses surface 68. If it is outside surface 68, 0 height is assigned.
[controlZ Z CONTROL . per (G)] (control of heights from a .per file): it enables us to compare to surfaces at fixed distances from the axis. A theoretical depth can be subtracted from the first surface. A tolerance is also given to mark the points with errors in excess of this value.
8.5.8- Summary of project axes [ejes SUMMARY OF AXES (G)] contains, for each axis, the group to which it belongs, its number, initial KP, final KP, length and name or title.
8.5.9- *.vol file data [datvol FILE DATA.vol (G)] enables us to generate a printout which can be personalised, with the number and name of the current axis, to which we can add the desired *.vol file data by activating the respective flag (by default, cants, widths, roadways, auxiliary roadways and calculation areas). 8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 23 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
With the ~ Current or { All option, we can generate the printout for the current axis or a joint printout for all the active axes.
8.5.10- Axes characteristics [characte CHARACTERISTICS (G)] generates the caracte.res printout containing a summary of the characteristics of the axes on ground plan and elevation by group (lengths, gradients and radii, maximums and minimums, speeds, etc.).
8.5.11- LandXML [LANDXML
For the selected axes, their ground plan, elevation and the transverse profiles between the specified KPs are exported. The surfaces of the profiles to be exported are grade line, sub-grade line, kerb and slope, selecting either one of them or all of them except grade line. It also adapts the export of "CrossSectSurf" elements for processing with TRIMBLE equipment. For TRIMBLE equipment, check [skip null length alignments] and [specify length and azimuth in alignments]. For LEICA equipment, check [Export codes] and [StringLines].
Complete without Gradient (68) exports a single surface corresponding to ISTRAM surface 68. In other words, it exports the slopes, kerbs and sub-grade line on the same surface.
Export codes (FEATURE) This option enables us to export or not the ISTRAM codes to the .xml file within the FEATURE section. The FEATURE section is for LEICA and could have to be disabled for TRIMBLE equipment, which does not interpret it correctly.
PVI This option enables us to export or not the
StringLines This option exports a road in stringline format. Transv.Sec.Design As a standard
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
8.5.12- Structures [estr_STRUCTURES (G)] generates the estr_#.res printout (where # is the axis number) which contains information taken from the STRUCTURES menu: type of structure, roadway, KP, terrain and grade line height, coordinates X and Y of the axis at the initial, middle and final points of the structure, ground plan and real (3D) length and name of the structure. Also, for viaducts and overpasses the KPs of of the piles.
8.5.13- s/SC1 TRANSVERSE SECTION For the specified range of axes, it created an interchange file describing the cross section along the axis (sc1 files). The files are stored in a new SC1 folder in the user’s working folder.
In SURFACES, the user indicates the data to be obtained: ISPOLn.per for land data and ISFIRn.per for road surface data. If we select ISPOLn.per, we choose the number of surfaces to be exported and, in this case, there are two possibilities: •
Number of surfaces to be exported equal to one. In this case, the program provides five possibilities:
o o o o o •
1ÆGrade line 2ÆSub-grade line 3ÆGround_Select. 4Æ Embankment Clearing 5ÆOther (in this case, the user specifies the type of surface)
Number of surfaces to be exported more than one. In this case, it asks for the number of surfaces and then for the type of line associated to each surface. All the surfaces are printed one after another, separated by a header such as SURFACExx, where xx is the type of surface. In this case of multiple surfaces, they are exported with the original points and codes without being completed or reencoded as in the case of a single surface.
if we select NOÆISFIRn.per, we are asked for the number of layer to be exported, with 0 being the subgrade line and 1 to 30 the respective number of each road surface layer. Once a layer has bee chosen, the user has to enter the depth at which he wishes to obtain the result. The points of the geometric axis of a surface is always identified by code -1000. All the selected layers 15, 16, 17 and 18 are encoded in the same way as 107. when generated by the line of ground selected, code 101 is maintained. When the axis is truncated on one of the sides, a pseudovertical point is added one millimetre at the beginning or the end, with the height corresponding to the cut with the terrain. The s_.res printout can be obtained. Remember that for a printout of a single ISPOLn.per surface, it is laterally completed with surface 68.
8.5.14- TRIMBLE This printout enables us to export data to TRIMBLE equipment. We can select the desired data according to the surface to which they belong.
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
PAGE: 25 / 26
LINEAR WORKS
PAGE: 26 / 26
ISPOL 9
8 - PROJECT PRINTOUT AND REPORTS
LINEAR WORKS WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
9
The information contained in this document is the exclusive property of Buhodra Ingeniería S.A., and is protected by national and international intellectual property laws. The reproduction or alteration of any text or image is expressly prohibited. Printing is permitted exclusively for personal or corporate use; duplication for training activities not authorised in writing is prohibited. This training and explanatory material may be altered without prior notification. Although this documentation undergoes ongoing revision, there is no guarantee that the data tables, specimen files and other specifications displayed on screen exactly match those reproduced in this document when the program is used. Any consequences of using this material, or by extension the programs accompanying it, are the responsibility of the user.
LINEAR WORKS 1
01 Introduction and General Aspects
2
02 Axis Design in Ground Plan, Reframing and Drawing
3
03 Elevation, Land Profiles and Grade Lines
4
04 Elevation, Platform and Cross Section
5
05 Elevation, Advanced Project Calculation
6
06 Complex Calculations, Crossings and Junctions
7
07 Drawing Ground Plan and Profiles
8
08 Project Reports
9
09 10 11 12
Widening and Improvement Projects Railway Design Drainage and Distribution, Pipes Project Tracking and Monitoring
http://www.istram.net
© Buhodra Ingeniería S.A.
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
INDEX
9 – WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS 9.1-
WIDEN AND IMPROVEMENT: ROAD SURFACE REINFORCEMENT .......................................... 3 9.1.1-
9.2-
9.2.19.2.2-
9.3-
Vertical alinement Definition.................................................................................... 6 Superelevations ........................................................................................................ 7
WIDEN AND IMPROVEMENT MENU ...................................................................................... 8 9.4.19.4.29.4.3-
9.5-
Profile Extraction ...................................................................................................... 4 Altering Profile Files ................................................................................................. 5
SECTION .......................................................................................................................... 6 9.3.19.3.2-
9.4-
Starting Data ............................................................................................................. 3
HORIZONTAL DESIGN ....................................................................................................... 4
Parameters to be Defined in Widen and Improvement .......................................... 9 Road Surface Scarification and Demolition ........................................................... 11 Road Surface Reinforcement on Motorways.......................................................... 12
REINFORCEMENT TABLES ................................................................................................. 14 9.5.19.5.29.5.39.5.4-
Existing Road Surface Data ..................................................................................... 14 Recognised Natural Ground .................................................................................... 15 Margin clearing ......................................................................................................... 15 Action......................................................................................................................... 16
INDEX
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 1 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
INDEX
INDEX
PAGE: 2 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
ISPOL 9
9.1-
LINEAR WORKS
Widen and Improvement: Road Surface Reinforcement
9.1.1- Starting Data In extension and improvement projects, starting data may come from: Cartography (photogrammetric plotting), which, due to its accuracy, is generally not a sufficiently reliable source of data. Topographical field elevations, indicating the platform lines (usually, only the borders of the roadway and some sporadic information on its immediate surroundings). The scaling line defines the limits of the usable part of the existing road surface. This line is generated using the data of a previous study, and may even match the existing line of the roadway border. Let’s assume that a 25 centimetre-wide band of the old road surface needs to be demolished: To determine the scaling line, a line parallel to the existing roadway border (F2) can be created at this distance (S2).
First of all, we will have created the intermediate point S0, which must be placed at the correct Z above the existing roadway.
If we state F1, F, F2 as the surface, and extract transverse profiles with a lower equidistance than that of the starting data (greater accuracy), with the options Line T and Line L we can have this surface as the Z giver, which will allow us to obtain points S2 of the scaling line at its actual Z.
For the thickness of the existing road surface, we begin, more than from the actual thickness information of the of old road surface package, from the dimension which is considered for the purposes of the new work. There are a number of differences between this type of project and projects of works with a new layout. These concern both ground plan design and longitudinal profile and elevation, and are detailed below.
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 3 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
9.2-
ISPOL 9
Horizontal Design
The new layout will be based on the old one. Of particular interest here are the various types of connection which we can activate using the corresponding drop-down menu as we design the ground plan axis alignments. Generally, depending on the scope of the project, curves are opened, giving them a larger radius, existing widths are increased, dangerous curves are removed from the layout or replaced with straight stretches, etc. ® The ability to plot the new axis using ISTRAM while viewing the existing platform in the cartography is very helpful. It is also undoubtedly useful to be able to insert the new ground plan axis between lines parallel to the borders of the current roadway. To give points which alignments pass through and to adjust radii, the options [aRa] [:] [R] [.] are very useful. These allow us to drag alignments dynamically by one point, two points, radius, etc.
9.2.1- Profile Extraction The support surface for profile extraction must contain at least the lines corresponding to land and the borders of the existing roadway. The floating Transverse menu shows an option for Widen and Improvement:
When this option is activated, new boxes appear, corresponding to Current Border Type, Clearing Lim. Type and Current Thickness. If we click on the Current Border Type box, we can enter the type of line which represents the borders of the existing roadway by selecting it on screen with the mouse or keying it in. In Draining Lim. Type, by clicking on the numerical box we can enter the type of line representing the scaling line generated. The Thickness represents the size assigned to the existing road surface package. With the boxes L_D and R_D, we can define the Scaling Lines at a particular distance from a line of the cartography.
PAGE: 4 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
The option Median Type allows us to select a particular type of line for the inner borders of the roadways of a motorway. In this case, the outer borders should be represented by one type of line, and the inner borders by a different type. With the options [ ]Clearing and Thickness by Table, the margin to be cleared from the existing roadway and the thickness of the existing road surface may be variable, and are defined in a separate table: the REINFORCEMENT TABLE, which will be described later on. Once the types of line representing the borders of the existing roadway have been stated, ISTRAM® thinks that the current roadway limits and clearing border for each profile will be the two lines of the corresponding type which are closest to the axis, whether they are on either side or the same side of the axis. This is why we must avoid other lines (kerb bases, feet of levelled areas or cuts, etc.) taking on the type of the roadway border. If we have a project consisting of axes which involve the widen and improvement of other, existing axes, and newly-plotted axes, the option According to .pol [IMP] allows extraction of transverse profiles of the improvement type for those which have the [IMP] key in the project table activated, and generates conventional profiles for the rest.
[ ]L Type → Profile Code: When the mode for using the type of line for the code in the profile point is activated, we can select a code for the point on the axis [Axis Code]. In profiles for Widen and Improvement, we can also select a code for the clearing border [Draining Code] when instead of being shown in the cartography the clearing line is defined by the line of the roadway border itself plus a distance.
9.2.2- Altering Profile Files Often, our preliminary information includes profile files which contain points of the land which are encoded as belonging to an existing border of the roadway. These can be converted into widen and improvement profile files using the option Alter ISTRAM® Profiles, Widen and Improvement by code. When this command is selected, the program requests the roadway border code, the clearing border code and the thickness of the existing road surface package, and subsequently generates a new profile file containing all the surfaces generated and copying the existing surface.
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 5 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
9.3-
ISPOL 9
Section
The data of the new works project are entered in the ELEVATION table in the standard way. Some of the defining elements, such as road surface packages, ground selected or clearings, will interact in one way or another with the data which define the peculiarities of the existing layout stretch by stretch, and its relationship to the actions decided upon.
9.3.1- Vertical alinement Definition There are various ways to shape the longitudinal profile of the new works, which are based in some way on the existing road. Let’s look at two of these possibilities.
[On Ground] The longitudinal profile to be constructed copies that of the existing roadway, as the starting data have been taken according to the lines of the border of this roadway. This option appears in the corresponding key of the VERTICAL ALINEMENT menu.
This option supports the vertical alinement of the new layout on this land, raising it at each point by a Z increase given by the user, and from a particular initial KP to another. Once the automatic vertical alinements have been generated in this way, it is always possible to insert, erase or add new stretches, and vertical curves.
[Min. Z] This is a much more rigorous solution, as it always takes into consideration the most unfavourable point, maintaining on this point the Z increase entered by the user at all times. We will therefore first have to define widths and superelevations of the new roadway, to be able to determine the most unfavourable point at each KP. If the option [Increase Z by Reinforcement Table] is used, the Z increases will be read from this table.
It will be necessary to review the starting-point and endpoint of the stretch being studied, in order that all the parameters of the improved and non-improved stretches match, cutting the road surface thickness which corresponds to the old road surface at these points to make the new roadway fit with the old one in the next stretch. As in the previous case, once vertical alinement stretches have been generated automatically, it is possible to alter them by inserting, erasing or adding new stretches and vertical curves. Similarly, observing or editing the profiles calculated may advise variations in the superelevations proposed, or even in the axis in the ground plan or width diagram when the new platform moves outside the borders of the old one in areas containing walls, high levelled areas, etc.
PAGE: 6 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
9.3.2- Superelevations In the SUPERELEVATIONS option, we can copy the superelevations of the old roadway, which are deduced from the land profiles which contain it, to the new roadway using the option E and I:
This option offers two calculation possibilities. Superelevations by new axis: Analyses the gradients of the roadway at the point where the new axis intersects the roadway. These gradients will be taken as the superelevations for the new roadway.
Superelevations by existing borders: Analyses the gradients of the borders of the existing roadway, these gradients being used as superelevations for the new roadway.
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 7 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
9.4-
ISPOL 9
Widen and improvement menu
This is a floating menu especially adapted to calculating the cross section in widen projects. With the option “real section” from the fixed menu, the section is shown in real time with the improvement applied at the KP selected.
This replaces [Calculation] in the SECTION menu. Instead, four buttons appear (at the bottom of the floating menu). These are activated sequentially to follow the calculation according to the constraints indicated in the options at the top of the table. It is also possible to calculate from the Project menu, with the options [CAL] and [IMP] activated. 1.- [Calculate without Improvement]
3.- [Improvement + Redo Cubic Cap.]
2.-[Generate Road Surface Package]
4.- [Road Surface Package Improvement] In this way the new platform is generated, taking into account the old vertical alinement, the road surface package, etc. (thick line in the diagram). The options at the top of the menu allow a *.eym file containing a series of constraints for the calculation to be saved or loaded.
PAGE: 8 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
9.4.1- Parameters to be Defined in Widen and Improvement [Minimum reinforcement thickness for road surface] The definition of this must be in line with the rest of the project data. If the option [ ] by Reinforcement Table is activated, this thickness may be variable and is defined in the REINFORCEMENT TABLE described later on. When the new vertical alinement is much lower than the old one, the existing road surface must be cut or demolished so that the whole thickness of the carriageway is accessible.
Continuity step, which allows us to increase the minimum reinforcement thickness at the sides of the package being used. This step is defined by its width and height, [Step Width] and [Step Height].
[Minimum border improvement ] This is usually restricted according to the roller size of the of the machinery used (generally 1.5 metres). If the adjacent road surface package is narrower, the existing road surface is demolished until the size enables the machinery being used to enter the added band. The distance reference can be defined from a code, using the function [Code]. By default, the code 100 is used.
[Use if reaches border] In cases in which the border of the new roadway is on the existing roadway, the [Use if corresponding reaches border] box may be activated, as would happen in the following example.
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 9 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
[Minimum thickness for road surface layer] This determines the smallest dimension permitted as the thickness of the road surface layer, as it is impossible to have a layer thickness of zero in cases in which a wedge is formed, the corresponding layer being cut and the wedge being added to the upper layer (dotted triangle). This value may be different for each of the components of the road surface package, and with different values for each of the stretches which define the Widen and Improvement parameters.
Dimensions of selected ground
[Settle S.G.] This has four possible values: [DON’T SETTLE]: If the new platform is being constructed completely, even if part of the old platform can used, it is demolished in order to put down the whole S.G. layer.
[On Existing Roadway]: Allows the existing roadway to be taken as part of the selected ground.
[On
Usable
Roadway]:
Allows the usable roadway (excluding scaling at the borders) to be taken as part of the selected ground. As for drawing.
[Demolish Existing Roadway]: If the existing roadway is not used but the selected ground overlaps the existing road surface package, the whole of the existing road surface package is demolished and filled in up to the old subgrade with selected ground. It is also possible to define a [Minimum Thickness for Selected Ground]: if this thickness is not reached, the whole of the layer of selected ground is placed, even if it needs to be demolished.
[Minimum Fill Thickness]: If the fill on the existing roadway has a lower thickness than the value indicated, the selected ground is increased instead of the fill. [SubGrd_New Margin below SubGrdL_Old and Use]: By default, the program understands that in areas where the new subgrade designed is below the existing subgrade, the existing roadway cannot be used because the total thickness of the road surface package would be below the thickness planned. However, a value can be entered here which allows us to give a margin to this criterion, i.e. it is like telling the program that instead of having an existing road surface of X cm, it is X+margin. This allows the existing road surface always to be used.
PAGE: 10 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
[ ] Do not place Selected Ground if the Main Roadway Border (code 2) is on the existing road surface. If the new subgrade is below the existing road surface, if the flag is activated the selected ground is not placed in the widen area.
[Regularisation Wedge]: Values: [Minimum Thickness] and [Tolerable Thickness]. Both thicknesses are measured below the Minimum Reinforcement layer. When the existing road surface package is above the minimum thickness, this thickness may be absorbed by the carriageway. When it is below the Tolerable Thickness, it may be assumed by the regularisation wedge. However, when it is between these two values, the program cuts the existing package so as to make a gap up to the Tolerable Thickness, so that the Regularisation Wedge has at least this tolerable thickness. When these two values are used, the same minimum thickness entered here for the layer which is to be used as the regularisation wedge must be entered in the minimum thickness window of the road surface layers.
9.4.2- Road Surface Scarification and Demolition Scarification by [cutting] is the most accurate solution, and can be selected using this option.
Otherwise, we will opt for [road surface demolition], both [up to new subgradient] and completely, deleting [whole existing package], more realistic from the point of view of practical implementation.
The Maximum Cutting Thickness can also be defined. If it exceeds this value, demolition takes place.
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 11 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
Minimum usable width [ ]. This operates if the value is greater than zero. If the width of the usable strip of the existing roadway is below this value, nothing is used. LEFT BORDER Code [0.0] [R/L] Distance [0.0 ]
RIGHT BORDER Code [0.0] [R/L] Distance [0.0 ]
This allows one point on either side to be defined using the code on the roadway, and a distance, so that from this point outwards the subgrade is extended with the tendency at this point. In other words, if the existing road surface is being demolished is it demolished right to the end. If it is being cut, the subgrade is extended parallel to the main roadway up to the end. This operates when a code other than 0 is placed. For motorways in which reinforcement is applied only to the right-hand roadway, a right-hand side code “R” can be applied to the “LEFT BORDER” (using a point such as 1, -11 or -100, for example), in the area of the central reservation. [SET STRETCHES]: Different stretches can be defined, to which to apply different values of the parameters described. If a specific profile is not within any stretch, the use of the existing roadway in it is not calculated.
9.4.3- Road Surface Reinforcement on Motorways The reinforcement of motorway road surfaces is carried out in the same way as for single carriageways, the only difference being that in the transverse menu we must select the type of line for inner borders of roadways. Another alternative but more complicated method would be the following: •
We begin with a single ground plan axis which can go along the central reservation of the motorway.
•
This axis is duplicated with the options “Save 1 Axis” and “Add File” in GROUND PLAN.
•
We are going to design the right-hand roadway on the first “r” axis, and the left-hand roadway on the first “l” axis.
•
Profiles are extracted for both axes at the same KPs. In the case of Widen and Improvement, the first axis is defined by the borders of the existing right-hand roadway, and the second by those of the left-hand roadway.
•
In elevation, we can now define two identical sections of motorway, or two roads, one for each roadway. In this latter case, we will do the following: o o o o
In elevation, we move the ground plan axis to the inner white bands using eccentricity. For this we can use the function “Eccentricity by Line”, clicking on the existing inner white band. For the axis which represents the right-hand roadway, the main roadway is defined with only the right-hand half of the roadway. We can use “widths by lines” by clicking on the outer white band. The same for the left-hand roadway. The rest of the data of each section are defined with the help of functions such as “Minimum Z longitudinal”, “Widen and improvement superelevations”, etc. Inner fill slopes must have the slope for the new central reservation.
•
“Calculation” and “Improvement” are carried out independently for each of the two axes.
•
If there are two roads, a boundary line is defined using “Auto BD”. This is where the inner slopes intersect and the files ISPOLr.per and ISPOLl.per are truncated. If the elevation has been carried out as two motorways, the ground plan axis is used as the boundary line.
•
Finally, we use the function “2Axis>Motorway” to join the two sides. This function uses the files ISPOLr.per and ISPOLl.per to create a third file, ISPOLa.per (we recommend triplicating the ground plan axis used as the starting-point, in order to assign it to this final axis). This function
PAGE: 12 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
undoes the eccentricities and re-encodes the inner points on each profile (inner shoulder -11, central reservation vertex -100, etc.), creating two files, #ISPOLr.per and #ISPOLl.per. Next, it combines them with the following feature: o o
For the surfaces of existing land and roadways, it takes those of #ISPOLr.per for the right-hand half-profile, and those of #ISPOLl.per for the left-hand half-profile. For the surfaces of the Platform and new subgrade, selected ground, etc., those of #ISPOLl.per are added to those of #ISPOLr.per, so that there is a single, continuous surface for each element.
Finally, it recubes ISPOLa.per. The file ISPOLa.per allows reports and transverse and longitudinal plans to be extracted as any motorway axis.
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 13 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
9.5-
ISPOL 9
Reinforcement tables
Reinforcement tables allow a series of data defining the geometry of the existing roadway to be brought together in a single menu, as well as the actions to be carried out to improve the roadway.
9.5.1- Existing Road Surface Data The existing road surface thicknesses are defined here by KP, and divided into aggregate and ballast data. These data on the existing road surface package may be taken into consideration when profiles are extracted, if we mark the corresponding box in the Transverse Table ([ ] Clearing and Thickness by Table). The data in the Reinforcement Table are then read. The existing road surface thickness in a specific profile will be taken as the sum of the aggregate and ballast thicknesses at this KP.
PAGE: 14 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
ISPOL 9
LINEAR WORKS
9.5.2- Recognised Natural Ground The data which characterise the ground are incorporated here, as are the thickness of the selected ground for each of these grounds. Unlike the Selected Ground menu in Elevation, in the table we can reflect a single layer of selected ground, whose thickness will be read directly from this Reinforcement Table if we activate the corresponding box in the Selected Ground menu in Elevation ( Thickness by Reinforcement Table). In this recognised natural land table, we can enter a different thickness value for the selected ground at the initial and end KPs (iSGthick and eSGthick). When an old file is loaded, the program repeats the thickness for the initial and end KPs. [ESG<=ISGnex(EKP==IKPnex)]. When this option is pressed, the program copies the initial thickness of selected ground of the next stretch to the end thickness of selected ground, provided that the end KP of the stretch coincides with the initial KP of the next section. When new data are entered into a table, if the initial thickness of selected ground is entered, the program copies it to the end thickness of selected ground, if the value of the latter was zero. Two parameters can be defined along with Selected Ground thickness:
Extension: If this option is activated, the minimum thickness of selected ground is measured from the point which separates the reinforcement and widen areas.
Regularisation: In Regularisation mode, if we enter a gradient value other than zero, this value is used instead of the value of the superelevation of the existing roadway. If the Subgrade is lower than the existing roadway surface (i.e. the regularisation layer is not needed), the depth of the other layers of Selected Ground defined is measured from the subgrade at the border of the existing roadway. (This means that they maintain their thicknesses.) In regularisation mode, the base of the regularisation layer and the lower layers of the selected ground can be made parallel to the subgrade by putting -1000 as the gradient. (Remember that with gradient = 0.0, the gradient of the existing roadway is extended, and with a value other than zero the gradient stated is used.)
Gradient: To give the outward gradient from the previous point. To use these options in the Selected Ground menu, the option Thickness by Reinforcement Table in the Selected Ground Menu must be activated.
O.Levelled Area: This value, which is taken as a second layer of selected ground to build below the first only in levelled areas (Overexcavation or Clearing in Levelled Area). When we define a thickness and gradient for the selected ground from the Reinforcement Table, this gradient must always be sent, even if when it is applied the result is a lower thickness than with the parallel selected ground.
9.5.3- Margin clearing The margin clearing (or use of road surfaces) are defined in the table according to the various KPs, given the distance, in metres, from the existing roadway border. These values are taken into consideration when the clearing limits which appear in the cut transverse profiles with the Transverse table in the Reframing and Profiles menu are defined, by activating the corresponding box ([ ] Clearing and Thickness by Table).
[Redo Profile]: This option builds (or redoes, if it already exists) the clearing surface of land profiles for widen and improvement, using the margins defined in the Reinforcement Table.
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS
PAGE: 15 / 16
LINEAR WORKS
ISPOL 9
9.5.4- Action The type of action needed in each stretch is established. There are three main types:
CUTTING Removing a certain thickness of the existing aggregate by scarification or cutting, and subsequent application of a given thickness of reinforcement. REINFORCEMENT Indicates the application of a particular reinforcement of road surfaces on the existing roadway, with no other operations. RECONSTRUCTION Would involve complete demolition of the existing roadway and subsequent application of new road surfaces. In the VERTICAL ALINEMENT menu, the various stretches will appear in different colours (magenta for cutting, red for reinforcement and white for reconstruction). Both the On Ground and the Min. Z options from the VERTICAL ALINEMENT menu offer the possibility of reading these data from the Reinforcement Table. In the WIDEN AND IMPROVEMENT menu, the minimum thickness of road surface reinforcement can be extracted from the action table by activating the box [ ] by Reinforcement Table.
PAGE: 16 / 16
9 - WIDENING AND IMPROVEMENT PROJECTS